ПОДГОТОВКА ЕГЭ

  • Контроль знаний
  • Подготовка к тестированию
  • Работа в классе
  • pdf
  • 25.04.2018
Публикация в СМИ для учителей

Публикация в СМИ для учителей

Бесплатное участие. Свидетельство СМИ сразу.
Мгновенные 10 документов в портфолио.

Данное пособие помогает максимально эффективно подготовиться к сдаче экзамена по английскому языку в форме ЕГЭ. Все языковые школы, преподаватели, репетитор используют данную систему. Данные материалы стало тяжело находить на просторах интернета, поэтому добавлю это наиполезнейшее пособие для облегчения Вашей жизни, уважаемые коллеги.
Иконка файла материала Рабочая тетрадь.pdf

Practice Tests for the

Russian State Exam

Elena Klekovkina Malcolm Mann

Steve Taylore - Knowles

MACMILLAN

lntroduction


В—хние в СЪрник тестов для подготовки к государственному экзамену по

языку.

пклю•кется в том. чтобы помочь и Успешно слать единый по английскому языку ( Ы Э).

С— в себя 20 тестов. каждый из которых состоит

К— —дествуег серия упражнений. которые к выткхлнению заданий соответству юших

Мы настоятельно рекомендуем вам проделать у—жжния того. как вы приступите к выполнению —иний.

сборник лестн сугражаег содержание и формат ЕГЭ мглийскому языку

Структура единого государственного экзамена по английскому языку

Единый государственный экзамен по английскому языку состоит частей. Первая часть. письменная. включает в себя чинре разделс «Ау:шрование». «Чтение». «Грамматика и лексика».

-Пж•ьмо-. Вторая часть, усмая. включает раздел «Кворение».

 проведения экзамена на одного человека (без учета  ожидания и ш№груктажи) 167 мины“. Первая часть хмтся минут. њгорая — 12 минут.

Ра.»ел 1: Ау)ирование

ДЕ— состоит из 14 тестовых заданий. У вас будет прослушать каждый текст дважды. что поможет вам лучк спраыпыя с поставленными задачами. Рекомендуемое выполнение кианиГ1 Раздела не более 25 минут. зца_нии (В 1 ) вы услышите пять коротких ч»пттически.х высказываний. Ваша киача — установить схот—тстык• между услышанными текстами и предложениями. выражают их основное содержание.

части радела (зщцанпя А 1-А6) вы услышите диалог. Вл необходимо ксгановитъ соответсгвие утверждений сохржаникз прослушанного текста.

В третьем части раздела (задания A7-A13) вы услышше  Тетерь вам нужно будет (Угнетить на семь вопросов по со.ХРА"НИЮ диалога, выбрав правильный огвег из трех

2: Чтение

Данный раздел включает 9 запаний. Рекомендуемое время на вьининение кианий Раздела 2 нс Гипсе 30 минут.

 заиние (Ю) состоит из шести небольших по объему текстов. Ваша задача — установить соеугвегслмие между тексгами и пре.иожениями. которые могуг служить загтовками к этим

Второе задание (ВЗ) представлено одним [в двух медов утражнении.

ГКрвый вил упражнений состоит из шести утверждений и одного. двух или трех текстов. Ваша з:иача — установить скогве:спше между угнержленињми и содержанием текстов.

Второй вил упражнений включает в себя семь коротк»х текстов и шесть вопросов. Вам нужно *'становить соответствие между вощух•ами и текстами. В каждом тексте ны нагнетт «угнет. т«иько на один вопрос. В задании один гекст лишний.

Третья часть раздела (задан11я А 14-А2Ој содержит достаточно (Яиьшой по 061.eMv текст, Вам нужно (угнетать на семь вопросов по его содержанию. выбирая правильный «угнет из челнрех

Ра.зДел 3: Грамматика и лексика

Лапный раздел состоьп• из 23 талий. Рекомендуемое время на ньшшнение з:ианий Раздела З —40 мину.

Первая часть раздела (зиания В4-В11 ) содержит тексг с восемью пропусками. Каждому пропуску сосугветттвует слово, выделенное жирным шрифтом. Вам необходимо преобразовать слова таким образом, •гобы они  и лексически содержанию текла.

Вторая часть раздела (зиания В 12-1318) Состоит из текста с семью пропусками. Каждому пропуску слово. вьше.ленное жирным шрифтом. Вам необходимо изменить форму слова таким образом, чтобы оно соответствов&ло содержанию текста.

Третья часть рамела (задания А21-А28) содержит текс-г с восемью пропусками, Вам необходимо заполнить пропуски; выбрав правгшьный ответ их четырех ире,иоженных.

РазДел 4: Письмо

ДанныЙ раздел состмгт• из двух заданий. Рекомендуемое время на вып«хлненис заданий Раздела 4 не более 60 минут.

В первом з:цании (С 1 -) вам [тредлатисгся написать письмо личного характера. Объем письма не лолжен превышать слов. На выполнение задания отводится около 20 минут.

Во втором  вам необходимо составить письменное высказывание с хјсментами рассуждения по лре№юженной теме.

Объем высказывания не должен превыш:ггь слон. Предлагаемый поможет вам успешно справиться с лим заданием. На вьптнснис задания отводится около Щ) минут.

РазДел 5: Говорение

Данный раздел состою из трех заданий. Перед началом ответа вам дается 10 минут. чтобы ознакомиться с заданиями. Время устного ответа — около мины-г.

Ланная часть экзамена начинается с вступительной беседы между экзаменуемым и экзаменатором-соГ«сдником с целью знакомства. за которог следут- три экзаменационных задания.

Первое задание (СЗ) — двухминутное монологическое высказывание по предложенной теме. Предложенный план высказывания поможет вам успешно справшъся с •лмм видом з:иания. Вам могут знать Олин или два вопроса по теме высказывания.

Второе задание (С4) предполагает диалог с целью обмена фактической информацией. Вам решить проблему и сообщается. какую информацию вам нужно 11кхлучить у экзаменатора, чтобы решить лу проблему, Вы з:щдасле вопросы экзаменатору и получаете необходимую информацию. На основе полученной информации вы Ло,'1ЖНЫ сделать определенный ВЫВОЛ или принять соответствующее решение.

Третье задание (С5) предполагает диалог с целью обмена оценочной информацией. Вам некая проблема и несколько вариантов ее решения. Ваша задача — обсудить предложенные варианты решения проблемы с экзаменатором и найти оптимальное решение.

Мы н:цеемся. •гго работа по нашему пособию будет и иъггересна для вас.

Желаем вам успеха на экзамене!

Elena klekovkina alcolm Мапп

Steve


предложенных.

Contents

Test 1

 

Test 12

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .                                                                    

4

Language and Exam Skills Development .       

136

Test I     

6

Test 12    

138

Test 2

 

Test 13

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .                                                                      

16

Language and Exam Skills Development .       

148

Test 2 .   

18

Test 13     

150

Test 3

 

Test 14

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

28

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

160

Test 3 .   

30

Test 14     

162

Test 4

 

Test 15

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

40

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

172

Test 4.    

42

Test 15     

174

Test 5

 

Test 16

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

52

Language and Exam Skills Development       

184

Test 5 .   

54

Test 16                 

186

Test 6

 

Test 17

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

64

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

196

Test 6    

66

Test 17 .    

198

Test 7

 

Test 18

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

76

Language and Exam Skills Development ,      

208

Test 7 .   

78

Test 18                                                          

210

Test 8

 

Test 19

 

Language and Exam Skills Development  

88

Language and Exam Skills Development .                                                                      

220

Test 8 .   

90

Test 19    

222

Test 9

 

Test 20

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .                                                                   

100

Language and Exam Skills Development .      

232

Test 9 .   

Test 10

102

Test 20    

234

Language and Exam Skills Development .                                                                   

112

Answer sheets .                       

244

Test 10                   

Test 11

114

 

 

Language and Exam Skills Development .                                                                   

124

 

 

Test Il      

126

 

 


Section 1 Listening: first task

A Look at the first task on page 6. Match the statements A-F to the following speakers.

I 'I need to find other people to play with.' Statement

2      'I don't understand why people find sport so interesting.' Statement

3      'I think it would be exciting to be in a

                Formula 1 race.'                Statement

4      'I like to see people working together in sport.'    Statement

5      'Sally, Jackie and I play tennis almost every weekend.' Statement

6      'I like to do sport to get exercise and stay healthy.' Statement

Section 2 Reading: first task

B Quickly read the six texts on page 8 and answer these questions.

Which text is talking about .

1     a way of reading for people who can't

                see?                                                Text

2     the differences between plavs on radio and on TV?         Text

3     people using radio to communicate 20 years ago?     Text

4     how people commumcated before radio was invented? Text

5     a danger caused by using mobile phones?

Text

6     using our hands and faces to communicate? Text



o

C Find words and phrases in each text which have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.

Text 1

1 something you see often

2         talking in a friendly way

3         worried           

Text 2

4         not able to see

5         created          

Text 3

6         included        

7         say how we feel         

8         not telling the truth  

Text 4

9         not professional          

10     communicate with   

Text 5

Il kinds                                         

12     send out           

Text 6

13     started (a fire) 

14     learn information      

15     far away          

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: first task

D    Quickly read the first text on page 12 and answer these questions.

I In which country can you find the platypus?

2     Does the platypus live in other countries?

3     XXhen did Europeans first see the platypus?

4     Is the platypus a rare animal?   

5     Do we know a lot about the platypus?


E    


Complete the table.

first

three

seven eight nine

ten


Section 5 Speaking: first task

G Look at the Student Card for Task I on page 15 and make notes to complete the table.


What are your favourite television programmes?

Why?

Has your taste in TVprogrammes changed? How and why?

Xhen do you watch television?

Do you watch TV with your family / with your friends on your own?

Section 4 Writing: first task

F Label the different parts of this letter by writing the appropriate letter in each space.

A   Put Love, or Best wishes, and then put my first name.

B    Put Dear and my pen friend's first name, followed by a comma.

C    Write my address and the date here.

D   Say goodbye and tell my pen friend to write back.

E    Make more suggestions and give further advice.

F     Say hello and thank my pen friend for their letter.

G   Make my first suggestions and give some advice.

1

2H Which of these statements do you agree 3       Idisagree with? Explain why.

              4                                                                             1 'Young people watch too much TV.'

                5                                                                           2 'You can learn a lot by watching

6                                                                                                                                                                           television.'

7                                                                                                                                                                           3 'Most programmes for children are very good.'

O

P',une.n

Bbl yc.abttuume 5 BblCKa.3btaaHUð1. Ycmcmoaume coomeemcmaue .ueycðy 6b1CKa.3b10aH11fLUU eoaopfltqeeo I — 5 u  6 cnucxe A — F. Mcno.1b3Yùme Ra.ycòyo t5ycay, ot;o.3Haqcuougyo .ymaepycòeHue, moabK0 oòun paa. B aaðanuu ecntb oÒH0 autunee ymeepycðemte. Bbl aanucb 3cmecume ctgou omaenlbl 6 maÕJ111tgy.

A.      She enjoys watching team sports.

B.      She wants to join a team to play a sport.

C.      She thinks sport is a good way to keep fit. D. She likes playing sports with her friends.

E. She would like to try a dangerous sport. F. She thinks watching sport is boring.

roBop911AV11i

1

2

YTBepxneH1te

Test 1

Bbl yc.lbttuume pa.3?060p mypucma Il euc)a. Onpeòeaume, Kay-cue 11.3 LIPU6eÒëHHbLV ymaep.ycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomaemcmayom coòepycamuo meyccma (I ), KC1/C1te He coonwemcmayom (2) u o që.u 6 maccme He cya.3(lHO, mo ecntb Ha OCHOaaHU11 meKcma Heat„3f1 ()amb HI/ noao.ycumeJ1bH0?0, HI/ omptugame-QbH0?0 omaema (3). ()õ6eòume no-uep 6bttîpt1HH0?0 eapuauma omeema. Bbl yc.abltuume aanucb ÒßClYÒbl.

       Al      The tourist has a limited amount of time in the area.

                            l) 13ep110               2) HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He cwa3ŽIH0

       A2    Most visitors to Montford Hall go by taxi.

                             1) BepHO               2) HeBepH0                  3) B 'rewre He cK'd3'dH0

       A3      The guide recommends a restaurant to the tourist.

                             l) BepHO               2) ne13epH0               3) B -reKcTe He CKa3t1HO

       A4    The tourist wants to enjoy the good weather.

                              l) BepHO                  2) HeBepH0                    3) B -rewre He CKa3t1HO

            You have to pay to enter the Rose Gardens.

                              l) BepH0               2) HeBepHO              3) B -reKCTe He CK[BŽIHO

       A6     The tourist has a large garden at home.

                             1) BepHO               2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKCTe He CKagaH0

O

Bbl ycablluume õeceòy pvK060òume.1H Kypcoe c ÕyðYlUlLMll cmyòewnauu. B aaÒCIH11flX A 7413 oõeeòume tgucþpy 1, 2 10111 3, coomæmcmgyougyo 6blÕpaHHOMY ea.uu eapucmmy omeema. Bbl ycablluume aanuct, Òeaycðbl.


 

A7

Carol wants to

I) work out the new timetable.

2)   make a list of courses.

3)   talk about the Centre.

AS

The man will get a reduction because he's 1) over 65 years old.

2) unemployed. 3) disabled.

A9

Students are allowed to

I) choose which classes of a course to attend.

2)   attend the first class before deciding.

3)   attend the first three classes before deciding.

AIO

The man is concerned about I) his inexperience.

2)   his age.

3)   not liking pottery.

All

The two pottery courses

I) each have classes twice a week.

2)   are held on the same days.

3)   are held in different weeks.

A12

Students on the pottery courses

I) have to bring their own clay and tools.

2)   have to bring their own aprons.

3)   do not have to bring equipment with them.

A13

The man decides

Test 1          

1)  to do the Advanced Pottery course.

2)  to choose a different course.

3)  not to do a course at all.

no aaÒaHllñl Bl U Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo on16en1bl Ha aaòaHllf1 B I, Al-A13 pacnonaea,tomcfl 6 pa3HbLr

BI õYKßb1 .3anucb1ecwomcfl õe.3 npoõee106 u ,31fflK06 npe'711}fflHllH.

                                         Pa3neJ1        Llrrerme

Mcnoau.ayùme Kaycðyo (5YK6_y mœ1bK0 oðtut pa.3. B 3aÒauuu oÒŒta me.ua autUHf1f1.

A.     POOR COMMUNICATION

B.      HELPFUL METHOD

C.      PAST HOBBY

D.     BODY LANGUAGE

E.      ENJOYABLE GAMES

F.       HEALTH PROBLEMS

G.     MORE IMAGINATION

1              In just a few years you will see people concerned that a mobile close to ordinary phone

2              We learn a lot by read braille. Braille fingers. A Frenchman system makes life

3              When we talk to as little as 7% of we use our faces also show things

4              People can now Twenty years ago, radio to contact their houses that and about the

mobile phones have become a common sight everywhere. Walk past any café and chatting on their phones or sending text messages. However, some people are the signals these phones send out mav be bad for our health. They worry that holding your head might have an effect on your brain. So, it may be a good idea to use your when you can.


reading, but what if you can't see the words on the page? Many blind people can is a svstem of writing using raised dots on the page that you can feel with your called Louis Braille invented it in 1821, when he was just 12 years old. His easier for many thousands of blind people all over the world.

someone, only a small part of our meaning is in what we say. Some people say that our message is contained in our words. We use our hands to express ourselves and to show that we are listening or to show how we feel. Our faces and our hands can that we might want to hide, like the fact that we are lying, for example.

use the Internet and e-mail to communicate with each other cheaply and quickly.

however, this wasn't possible. In those days in Britain, some people used amateur people all over the country, and even around the world. They had special radios in sent out radio signals. They contacted each other to exchange news about their lives weather, or even to play games such as chess.

decide exactly what a place or a person looks like. On radio, though, you can imagine it any you like.

the invention of radio, it was almost impossible to communicate over large distances. The onlv to communicate with people far away was to send a message or a letter with a person. People lit on hills as a signal to each other, but it wasn't a very good way of communicating. It was very difficult to find out what was happening in distant places and news often took weeks or even months travel around the world.

5      One of the most interesting types of radio programme is radio drama. Although some radio stations only broadcast music, some also produce plays for their listeners. Many people prefer listening to a play on the radio to watching it on TV because thev can be more creative. On TV, the programmemakers

6      Before

NL' ereKCTa

1

2

3

              4                 5

6

O



[Ipogumaúme YH16epycòeH11fl 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HILUII meKcn1b1. YcmaH0611me coomeemcmaue Jte.wòy ymgepycòeH11fLM11 u coòep.ycamaeu mcyccmoe. Hanutuume I'll(þpy I — ecau ymoepyc)emue gepHoe, u I'll(þpy O — ecau ymeepycòeH11e Heeepnoe. 3CIHecume C60U omeenlbl 6 maõautcv.

 

 

1    Most people in Devon work as farmers or fishermen.

2    Devon is famous for its modern buildings.

3    The south coast is popular because of the climate.

4    It's easy to drive from London to Devon.

5    Today, Lancashire produces a large amount of goods for sale abroad.

6    Visitors can travel on old planes and trains at the museum.

Devon is a large county in the south-west of England.

Agriculture and fishing have always been important parts of the local economy, but these days tourism is the main source of income. Nearly five million people visit the area each year, many Of them coming to enjoy Devon's beaches and even to surf along its north coast. Apart from the beaches, Devon is also well known for its beautiful countryside and old, traditional cottages.

Many coastal towns in Britain have suffered as more and more people go abroad on holiday. However, on the south Devon coast, resort towns such as Brixham and Torquay are enjoying new life as the English Riviera, offering mild weather and sandy beaches. Another reason for its popularity is that it's possible to get to Devon from London in a short time by car. Two motorways, the M4 and the M5, connect the capital to Devon and in just four or five hours Londoners can be enjoying a cream tea or a relaxing country walk.

Lancashire, in the north-west of England, is a county with a long history, first as an agricultural area and later as one of the most important areas during the Industrial Revolution. Here, from the start of the nineteenth century onwards, factories and mills produced cotton and other goods that were sold all around the world. Today, almost all the mills are silent, but Lancashire is still an interesting place to visit. Apart from the attractions of coastal towns such as Fleetwood and Blackpool, there are many interesting museums, including the Museum of Transport in Rimington. Open all year round, the museum has a wonderful collection of models of different means of transport, including trains, planes and ships. For visitors who prefer a more active holidav, there are also many beautiful areas to walk in, particularlv in north Lancashire.

1

4

5

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

O


Ilpoqumaùme mcwcm u 6b1110JIHume .3aòaH1[H A 14-420, OÕ60ÒH Illitþpy 1, 2, 3 11.111 4, coomaemcmeyoucyvo H0Mepy 6btÓpaHH0?0 6tLUU oapucmma omaema,

When my Uncle Alan turned up at my thirteenth birthday party without a present, I couldn't hide the disappointment on my face. He was my favourite uncle, and he always bought me fantastic presents.

'Don't look so sad, Anna,' he said kindly. 'I haven't forgotten to get you a present. I just couldn't bring it with me. Tomorrow, I'm taking you abseiling.' 'I didn't know you had a boat,' I said.

'No, not sailing! Abseiling!'

'What's that?' I asked. 'I've never heard of it.' 'You'll see,' he said mysteriously.

Early the next day, Uncle Alan drove me to Lamerton Adventure Park. I'd never been there before, but had often told my mum and dad how exciting it sounded. As we drove through the gates, it seemed that, once again, Uncle Alan had found me a birthday present I'd never forget. When we arrived, we went to find my instructor, a friendly young woman called Isabelle. She put me completely at ease, and I knew that, whatever I was going to be doing, I'd be quite safe with her.

'So, Anna, have you ever been abseiling before?' she asked. I admitted I didn't even know what abseiling was. 'Well, it's always fun to experience something new, isn't it?' she said.

We walked through the park, and ended up at a rocky hill. The biggest rock face was extremely high and steep, but there were smaller, easier faces too. When I saw the equipment waiting for me — a rope, a harness and a helmet — I guessed what I was going to be doing.

'Oh, I'm going rock climbing!' I said excitedly.

'Not exactly,' said Uncle Alan.

Isabelle explained. 'With rock climbing, you start at the bottom and go up, but with abseiling, you start at the top and go down.' Now I understood.

We carried the equipment up a path to the top of the smallest rock face. I carefully looked over the edge. The ground was about five metres below. 'This is going to be fun,' I thought.

Isabelle tied the rope carefully to a metal ring, and then threaded it through my harness, which by now I was wearing round my waist. She threw the other end of the rope over the edge of the rock face, and it fell to the ground.

'This is where I say goodbye,' said Uncle Alan. 'I'm going back down to the bottom. I'll be holding the other end of the rope, so you'll be quite safe. See you when you come down!'

Isabelle was the perfect instructor. She talked me through what to do step by step. I stood on the edge of the rock face with my back to the drop. My left hand was holding the rope in front of me, my right hand holding the rope behind me. 'Now,' she said, 'gently lean back.'

This was the most difficult part. It's a terribly scary experience leaning back over a cliff, especially the first time you attempt it, and for the first few minutes I wondered whether I could actually do it. Finally, I decided to risk it. I didn't want Uncle Alan thinking I was a coward. Keeping my feet still, I leant back a little. Then a little more.

'Fantastic!' shouted Uncle Alan from below me.

'That's wonderful,' said Isabelle. 'Now, slowly start to walk down the rock.'

It was more like bouncing than actual walking, but I started to go down. It didn't take long to reach the bottom, but I felt a huge sense of achievement when I put my feet on the ground next to Uncle Alan.

'I'm so proud of you!' he said. 'Do you want to try a higher rock face now?'

'You bet!' I said, 'The higher, the better!'

A14 When Uncle Alan saw Anna's disappointment, he realised that I) he should have brought a present with him.

2)              he really was her favourite uncle.

3)              she thought he had forgotten to bring her a present. 4) he had to take her somewhere the next day.

AIS    Anna had frequently told her parents that I) Lamerton Adventure Park appealed to her.

2)              she had never been abseiling before.

3)              Uncle Alan's birthday presents were unforgettable. 4) abseiling sounded like a very interesting activity.

A16    Isabelle made Anna

I) admit how little she knew about the park.

2)   feel totally secure and comfortable.

3)   think about previous enjoyable experiences. 4) realise that abseiling would be easy.

A17    When Anna saw the equipment, she

I) understood immediately what abseiling was.

2)   tried hard to guess what it would be used for.

3)   asked Isabelle for an explanation.

4)   still didn't understand what she would be doing.

A18 Uncle Alan didn't stay at the top of the rock face because 1) he wanted to see Anna when she reached the bottom.

2)   he had to hold the rope at the bottom.

3)   the rope had fallen over the edge by mistake.

4)   he thought she would be safer without him up there.

A19    As Anna started to lean back, she 1) felt extremely frightened.

2)   wondered if she was a coward.

3)   knew she had to risk the danger.

4)   remembered the first time she'd done this.

A20 After reaching the bottom, Anna

I) thought she had achieved enough for one day.

2)   wanted to abseil down a more difficult rock face.

3)   made a bet with her uncle about the height of the rock.

4)   felt relieved to be on the ground again with her uncle.

no        B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !

ObPATJ4TE BHMMAHME, Elmo               Ha                  B2, B3 u A14-A20    6

Pa.3HbLX qacmm• âqamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1 nuycneñ Liacmu Õaawca. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemt)6 6 sac)aH115LV B2, B3 õYK6b1 aanucbtecuomcfl õea npoõeaoe u .3HŒC06 npemmauu.q.

Test 1

                       Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa aeKCUKa

Ilpoqumaúme meR•cm 3anomtume nponycK11 6 npeÒaoyeHum- not) H0.uepa.uu B4-B11 coomaemcmeyougu.uu cþop.uaatu c:aoa, HaneqamaHHbLr aa?ACIBHbLUU ÕYKߌuu cnpaea om npeÒaoyceHllfl.

B4

B6

B9

BIO

Bil

STRANGE

EXIST

NEVER SEE

TWO

DIRTY

NOT KNOW

17poqumaùme  HilO,'Ce mexcm [Ipeoõpaayñme c.aoga, naneqamaHHbte .3aua6HblJtlt

Õycga-uu nocae H0Mepoa B12-B18 maK, qmoÕbl OHU epa.M.uamuqecKll u ./WKCltqeCKU coomaemcmeoeaau coòepycaH1110 meKcma. .3an0JIHume nponycK11 natyqeHHbLUt1 caoea.uu. Kaycòblù nponycK coomcemcmeyem omðe-QbH0MY aaÒaHtuo 11.3     B 12-B18.

 

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

B17

B18

The Tower of London has become one of the most symbols of the city of London, and of Britain as a whole. It was built by William the Conqueror in 1078 and the

Tower took 20 years from start to finish.

The  of the Tower (almost 30 metres) and the thickness     HIGH of the walls made it a perfect prison. Famous  held at the PRISON Tower include Elizabeth (later Queen Elizabeth I) and King Edward V.

In the thirteenth century, King Henry Ill added many to BUILD the Tower, including a church and even a zoo.

Today, many thousands of come to the Tower each year VISIT and learn all about the history of this  place.       INTEREST

 

 

Tlpoqumaúme maccm c nponycxa.uu, OÕ03HULWHHbLUU HO-uepa.uu A21-A28. 3mu H0.uepa coomoemcmayom A21-A28, 6 Komopbtr npeòcmaaaeHbl 603MOYHbte aapuamnt,l omeemoe. Oõeeðume H0Jtep 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6ŒUU eapuŒma omeema.

When Andrew Carter was offered the position of Senior European Sales Manager in a large, successful multinational corporation, he A21  at the chance. One of the main reasons for his immediate acceptance was the opportunity for a large amount of foreign travel. He could see himself relaxing in a café by the Seine after a hard day's business, before jetting

A22  to an important meeting the next morning in Prague. How romantic it all seemed.

And yet now, only eight months after his first day in the job, how different his emotions were. For Andrew Carter was experiencing what many international business travellers had experienced before him, and will experience for years to come, that a life A23     on planes and in hotels is lonelv, dull and exhausting.

He longed to be back at home, and dreamt of the simple pleasures of having someone to watch television with, of being asked how his day was. As he lay on the bed in his luxurious, yet strangely soulless hotel room, he A24 the empty evening ahead of him. 'What's the

A25     he asked himself, as he had done so many times, 'of going out this evening? I won't talk to anyone. I won't have anyone to enjoy it with. Every city's the same when you're alone.'

Not wanting to sit alone at a table in the hotel restaurant, he decided to have his evening meal delivered to his room by room service. Leafing through the menu, Andrew was

A26  by another desire — for some simple, home-cooked food. He sighed.

And then he thought the unthinkable. 'I don't have to A27  on like this,' he said out loud. 'I'm still young. My whole life's ahead of me. I could quit my job and do something I really enjoy. So what if I don't make so much money? Money isn't everything.'

It would take several years, and a number of A28    starts, but finally Andrew Carter did leave his highly-paid position. He was scared, but for the first time in his life he was truly content.

    A21                   l) took                      2) jumped              3) seized               4) had

    A22                   l) by                         2) forward              3) up                     4) off

    A23                   1) spent                  2) paid                  3) passed             4) taken

    A24                  I) dreaded              2) distrusted         3) depressed       4) disappointed

    A25                   I) theme                2) topic                 3) point                4) subject

    A26                 1) attacked              2) smashed           3) knocked          4) struck

    A27                  1) live                       2) go                       3) move                4) continue

    A28                  I) false                     2) fake                   3) artificial            4) forged

no B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ha B4-B18 u A21-A28   e pa.3Hb1.r Itacmfl.r ÕJICIHRCI. B4-B18 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HU.YHeÙ qacmu õaamca. Tlpu nepenoce omaemoe

6 .3aÒaHll}LV B4-B18 õYKBb1 aanucbteawmcfi õea npoõeaog u .3HZlK06

                                       Pa3neJ1      TIWCbMO

 Ha                CT, C2 WIAHK OTBETOB

17pu Bbl'70JIHCHUU aaòauuù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HtLUí1HUe oõpamume Ha mo, qmo aatuu omaembt õyòym ogehtuøamt.cn nt0J1bK0 no aanucf1.M, CÒeaCIHHbLM 6 WIAHKE OTBETOB X'2. 1-111KaK11e aanucu  He õyðym yqumbloamt»cfl .oxcnepmo,u.

aano.uteuuu WIAHKA OTBETOB YKaoæume cnaqaaa H0,uep .gaòaHl/fl CT, C2 aameM aanutuume caoù omaem oðHOÙ cmop0Hb1 õaamca HeòocmamotlH0, 6b/ .uo.yceme ucno.lbaoaamb òpyeyo cmopo,qy Õaamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

Test 1

Write soon,

Love,

Tom

Write back to Tom answering his questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many people think that we should explore space and visit other planets. However, some people say that space exploration is a waste of time and money.

What can you say for and against exploring space and visiting other planets?

     Write 200-250 words.                                                Use the following plan

1.   Introduction (State the problem).

2.   Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.


Pa3aeJ1       IòBopeHne

Bbl noayqume KapmotlKY, Ha Komopoú npeòcmaoaellbl mpu aaÒCIH11f1 ycm,qoeo omaema.• C3 — me.uamuqecwoe .uo,qoaopuqeæcoe dblCKa.3bW,aH1te, C4 — òuaaoe c lge.Qb,to ot;.ueua cþaxmuqecK0ù  C5 — ()uaaoe c lge.1bY0 oÓ.ueua 01!t'Hoquoð1 Ithcþop.uatgueñ.   

6btno.aneH11f1 Ra.ycÒO?O aaòaH11f1 onpeòe.,1Hem o,tcaa.ueuamop. Bo npoueòeH1151 .»moli qacmu .9K3aateHa llòem nocmt)flltuafl aanucb Ha ayÒ110Kaccemy.

3aaaHvtq 9K'3aMeHYOtoro


STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on television. Remember to say:

      what your favourite television programmes are

      if your taste in television programmes has changed over the years and why

      when you watch television

      if you watch television with or without your family or friends

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are visiting a town and you are at the tourist information office. You would like to

find a hotel close to the town centre. You can pay £30 per night only.

Testa

Before making a decision, ask the tourist information guide about: • the hotels available

     where the hotels are  the cost

The teacher will play the part of the tourist information guide and will speak first.

Remember to:

     be active and polite

     get all the information you need

     decide on the hotel to stay at

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and a friend are planning to do a course for one evening each week at a local college. You are discussing which course to go on. You can do:

     basic car maintenance

     cookery

     Mandarin Chinese for beginners

     photography

     local history

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

     discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: first task

A   Look at the first task on page 18. The people will all be talking about clothes. In pairs or as a group, make a list of the words and phrases you would expect to hear when someone is talking about clothes.

 

clothes

fashion

 

 

 

 

 

B   Look at the headings A-F again. Match each statement 1-6 below with a heading that has a similar meaning.

I I really enjoy shopping for jeans and tops, even if they are expensive.

2      You've got to make sure you feel good in the clothes you're wearing.

3      Fashion isn't important to me at all.

4      The clothes I used to wear were totally

different.

5      What I wear depends on where I am and what I'm doing.

6      1'd never wear anything that didn't look nice.


Section 2 Reading: second task

C Read the two texts in the second task on page 21. Find words and phrases in the texts which have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.

First text

I a place where someone lives

2         king or queen

3         at the moment

4         a person who lives in a place

5         kind, type, sort

6         the garden, land, etc that surrounds a building

Second text

7         from then until now

8         which still exists

9         wrongly

10     called

11     real      

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: second task

D    Read the text with questions B12-B18 on page 24. For each gap, decide what kind of word (noun, adjective, etc) fills the gap. B12 B13

B14

B15

B16

B17

B18

E     Complete the table. Include negative adjectives where appropriate.

verb

noun

adjective

invent

fly

direct

hot

Section 4 Writing: second task

F     Read the second task on page 26. Decide whether the statements below are: arguments supporting the behaviour and attitude of teenagers (S), arguments against teenagers' behaviour and attitude (A) or irrelevant arguments (I).

1    In my opinion, the vast majority of

teenagers are extremely hard-working.

2    1 personally believe that teenagers today are much more considerate and caring than young people were thirty years ago.

3    Getting a part-time job is a good way for a teenager to make some extra money.

4    Teenagers today are much more likely to swear in front of their parents and teachers.

5    At my school, for example, there are very few discipline problems.

6    Most teenagers understand that they have to work hard at school in order to get a good job when they are older.

7    Teenagers nowadays often prefer to watch

television and play computer games rather than do their homework.

8    Those people who criticise teenagers should think back to their own childhood.

9   


It is certainly true that many teenagers today do not get enough physical exercise; this is probably due to laziness.

10   According to some experts, exams are not the best way to test how much a teenager knows about a subject.

G    In pairs or as a group, discuss whether you think teenagers today are generally rude, lazy and badly behaved.

Section 5 Speaking: second task

H   Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 27. Answer these questions.

1     What is an after-school club?

a a club for older teenagers who have left school b a club for students which meets after the end of the school day

2    Which of these clubs would not be suitable for you? Explain why.

a Art club — meets on Mondays and Thursdays b Model aeroplane club — meets on

Tuesdays

3    Which of these clubs would be suitable for you? Explain why.

a English club — meets on Wednesdays b Games club — meets on Fridays

Correct each of these direct and indirect questions.

I       Could you tell me what are clubs available?

2     What activities the maths club do?

3     Do you know what activities does the maths club do?

4     the chess club meets?

5     I wonder if you know when does the chess club meet?


                                        Pa3aeJ1           AYAMI)0BaHVfe

Bbl vc-lbltuume 5 6blCKC13b16CIHUÙ. YcmaH0ßume coomeemcmgue Meyðy 6b1CR•a.3blBaH1ffiJfU Ka.YCÒO?O POBOPf1tge?0 1 — 5 u ymgepycòt'H11$1.uu, ÒaHHbLU11 cnucwe A — F. Mcno.lbayùme KaycÒvŒo õYK6V,

t)õ03Haqa10110'10 ymgepycðemte, moa1bKO oðt1H pa.3. B aaòanuu ecntb oÒH0 autunee _ymeep.ycòenue. Bbl yca7b11uume aanucb ÒeaycÒb1. 3aHecume ('6011 omeenlbl 6 maõmugy.

A.     I don't care what I wear.

B.      It's important to feel comfortable.

C.      I love spending money on nice clothes.

D.     My taste in clothing has changed. E. Looking smart is very important to me.


F. Different situations need different clothes.

F0Bop¶11U1ñ

1

3

4

5

YTBepùKJ1eHJ1e

Bbl ycvtbltuume paa¿oaop aeeHtna no Ht'òßll.ycuatocmu MupuŒu c Kauewno,u. Onpeðeaume, KCIKUC' 113 'IPU6eÒëHHbLV ym(3epycòt'Hllù Al-A6 coomaemcmgyom coòepycaptuyo moccma (1), KŒue He coomæmcmeyom (2) u o qëM 6 meKcme He cyaaaHO, mo ecnlb Ha OCHOBLIHUII mewma He-Qb3f1 ()amt. Hit noao.ycumeJ1bHoeo, Hil omputgamev1bH0?0 omeema (3). C)õßeòume HO.uep Bblõpaymozo 6apuŒtma omæma. Bbl ycablluume aanucb ð6aycÒbl,

Al        The owners of the house are still living in it.

                      l) BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKagaHO

A2 The house has both a coal fire and central heating. I) BepHO 2) HergepHO 3) B TeKCTe He CKŽBIIHO

A3       The kitchen is large.

                     I) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3) B -rek'CTe He cKtuaH0

A4 There's space in the utility room for Mr Robinson's freezer. I) BepHO 2) HeBepH0 3) B TeKCTe He CKti3aHO

AS       The house is the largest in the street.

                      l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0               3) B •rewre He cwagaH0

A6       The owners might be willing to reduce the price.

                      l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0              3) B •rewre He CKa3ttHO

Test 2

Bbl yc•abltuume õeceðy ()upŒmopa eocn1UHUl!b1 c HOBbLVf cayyca1U11.u. B aaòauunx A 7-Ä13 oõeeòume Igucþpy I, 2 10111 3, coomaemcP16Y10110"0 6b1ÕPCIHHOAf.V oapuawn_v omaema. Bbl yc•vlbnuume aanucb Ò6G'YCÒb1.

     The manager says he will

I) show Denise exactly what to do.

A8

Denise says she is worried about I) working with money.

2)   dealing with the public.

3)   operating a computer.

A9

The people Denise is responsible for

I) have worked together as a team for a long time.

2)   are all quite new to the job,

3)   usually work in pairs at reception.

AIO

In her previous job, Denise most enjoyed 1) managing a team of people.

2) solving difficult problems. 3) training new employees.

Al 1

If the computer system develops a problem 1) Denise may be able to repair it.

2)   the manager will provide instructions.

3)   they will write to the repair company.

A12

Denise would like to know about I) the salary.

2)   holidays.

3)   working hours.

A13

The manager asks Denise to

I) check that some rooms are readv.

2) answer the phone while he's away.

2)   give Denise a general idea of the job. 3) ask someone else to help Denise.

3)   take someone to the airport.

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, timo omaenlbl Ha aaòaH11f1 BI, Al-A13 pacnonaztnomc•fl 6 pa.3Hb1X

19

                                       Pa3neJ1        I-IrreHne

Mcnoalbayùme Ka.YCÒVR) õYKBY mo.'bK0 oÒ11H pa.3. B .3aÒcutuu oðna me.ua auuutfl}l.

A.      DIFFERENT SUBJECTS

B.      MANY STUDENTS

c. TWO SECTIONS

D.     DIFFERING OPINIONS

E.      USEFUL FACTS

F.      IMPORTANT LESSON G. EASIER ANSWERS

1

2

3

4

Oxford University people studying at countries. In fact, at Oxford is a member part of the town.

What's the best age at as young an age are about three years children how to read, In most countries, You usually have to in two parts. The first second part is a asks you to do various When was Mozart the answers to these

has been a centre of learning for over 900 years. Today, there are over 16,000 Oxford, but they are not all British. About 4,000 of them come from other there are currently students from over 130 countries studying there. Every student of a 'college'. There are 39 main colleges, and each college is in a different

for a child to learn how to read? Some people believe that children should learn as possible. Because of this, some parents start teaching their children when they old. Other people believe it's better for a teacher at school to teach a class of so many children don't learn to read until they are five or six vears old.

you are onlv allowed to drive a car on a public road if vou have a driving licence. pass a driving test in order to get the licence. In European countries, this test is part is a 'theory' test. You have to answer questions about road safety. The

'practical' test. You are in a car with an examiner, who tells you where to drive and things, such as parking or reversing around a corner.

born? What's the capital of Nigeria? Before the Internet, if we wanted to find out questions, we'd have to look them up in reference books, such as encyclopaedias. If we couldn't find the information in books at home, we'd have to go to a public library. This kind of research would often take a very long time. Now, however, as long as you have a computer connected to the Internet, you can find the answers to questions like these in seconds.

 5 Although people sometimes confuse astronomy and astrology, they are completely different.

Astronomy is the scientific studv of the universe. Astronomers study stars, planets and other things in space, such as comets, and record their findings scientifically. Astrology, which is based on the belief that the position of the planets affects human behaviour, is not a science. It is astrologers who write horoscopes in magazines, telling us what they think is going to happen to us in the future.

6 A guide book can be extremely helpful when you're visiting a place for the first time. Guide books provide loads Of practical information, such as the opening times and entrance fees of the main attractions, and often recommend sights to visit and places to stay. They can also provide interesting information about the history of the place and famous people who lived there.

TC'KCTa

1

3

4

5

6

- Test2

17poqumaùme .vm6epYòeH11H 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HUMU me,çcmbl. YcmaH06ttme coomaemcmaue

6epHoe, u 1411tþpv O — ec,lll ymaepycòeuue neaepnoe. 3anecume ('6011 omeembl 6 maõalllgy.


1    Buckingham akeavs London

British

2    Queen first British live there.

3    Queen her husband

'state rooms' palace.

4    Elizabeth queen for years.

5    Kings and lived in

Westminster.

6    Ifyou stand Palace of look up, Ben.

Palace has the official residence of the King or Queen.

Victoria teas the monarch to

Elizabeth 11 and lice in the in the

Il has been more than fifty

queens once Palace of

outside the

Westminster and you can see Big

No visit to London is complete vvithout a trip to Buckingham Palace, the official London residence of the British monarch          (currently Queen Elizabeth Il).

Buckingham Palace was built for the Duke of Buckingham in        1703 and, as such, was known simply as Buckingham House.

Its first roval resident was King George Ill, who bought it in 1762, but it was not until 1837, when Victoria became queen, that it became the official royal palace of the British monarch.

Approximately 450 people work at Buckingham Palace, and each year more than 50,000 people enjoy some form of entertainment there — the Queen often holds garden parties and receptions for invited guests. In the 1990s, the palace became even more open, with members of the public being allowed to go on a tour of the 'state rooms'. These are the official reception rooms in the palace, rather than the rooms that the Queen and her husband live in.

In June 2003, a concert of classical music and a pop concert were held in the grounds of Buckingham Palace. This was to celebrate Elizabeth's 50th anniversary as queen.

No king or queen has lived in the Palace of Westminster, which is on the north bank of the River Thames in London, since the 1500s. Today, the Palace of Westminster is better known by its other name: the Houses of Parliament.

Although the oldest part of the palace in existence today is over 900 years old, most of the building is less than two hundred years old. In 1834, the palace was almost completely destroyed by fire and had to be rebuilt. Parts of the building were also damaged by bombs during the Second World War.

At one end of the palace is a famous tourist attraction: a tower, often mistakenlv referred to as 'Big Ben'. In fact, its actual name is the Clock Tower, or St. Stephen's Tower, and Big Ben is the large bell hidden inside which rings every hour on the hour.


1

2

3

4

5

6

21

[Ipoqumaùme moccm u 6bmo.mume aaÒt1H11H A14-A20, OÕ60Òf1 Illitþpy 1, 2, 3 11.111 4,

 H0.uepy 6b1õPCIHH0?0 ea.M11 gapuamna omaema.

Oliver glanced at his watch. There were ten minutes left until the supermarket closed and he was rushing round, quickly dropping things he needed for the weekend into his trolley. He hadn't been in his own flat long and now his mother had invited herself for dinner the following day. He really wanted to impress her with his ability to cope on his own, but he knew that the usual critical comments would soon appear if everything wasn't perfect. He hoped that the three days he'd spent cleaning the place from top to bottom wouldn't be wasted, and he'd even gone so far as painting the front door. His mother wouldn't notice that, though, of course. What she would notice was the dust on top of the pictures, or the old sofa, or one of a thousand other things that Oliver had forgotten about. Still, he was determined to give her a good meal, and maybe that would put her in a slightly better mood than usual.

He checked his shopping list again and bent over to look through his trolley. He mentally ticked off the items and then realised that he still needed eggs. As he straightened up to set off towards the dairy section, there was an enormous collision, a clatter of tins and a loud shriek of pain. When Oliver had recovered his balance, he saw an attractive woman of about nineteen on her knees, putting tins and vegetables back into a handheld basket.

'Why don't you watch where you're going?' she snapped at him over her shoulder. 'Some people just have no manners. Honestly .

'Er ... sorry,' stammered Oliver. 'Let me help you.' He began to pick tins up. 'It really wasn't my fault, though, you know. I was just ... 'The girl grabbed a tin of tuna from his hands.


'Never mind,' she said, her basket now full, and she strode off down the aisle without looking back. Oliver watched her go and sighed. He never seemed to have much luck with girls. Maybe that was just what he needed to show his mother how grown up he was. He turned back to his own trolley and began to push it. Maybe if she came to dinner and he introduced her to an intelligent, charming young woman then she would stop calling him every day to check he was okay. As Oliver thought about this possibility, something caught his eye and he stopped his trolley. There was a red leather purse on top of his shopping. It must have come out of the girl's basket and landed in his trolley. Oliver quickly glanced around, looking for the girl. She wouldn't be able to pay for her shopping. He picked up the purse, left his trolley and sprinted towards the line of checkouts.

When he got there, he scanned the lines of customers waiting to pay. There were about a dozen queues, but Oliver couldn't see the girl in any of them. Thinking that she must still be shopping somewhere in the supermarket, Oliver turned to go and find her when he suddenly heard a familiar voice at the front of the queue next to him.

'I'm sure I had it here a minute ago. I want to speak to the manager. I think it's been stolen. It must be someone in this supermarket because I know .

She stopped as she realised that Oliver was standing next to her, holding her purse out towards her.

'Lost something?' Oliver asked.

The girl smiled, then recognised Oliver and frowned, before her expression softened again and she took the purse with a faint smile on her lips. 'Thanks,' she said quietly.

A14    Oliver is anxious to prove to his mother that he

l) has learned a lot about cooking. 2) is capable of living independently.

3) knows she looked after him very well. 4) has learned not to be so negative.

AIS When she visits his flat, Oliver's mother will 1) appreciate the effort he has made.

2)   find something she isn't happy about.

3)   help him do up his flat.

4)   remind him to get new furniture.

A16     The young woman drops her shopping because I) she and Oliver bump into each other.

2)   her basket is too full.

3)   she is frightened by Oliver. 4) she feels pain in her knees.

A17    When Oliver offers to help, the young woman I) forgives him for what he has done.

2)   shows that she doesn't trust him.

3)   thanks him despite her anger.

4)   refuses to listen to his explanation.

A18 Oliver thinks that his mother might give him more independence if he 1) found a friend for her.

2)              had a girlfriend.

3)              told her to stop phoning him. 4) had nicer friends.

A19 When he sees the purse, Oliver realises that 1) he might be accused of theft.

2)   there's no money in it.

3)   he could get his revenge.

4)   it fell into his trolley by accident.

A20    Oliver manages to find the girl because he

l) sees her standing in one of the queues.

2)   knows where she is still shopping.

3)   recognises her voice when she speaks. 4) joins the same queue as her.

no        B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ha B2, B3 u A14-A20  pa.3Hb1.r yacnlfl-r Õ.1ClHKa. B2, B3 pacnoaoyeHb1 6 Hid.YCHeÙ1 qacmu t;namca. flpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòaH11f1.r B2, B3 õYKBb1 aanucbtea,tomcH õe.3 npoõeaoa u anc.'KOB npemŒaHtta.

                      Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa aeKCHKa

npoqumaùme moccm 3ano.mume nponycxu 6 npeòaoyeHllH.x not) H0,uepa.uu B4-B11 coonwemcmavwmgu.uu (þopataatll ('-106, HanettamaHHbLr  ÕYK6tlJtll cnpaga om KUYCÒOZO npeðaoyceH11f1.

          The Tomato        

B4

B6

B8

B9

BIO

Bll

Do you like tomatoes? Although people generally think tomato as a vegetable, in fact it one. It's People in Central America  tomatoes for thousands of years.

However, it was not until the Spanish in early 1500s that tomatoes came to Europe.

Before that, no one in Europe  a tomato! When tomatoes appeared in Italy and many people were scared.

Tomatoes  by many people to be poisonous. They refused to eat  and grew tomatoes for decoration.

Since then, the tomato  extremely popular.

Can you imagine what food today would be like without

a fruit.          NOT BE many EAT

                                                                                                                Mexico in the        ARRIVE

EVER SEE

                                                                                                            Britain,                       ONE


THINK only as plants   THEY

BECOME it?

npoqumaùme npuaeòeHHb1ñ ,quyce meRt•m 17peoõpa.3.vùme caoga, naneqamaHHble aaeaaßHbL8tu ÕVK6ŒUll nocae HO.uepoe B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHU epa-w„tamuqecR11 11 aeKCllqeCKU coomeemcm606aau coòepycamuo me,tccma. 3ano.1Hume nponycvcu noavqeHHblJtU caoe,cutll. nponycyc coomeemcmayem omÒe.1bH0.uv aaðaH11'0 11.3 epynnbl B12-B18.

B12

Before the  of the hot air balloon, no human had ever successfully flown above the ground.

INVENT

B13       Two          brothers, Josef and Etienne Montgolfier, were         FRANCE responsible for designing the world's first hot air balloon.

      B14      The first successful                             was in 1783, and the Montgolfier          FLY

      B15      brothers immediately became                             throughout the world.            FAME

      B16       The design of hot air balloons is based on the                             law that        SCIENCE

hot air rises. A burner at the bottom of the balloon provides the

      B17                                  . As the air inside the balloon gets hotter, the balloon            HOT

takes off. Its height above the ground is determined by how hot the air

        B18 inside is and its                               of travel depends on the wind.                      DIRECT


ETest2

[Ipoqumaùme mcwcm c nponycwa.uu, OÕO.3naZlCHHbL1tU no-ltepŒ'.tu Ä21-A28. 3mu H0Jtepa aaÒaHUfLU .421428, 6 KOHIOPblX npeòcmaŒ1eHb1 603MOYHb1e tgapuamnbl omeemoe. ()õaeòume H0Mep BbtÓpaHHO?O               eapuawna omaema.

Carol Chadbond leant on the counter by the till, chewing gum, and gazed at the customers in the shoe shop. There were only two: a young girl and her mother. They had been A21 on shoes for twenty minutes, unable to agree on anything. The girl wanted something expensive and fashionable, A22 the mother wanted something cheap and practical. Carol watched them argue and thought how bored she was.

She wished she hadn't agreed to stand in for Julie on a Saturday morning. She could be out with her friends now, drinking coffee and gossiping instead of waiting for people to A23 their minds up. The mother came over with a shoe in her hand.


'I wonder if you have this in a size 4,' she said. Carol took the shoe and smiled the automatic smile she A24         for customers.

'I'll go and have a look. Won't be a minute,' she said and went into the storeroom. She quickly found the shoes, then sat on a stool, hoping to waste a few minutes by A25 to look for the shoes. She thought about her plans for that evening. She was looking forward to going to the cinema and seeing her favourite actor's latest film. Realising that she hadn't invited Amy, she got out her mobile and quickly dialled the number. It rang twice before Amy answered.

'Hi, it's me!' Carol said. 'Guess what? I'm at work. Listen, what are you doing later?'

Soon, Amy was telling Carol all about what had happened the night before and who had said what to whom. Forgetting where she was, Carol got more and more A26 in the conversation, crying 'Really?' and 'I don't believe it!' at the more interesting moments in the story. A low cough came from the door of the storeroom. Carol looked up to see the woman customer standing there with a very annoyed A27 on her face. Even worse, the shop manager, Mrs Lewis, was standing right behind her.

'Erm ... I'll call you back,' Carol said into the phone, and hung A28 Somehow, she had the feeling that she might not have to work the following Saturday morning.

 

A21

I) trying

2) wearing

3) getting

4) having

A22

1) however

2) despite

3) while

4) still

A23

1) put

2) make

3) decide

4) cross

A24

1) booked

2) reserved

3) held

4) stored

A25

1) acting

2) imitating         

3) displaying

4) pretending

A26

l) involved

2) excited

3) included

4) concentrated

A27

l) view

2) look

3) sight

4) appearance

A28

1) off

2) out

3) up

4) down

OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB Ml.'

ObPATMTE BHMMAIIME, qmo                Ha .3aÒaHllfl B4-B18 11 A21-Ä28 pacnonapcuomcfl 6

PC13HblX qacmm• t5J1(1HKa. B4-B18 pacnoao.wellbl Hid.YCHeù qacmu t5aaHKa. Tlpu nept'Hoce omaemoe 6 aac)aHllfLV 134-1318 õYK6b1 ,3anucb16ŒomcH õe,3 npoõeaoe u .3HCIK06 npe/lllHaH1ffi.

Test 2

                                    Pa3aeJ1      IIWCbMO

         HO                 Cl, C2    WIAHK OTBETOB x2.

TIPI/ 6bVIOJIHeH11U aaðŒuú CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HUMUHlle oõpamume Ha mo, uno eatuu omeembl õyòym moabK0 no aanucmt,           6 R7AHKE OTBETOB E2. 1--111KClKlle aanucu qepnoeuxa He õyðvm   .9Kcnepmo.u.

111211 .3anoaneuuu WIAHKÄ OTBETOB ycaycume cnaqaaa HOMCP aaÒaHlffl CI, C2 .3ame.u aanutuume C60ù omaem Ecau OÒHOÙ cniOPOHbl HeòocmamotlH0, 6b/ .uo.yceme ucno.;1b.306anlb òpyeyo cmop0HY ÕaaHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from Susie, your English pen friend.

...Guess what! My parents say / can have a pet for my birthday. Isn't that fantastic? I'm not sure what kbdofpet toget, though. Haveyayotapet? what Hoya think Do think are too mach trouble tv (00k after? Maybe /shuddyet a cat, or a hamster. Let me know whatyou think!

 

Write back to Susie answering her questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Some people believe that teenagers today are generally rude, lazy and badly behaved. Other people, however, think that teenagers hare a bad reputation for no reason.

Do you agree that teenagers are often criticised unfairly?

Write 200-250 words. Use the following plan

1.  Introduction (State the problem).

2.  Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

3.  Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.

4.  Conclusion.

                               Pa3aeJ1        roBopeHHe

Bbl noayqume Rapmowcy, na Romopoù npeðcma6aeHb1 mpll aaòaH11f1      vcmno¿o omaema:

C3 — me,uamuqecxoe                                             6b1CKa.3b16aHUC',

C4 — ()uaaoe c            ot5.ut'Ha cþŒmuqecR0ù uucþop.ua«ueù, C5 — Òuaaoe c        oõM('Ha uucþopata«ueù.            6b1no.QHeHt1H          aaòamut onpeòea.qem .9K3Œue,qamop. Bo ape.'vtfl npoaeòC'H11f1            qacnlll .9R.3CL8WHa uòem nocn10HHHafi .3anucb Ha ayò1d0Kaccemy.

3aaaH11S1 3K3aMeHVeM01'O


STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on clothes.

Remember to say:

      how the weather affects what we wear

      how men and women sometimes wear different types of clothing

      what you like and don't like wearing, and why

      how important being in fashion is to you

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

Your school runs after-school clubs for the students and you are thinking of joining one. You are only available for one night a week. You would like to do something that isn't connected to schoolwork.

Before making a decision, ask the teacher in charge of the clubs about:

      clubs available

      activities at the clubs

      days the clubs meet

You begin the conversation. The teacher will play the part of the teacher responsible for after-school clubs.

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on whether you are going to join a club and, if so, which one

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You are planning a two-week holiday with your friend next summer. You and your friend are discussing what kind of holiday you should go on. You can:

      go camping

      stay in a hotel by the sea

      go on a cruise

      go on a cycling holiday

      go to a language school in the UK The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

      discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

-tižUage—ñd

Section 1 Listening: third task

A   Look at the task on page 31. Match each of the following statements to one of the situations described in questions A7A13.

1    1 think you've just been working too hard.

2    You can feel the excitement in the spectators.

3    This Friday ... we're bringing you the stories you never hear .

4    We actually spent a lot of time in the hotel ...

5    1've already brought the camera back to be replaced once ...          

6    1 mean, the music is pretty ordinary

7    There have been quite a few burglaries around here .

B    For each situation described in questions A7-A13, make a note of three words or phrases you might expect to hear. Then compare your predictions with your partner's.

Al: police / robber / frightened'

AIO:

All:

A12:

A13:

Section 2 Reading: second task

C    Quickly read the text on page 33. Each of the following sentences contains one mistake. Cross out the mistake and write the correct word on the line.

1     The Romans controlled land in Europe, the Middle East and north America.

2     The edge of the Roman Empire was the north of France.          

3     Hadrian's Wall went from Cardiff to Newcastle. 4 The wall took sixty years to build.       

5 Chesters House is on the

         River Thames.                         

D   Find words in the text to match these definitions.

1     groups of people who live together

2     very large         

3     having an advanced culture — 4 gained, got something

5      things such as food, equipment, etc

6      small castles

7      ordinary          

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

second task

E    Quickly read the text in the second task on page 36 and answer these questions.

I Where is Chessington World of Adventures?

2      What animals can you see there?       

3      Which area will very young visitors enjoy?

4      Which ride sounds like the most

         frightening?                             

verb

noun

adjective

attract

enjoy

excite

adventure

scare

F     Complete the table. Remember to include negative forms where appropriate.

Section 4 Writing: second task

G   Complete these words and phrases.

Introducing examples

1      example

2instance

3     such

Introducing your first point

4    


To begin

5     First    all, .

Introducing further points

6  addition to that, 7 As well  this, .

Introducing contrast

8 On other hand, 9 In spitethis, .

Introducing your conclusion

10  conclusion,

Il To sum

Section 5 Speaking: third task

H   Choose the correct word or phrase to complete these phrases.

1    Getting a book would I should be a good idea because ...

2    One thing we would I should remember is that .

3     Personally, I suggest to get I getting a new pen because .

4    One advantage of get I getting a briefcase is .

5    In my opinion, it would I should be best to get a picture because ...

I      Imagine your teacher is leaving the school. You have collected some money to buy him/her a present. Choose one of the following presents to buy your teacher and explain why you think it would be a good idea. Try to use the phrases from Exercise H.

a box of

a book

a new

chocolates

 

briefcase

a picture

a new pen

something

of the class

 

else


                                Pa3neJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl yc.lbltuume 5 6blCKa.3blßaHUÙ. YcmaH06ume coon16emcm61te .vteyòy 6btCKU.3blßdlHll}lJtU eoeopmqeeo 1 — 5 u vmeepycÒeH11fLMll, ()aHHbLUU 6 CtlUCKe A — F. Mcno,1b.3.vùme             õVKBV, oõoanaqcuougyo ymaepycðemte, movibK0 oÒun pa.3. B aaðanuu ecmb oðHO auuutee _ymeepowðemte. Bbl ycabltuume .3anucb ()6CIYÒb1. 3ð1Hecume cet)ll omeenlbl 6 maõauuy.

A.     I sometimes make a little money from my hobby.

B.      I was introduced to my hobby by a relative.

C.      My hobby's only really fun if I do it with friends.

D My hobby helps me meet new people.

Test 3 t

E. It takes a long time to learn to do my hobby well. F. My hobby is only suitable for people who are fit.

                  1

2

3

4

5

 

Bbl yc.Qb1tuume ðuaaop mypucma co cayqaùH01i npoxoyceù Ha yau«e. Onpeðeaume, Kú'KL1e 11.3 'IPUßeÒëHHblX Al-A6 coomßemcmevwm coòep.ycamuo mtwcma (1 ), Kt1RUe He coomgemc•mewom (2) u o 6 muccme He cycaaano, mo ecnlb na ocnoecmuu meR•cma HeJ1b3fi ()anlb Hid noaoycumea1bH0?0, Hil omgema (3). Oõeeòume HO.uep ßblÓPaHHO?O casuu gapuamna omøema. Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb c)eaycÒb1.

 

Al        The tourist is studying modern art.

                     l) BepHO                2) HeBepH0                3) B ereKe-re He cxa3t1H0

A2       There is a mistake in the tourist's guide book.

1)   BepH0               2) HeBepHO          3) B •reKc•re He CKŽuaHO

A3       The woman recommends taking a bus.

                     1) BepH0              2) He13epHO               3) B •reKCTe He cwagaH0

A4     The tourist should turn right at the park.

                     l) BepHO               2) HeBepH0                 3) B -reKc-re He cxa3'dH0

A5       The man should catch the number 21 bus to get to his destination.

                     1) BepH0                2) HeBepH0                 3) B Tewre He cK't13aH0

A6      The Speedmaster card can be used on any local bus for a week.

                    1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B -rewre He CKt13t1HO

Test3       


Bbl ycalbltuume 6b1CR•a.3b16aH11fi moòeù 6 ce.uu pa.11ut1Hb1.v cumya«unr. Omaemwne Ha gonpocbl no coòepyaHLlR) 6btCKa.3b1BG'HUÙ, Bbttîpae npeÒaoyceHHbLV gapuamnoe on16ema. B aaòaH11f1-r A 7413 oõaeòume I'llCþpy 1, 2 ILIII 3, OÕ03Ha¼C11014VlO omeeng Komopblù ,zca.yemcfl Hauõonee gePHblM. Bbl ycabltuume KaycÒoe 6blCKa.3b16CIHUe


A7

You will hear a woman talking about crime in her local area. How does she feel?

I) worried

2)   hopeful

3)   angry

A8

You will hear an advertisement for a radio programme. What is special about the programme?

I) It has interviews with ordinary people.

2)   It has interviews with experts.

3)   It has interviews with sportsmen.

A9

You will hear a man talking about his holiday. What was he disappointed by?

I) the hotel

2)   the beaches

3)   the weather

AIO

You will hear a doctor talking to a patient. What is the doctor's advice?

l) Rest and take a few days off work.

2) Get some fresh air and exercise. 3) Make sure you eat well.

All

You will hear a woman talking about the Eurovision Song Contest. How does she feel about it?

l) She likes to watch the performances.

2) She finds some of it predictable. 3) She thinks it is pointless.

A12

You will hear a sports commentator describing a match. Who does he criticise?

I) the umpire

2)   the players

3)   the spectators

A13

You will hear a man talking to a shop assistant. What does he want the shop assistant to do?

I) contact the manager of the shop

2)   give him his money back

3)   replace a damaged item

no        Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOÞf OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB             !

ObPATWE BHMMAHME,                 HO                m, Al-A13

'-tacnlfLV âqamca. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HUYCHŒ'Ú yacmu ÕaaHKCl. flpu nepeHoce omeemt)6 6 aaòaHuu BI õYRßb1 õe.3 npot5e,706 u .3HClK06 npenuncmufl.

                                        Pa3neJ1        HrreH"e

YcmaH06ume coomeemcmeue me-if A — G meR•cma.8f I — 6. 3ClHecume coou omoenlbl 6 maõau«y.

A. UNUSUAL VIEWS B. EARLY INVENTORS

c. SENSIBLE DECISIONS

D.     POPULAR ARTISTS

E.      COMMON MISTAKES

F.       FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS G. SCIENTIFIC VALUE

1    Photography scientists can whether all Muybridge ground at the

2    The ordinary people are be taking mail. The

has many uses. Most of us use photographs to save special moments for the future, but also learn a lot from them. In the nineteenth century, for example, people argued about of a horse's legs left the ground at the same time when it ran. A man call Eadweard took high-speed photographs of a horse and proved that all four legs were indeed off the same moment.


camera that uses film seems to be a thing of the past. These days, more and more digital cameras to capture those unforgettable moments. In ten years' time, we'll all that we then put on our computers to print out or to send around the world by ecameras will get better and cheaper, and the world of photography will never be the same again!

3     Is your album full of boring snapshots? Taking good photographs is a lot easier than you might think. The secret is to find new ways of looking at an ordinary scene. If vou're taking a picture of a building, what happens if you look up? Or perhaps the back Of the building is more interesting than the front. Photography is about surprises and discovering new points of view.

4     Before buying a camera, it's important to decide what you're going to use it for. Do vou want to take quick photos of your friends and family? In that case, you should go for a cheap camera that you can keep in your bag or pocket, always ready. Do you want to take artistic pictures? If so, you will probably want to spend a bit more on a more expensive professional camera. A little thought now can help you choose wisely.

5     Many people hope to simply pick up a camera, point it and produce great pictures. Photography is a lot easier than it used to be, but it's still easy to get it wrong. Remember that you should have the sun behind you. Too many people take photographs facing the sun and then are surprised when there's too much light! Another thing to avoid is taking pictures of something far away in the dark. Your flash won't help at a distance.

6     When the Englishman William Henry Fox Talbot first pointed his camera at a window in his home, Lacock Abbey, in 1835, he helped to start a revolution. This was the moment he created the first photograph on paper. His ideas, together with those of other pioneers, including the Frenchmen Daguerre and Niepce, changed things forever. Today's world of full-colour images had its beginnings in their experiments.

NY •reKCTa

TeMa

1

2

3

4

5

6

32


England was a part of the Roman Empire.

The wall went from one side of England to the other.

Building the wall helped to stop the soldiers from thinking about home.

  The wall showed how powerful the Roman people were.

55 None of the wall has survived to the present day.

 There is a large collection of Roman objects at Chesters House.

In 122 AD, the Roman Empire stretched across Europe, the Middle East and north Africa. In Britain, it reached to the far north of England. However, many Scottish tribes resisted the Romans. So, in that year, Emperor Hadrian decided to build a huge wall across the island to keep them out.

The wall ran all the way across England, from what is now

Carlisle in the west to Newcastle in the east — 73 miles in total. It was built by Roman soldiers, and was a useful way of keeping them busy. Remember that in those days they were living on the edge of the civilised world. To stop them missing home too much, it was important to give them something to do, and building a ten-foot-thick wall certainly did that. Local people also benefited, since the soldiers and craftsmen working on the wall needed to buy supplies wherever they were. It took six years to build and was a very clear symbol of the strength of the Romans.

Today, this wall is known as Hadrian's Wall and, although most of it has disappeared, it is still possible to see parts Of it. The Romans built forts along the wall for the men to live in and some of these buildings have survived. The best example is the fort at Chesters House on the River Tyne, in an area which the Romans called Cilurnum. The soldiers living here did not just come from Rome. They also came from modern-day Germany and areas of central Europe, which at the time the wall was built were under Roman control. Visitors to the fort today can see a small number of everyday objects in the museum and get an idea of what life was like on the edge of the Roman world.


Ilpoqumañme ymeepycòeHllH I — 6 u caeòyouguù aa HUMU mexcm YcmaH06ume coomeemcmeue .ueycðy ymeepYÒeH1ffi.M11 u coòepYí1HueM moccma. Hanuužume 1 — ecau ymeep.ycòenue eepHoe, u I'll(þpy O — ecutu ymcepycòeHue HeeepHoe. 3aHecume CBOU omeembl 6 maõ21110'.

1

3

4

5

6

 

Ilpoqumaùme meyccm u 6b1h10JIHume aaòaH11fi A14-A20, oõ60òH I'll(þpy 1, 2, 3 unu 4, coomcemcnlßyougyo H0Mepy 6blÕPClHH020 6Œvtu gapuanma omaema.

I looked out of the window again and then back at the clock. 'Typical Helen!' I thought to myself, wondering what excuse she would try this time. We had had this arrangement for a year now. We took it in turns to drive to work, stopping along the way to pick the other up. It saved petrol and was better for the environment, which was something that Helen claimed to care about, although I had seen her empty her ashtray out of the car window more than once. For me, the main advantage was the stress reduction. If I could avoid battling the city centre traffic a few days a week, I'd put up with any amount of meaningless gossip along the way.

A car horn sounded and I looked up to see Helen waving from her car window and pointing at her watch as if to say, 'Hurry up'. I deliberately sat down out of view and counted to thirty before picking up my jacket and bag and heading towards the car, locking the front door behind me.

'Sorry, Vanessa!' Helen called. 'Justin just wouldn't get ready for school this morning.' If Helen's excuses were to be believed, then Justin was the most difficult child imaginable. He also seemed to be the unluckiest, having suffered from half a dozen different minor illnesses in the last month alone. It was strange that he never seemed to have any problems on mornings when it was my turn to drive.

'Never mind,' I replied, fastening my seat belt. 'We should be okay.' Helen set off and we joined the rush hour traffic.


'Did you read the report?' she asked me after a minute and I nodded. 'What did you think?' I had been expecting the question, but still I hesitated for a moment. I couldn't say what I really thought, which was that Helen would be lucky to keep her job because the report was very critical of her department. Helen glanced at me.

'I know,' she said. 'It's bad, isn't it? I knew that Peterson was out to get me.'

Carl Peterson was the area manager. The report was the result of a month-long study of the company and we had all been asked to read it over the weekend. I understood why Helen didn't get on with him. Both were determined to get to the top in the company. The difference was that where Helen had no idea how to deal with other people and spent her time finding ways of avoiding blame, Carl was a talented manager.

'I'm sure that's not the case,' I said. 'He's just doing his job.' Helen's lips tightened.

'Hmm,' she said. After a moment, she continued. 'Look. I know I'm not perfect, but it's not my fault. I

Just at that moment, a young child on a bicycle pulled out into the road in front of us. I shouted 'Look out!' and Helen slammed on the brakes and turned the wheel quickly. There was a crunch of metal as we hit the back of the car in front, which had stopped at the traffic lights. The boy glanced over his shoulder before quickly pedalling off. Steam began to rise from under the bonnet. Helen hit the steering wheel in anger and frustration.

'You okay?' I asked.

'Yes, fine,' she replied, and then I saw her expression change from anger to shock and she let her head fall forward onto the wheel. I followed where she had been looking and saw what she had seen. The driver of the other car had got out and was standing by the car, looking at us with a fixed expression. It was Carl Peterson.

A14      When Vanessa thinks 'Typical Helen!' she implies that 1) she feels sorry for Helen.

2)   Helen is often late.

3)   Helen will be in a hurry.

4)   they will be late for work.

AIS      Vanessa mentions Helen emptying her ashtray to show 1) how much Helen's views on the environment have changed.

2)   how their arrangement makes a big difference to pollution.

3)   that she thinks their arrangement is a bad idea.

4)   that she doubts that Helen really cares about the environment.

A16      Vanessa feels that the driving arrangement 1) gives her and Helen a good chance to chat.

2)   makes getting to work more relaxing.

3)   causes arguments between her and Helen.

4)   helps to reduce the amount of traffic on the road.

Al 7      Vanessa waits before leaving the house to join Helen 1) to show that she won't allow Helen to hurry her.

2)  


to check that she has everything she needs.

3)   because she knows they have plenty of time.

4)   because she has to check that the door is locked.

AIS Vanessa believes that Justin

1) gets ill more than other children his age.

2)   is used as an excuse by his mother.

3)   is a difficult child to deal with.

4)   should learn to deal with his problems himself.

      A19       Vanessa thinks that Carl

1)   is jealous of Helen's success.

2)   wants Helen to do his job for him.

3)   is very good at his job.

4)   gives everyone too much work to do.

A20 In the final paragraph, Helen realises that 1) she and Vanessa will be late for work.

2)   she is lucky to be alive.

3)   the boy is badly injured.

4)   she has made her situation worse.

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo orngenlbl Ha aaÒaH1151132, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaauuomcfl d pa,3HbLr qacnlH.r Õnawca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1 a HUYCHeÚ qacmu t5aaH1v•a. Tlpu nepenoce omaemt)ß 6 aar)ammx B2, B3 õYK6b1 aanucbtea,tomcfl õea npoõenoe u .3HüK0B npe/lllHaHlffi.


                       Pa3AeJ1        rpaMMaTMKa JleKCVIKa

Tlpoqumaùme mewm 3a/10JIHume nponycK11 npeòaoyceHt1H-x• nor) HO.M('PCLMII B4-BI I coomcemc,'11ßW01UIOt11 tþ0PMŒ8t11 caoe, HaneqamaHHbLt .3aua6Hb1.uu ÕVK6ŒU11 cnpaaa om Kaycðoeo

William Shakespeare

WRITE

RECEIVE

NOT PRODUCE

LATE

APPEAR

STAR

PERFORM languages.


STUDY

npoqumaùme npugeòeHHb11i Hil.yce mexcm Tlpeoõpaavùme cat)6ú', Haneuamam•tbte 3CIZIC16HbLVt11 ÕYK€avML1 nocae HOMC'POd B 12-1318 maK, qmoõbl OHU u .aæccuqecK11 coomaemcmß06Œ1t1 coòepycamuo me,rccma. 3ano.1H11tne nponycxu nt)JtyqeHHbLU11 caoaa.uu. Ka.ycòblðf nponyt'K coomgemcmayem omòœ1bH0„uy .3aòaH1110 113 epvll/lbl B12-B18.

Chessington World of Adventures is an  theme park, just EXCITE 12 miles from London.

There's something for everyone at the park. Animal will LOVE enjoy the 'Trail of Kings', where you can see gorillas, tigers and lions.

 is the 'Land of the Dragons', a ATTRACT

Very young children will love 'Toytown', where you can go for an

flight on the back of a Flying Jumbo, or drive one of the ENJOY visitors might try 'The Vampire'. On ADVEM'URE

'The Vampire', you ride with your legs hanging down while it takes you high into the sky. If heights make you'The Vampire' NERVE might not be for you. Riding fast high above the park can be a experience!  SCARE

Tlpoqumaùme moccm c nponvuca.uu, OÕO.3uaqeHHblJfll HO.&tepaatU .421-A28. 3mu H0Mepa coomuemcme,yom aaðt1H11ft.8t A21-A28, 6 KomopbLr npeòc•mŒ16aeHb1 60.3.&to.YHb1e eapucmnlbl omaem06. Oõeeòume HO„uep  6aat11 eapuamna omaema.

 

Even up seasons.

A22 A plants that soon touch If

A24 walls You hot wisteria Those you're

A26 and a lot

A27 varieties keep plants

if you live in the heart of the city, there's no reason why you shouldn't A21 gardening. We can't all afford a large garden, but we can all create a space where we can follow the Whether it's a window box, a balcony or a tiny yard, anyone can have the pleasure of looking plants,

window box is a small box of plants that literally sits outside your window. Here, the choice of is what counts. You want a splash of colour all year A23 , so choose flowers bloom at different times of the year. Daffodils, for example, are beautiful spring flowers and will have you looking forward to summer. Their bright colours will also attract butterflies, bringing a of life.

you've got a balcony, you've got a little more freedom. In this case, the key is to  maximum use of the space you've got available. Put taller plants against the of the house, with shorter plants and flowers along the A25  of the balcony.

can also add a water feature; a small fountain creates interest and can have a cooling effect on a summer's day. If your neighbours' balcony is next to yours, why not use a fast-growing plant like to form a natural barrier, giving you more privacy?

of you who are lucky enough to have a small yard can really go to town. Think about how going to use it. Do you want to be able to sit and enjoy the sun? Or do you want to be  to entertain friends and have a barbecue? Divide the yard into separate areas plan each one carefully. Garden furniture is very important. A table that folds in half can give you of flexibility, and chairs that fold away also allow you to change your garden to your mood. As A28  as plants are concerned, choose that don't mind a bit Of shade, unless your yard gets a lot of sun. Yards often have walls that the sun out for long periods and you don't want your careful plans spoiled because a few of your


start to die.

A21                   I) take                      2) set                      3) put                    4) make

A22                 1) on                       2) up                      3) after                 4) down

A23                   I) round                   2) over                   3) along                4) across

A24                  1) get                       2) make                 3) have                  4) do

A25                 1) edge                    2) boundary          3) rim                   4) frame

A26                 I) capable               2) possible            3) able                 4) probable

A27     I) fit    2) suit  3) copy            4) go A28       1) much           2) long 3) few 4) far

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3ABY2bTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !

ObPATWE BHMMAHME,                  Ha              B4-B18 Il A21-A28  6

PCI.3HblX qacnlH.r ÕJIG'HKa. B4-B18 pacno.ao,yceHb1 6 Hil.YCHeñ1 yacmu t;.aamca. [Ipu nepeHoce omeen106 6 .3aÒaHllfLV B4-B18 Õ)'K6bt 3anucb16cuomcf1 õe.3 npoõeJ106 11 .3h1UK06 npU111HüH11H.

                                          Pa3AeJ1         Il"CbMO

WIAHK OTBETOB .Nþ2.

Tlpu Bblno.1HeH1žu aaòcmuù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HILUCIH11e oõpamume Ha mo, qmo 6atuu omeemž,l

aanutuume C60ù omaenz ECJtu OÒHOÚ cmop0Hbl õaamca HeòocmamotlH0, 6bl *toyeme ucnoatb30aamb ()pveyo cmopoH.y õaamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.


This is part of a letter from Sean, your English pen friend.

...I'm thinking ofstarting music lessons. Doyoup(ay any instruments? ever had lessons? I'm sure what instrument to cheese what suggest? / want to be awe

to playpop music, / think.

 

Write back to Sean answering his questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Fast food is very popular and saves time for busy working people. However, many experts say that it is not completely healthy.

What can you say for and against fast food?

Write 200-250 words.

Use the following plan

I. Introduction (State the problem).

2.  Arguments "for".

3.  Arguments "against"

4.  Conclusion.


Pa3neJ1      1'0BopeHne

Bbl nonyqume Kapmowcy, Ha ycomopoù npeòcmaœWHb1 mpu aac)aH1iH ycmH0?0 ome,ema.• C3 — me-uamuuecxoe .UOHoa02uqecxoe Bblt•xa.3bwaHlte,

C4 — ()11Œ70? c IV./7bJ0 oõMC'HC1 cþaycmuqeucoù uncþopua«ueÚ, C5 — òuaaoe c geab10 oõMC?Ha

01ßHowaoù1 untþop.ua«ueú. OKOH¼UH11e 6bUIO„QHé'H11H Ka.ycòoeo aaòaH11f1 onpeòeanem 3K.3a.ueuamop. Bo ape.',ffi  ,Оnoù qacmu .9K.3Œuena uòem nocn10ft,LIHaf-1 aanucb na ayò110Kaccemy.

3aaaH1151  3K3aMeHVeMO"O


STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on holidays.

Remember to say:

      why people go on holiday

      what people usually do on holiday

      what different kinds of holiday people go on

      what kind of holiday you enjoy, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are in a museum. You would like to look round an exhibition for half an hour. The museum charges separately for each exhibition, and you can pay £5 only.


Before making a decision, ask the museum assistant about:

      exhibitions on at the moment

      how long it takes to go round them

      the cost

The teacher will play the part of the museum assistant and will speak first.

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on which exhibition to look round STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

Your teacher, Mrs Williams, is leaving the school and your class has collected some money for a present. You and your friend are discussing what present to get her. You can get her:

      a new pen

      a new briefcase

      a picture of the class

      a book

      a box of chocolates

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

      discuss all the options

      take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas

      give good reasons • find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account

      invite vour friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

 

 

iEkamiSkillS

 Test                                                               Develó mentF

Section 1 Listening: third task

A   Read questions A7-A13 in the task on page 43. Write a word or phrase from the questions in each gap to complete the sentences.

I (A?) If you give someone encouragement, you give them

2      (A8) If you have a  problem, your problem is to do with money.

3      (A9) The  of something is how much people like it.

4      (AIO) If you are  , you believe what other people say.

5      (All) A  is a period of time in which you do something.

6     
(Al 2) If something is  , it is normal and usual.

                 7 (A13) If things  you, they help you,

B    In pairs or as a group, discuss what you think a life coach might be.

Section 2 Reading: third task

C   Quickly read the text on page 46 and decide if these statements are True or False.

I     Angela is taking part in a game show on TV.

2      Angela is in the final with three other contestants.

3      Angela has the chance to win

4      The task for the final round demands a lot of physical skill.

5      Angela has to guess which door the money is behind.    

 6 When the presenter opens a door, Angela knows she's made a mistake.

7          Angela is allowed to change her mind.         

8          Angela changes her mind.     

9          Angela believes she has increased her chances of winning the money.      

10      At the end of the story, we know

          that Angela has lost.                  

D   Write a word from the box on the line to replace the word in bold.

likelihood • luck • opportunity

I     I wish I'd had the chance to go to university.  

2      There's not much chance that she'll come to the party.

3      It was pure chance that I met her in the street while shopping

         yesterday.                                   

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

third task

E    Read the text with gaps A21-A28 on page 49 and answer the questions.

I     How was Jackson going to

A21  rid of Simon?

Jackson wants Simon to:

a)    leave.

b)   stay.

2 'Could you put me +122 Jackson?'

Simon is asking Jackson for:

a)    financial help.

b)   somewhere to stay.

3     there seemed little evidence to suggest he was 1423  to leave.

The word that fits in the gap probably means:

a)    creating.

b)   planning.


4     Simon seemed to have -424Dear Sally, in so comfortablyWrite back soon!

This suggests that Simon was treating the flat as if:Thanks foryour letter. It wasgreat to hear

b) a) it he was was his a temporary home. guest. We/(done VM passingyour exams! fromyou!

5     Jackson knew he should +125  / thinkyou need to askyeursefone question:

       his feelings clear to Simon

 

what's more important — that argument or

Jackson knew he should:

 

yourfriendship? / remember when / asked

a) tell Simon exactly how he felt.

 

myselfthat it al/became dear. / rea/isedmy

b) change how he felt about Simon.

 

friendship with Chris was far more important.

F Circle the correct word to complete the

 

/ calledhint immediate/' andtowhim. 14/e becamefriends again

patterns.

 

immediately. Maybeyea shoulda/o the same thing. Let me know what

I charge someone with I for a crime 2 condemn someone with I for (doing)

 

happens!Goodluck!     

something

 

23 Pert/andStreet

3 blame someone with I for (doing)

 

Manchester

something

 

MN36YL

4 accuse someone for I of (doing)

 

24th September

something

1

Lots of(ove,

Section 4 Writing: first task

Section 5 Speaking: first task

G Put the parts of this letter in the correct order.

H Look at the Student Card for Task 1 on page 51 and make notes to complete the

      Part I                 Part 6

table.

What's your favourite subject?

Why?

What things do you do in a typical lesson?

What have you learnt so far by doing this subject?

Do you want to continue studying this subject in the future?

      Part 2                Part 7

Part 3Part 8 Part 4  Part 9

Part 5

Anyway, I'vegot togo MOW. Loads ofhomework (unfortunate(y!).

I'm SOD)' to hearyou 're hadan argument with your bestfrt•eMdana/thatyoufre not speaking at the moment Yes, has happenedto me too, andtvs awful isn't t??

Care(

                                   Pa3neJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycalbltuume 5 6btCKa.3b16CZHUñ. Ycmcmogume coomaemcmaue Ateycòy ßb1C1caabteaH1151Jtu Kaycòozo pogopqugeeo 1 — 5 u ymaepycòeH11H.M11, C)aHHbLMU 6 ChlUCKe A — F. Mcnoat.ayúme Kaycðyo õYK6.y, oõ03Hat1t110110'10 ymeep.ycc)eH1te, mŒ1bK0 oÒuH pa.3. B aaÒa1tuu ecnlb oÒ1to auuutee ymgeporcòeuue. Bbl ycablžuume .3anuc•b ()gaycÒb1. 3cmecume Cß011 omgenlbl (3 maãauuy.

A.      His best friend's sense of humour appeals to him.

B.      His relationship with his best friend has changed recently. C. His best friend saved him when he was in serious trouble. D. His best friend is also his next-door neighbour.

E.      Communication and support are very important in their relationship.

F.     


He and his best friend share the same interests.

FOBOPSILLU1ñ

      1       

2

3

4

5

 

YTBepxnemre

 

 

Bbl yc„lbltuume pa.32060p JteycÒy u nt»cynameaeu. Onpeòeaume, KtlKlte 11.3 npugeòëHHbLr ymgepycðeH11ù Al-A6 coomaemcmayom coòepycaH11}0 meKcma (1 KClKUe He coomaemcmeyom (2) u o qëM 6 muccme He mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUll muccma Heat,.3H ()amb noaoycumeabH0?0, HI/ omeema (3). Oõ6eòume HO-MCP 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6t1M11 gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycau,uuume aanucb ðeaycòbl.

      Al     The trousers were too big for the customer's husband.

                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B •reKcere He cxa•gaH0

      A2    The assistant tells the customer how to get her money back.

                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepno             3) B •rewre He cKt13',1H0

      A3     The assistant finally agrees that the new trousers are a different colour.

                           l) BepHO               2) HeBepHO              3) B •reKCTe He CKa3'dHO

      A4    The customer thinks her husband looks good in grey clothes.

                           l) BepHO               2) HeBepHO             3) B TeKCTe He CKa3Žu--lO

      A5     The customer's favourite colour is green.

                          1) BepHO               2) HeBepHO                3) B TeKCTe He cKtuaH0

      A6     The customer proves she bought the trousers at one of their shops.

1)  BepH0         2) HeBepH0        3) B -rewre He CKtuaHO


Bbl ycabltuume ltHtnep6bR) c 'ICU.XOJIO?O.U - bJt.ÐP Teùaop. B aaÒaHUf1X A 7-A13 oõaeòume Illitþpy 1, 2 ILQII 3, coomaemcmayougyo 6b1õpaHHo.uy 6a.uu aapuanmy omaema. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanucb ()6ayÒbl.

      According to Blaire, life coaches I) have busy schedules.

Test 4

2)  often work in teams. 3) offer support and advice.

 A8

As a life coach, Blaire

1)                deals with many different kinds of problem.

2)                specialises in helping people with their careers. 3) only deals with financial problems.

 

 A9

Blaire says that life coaches I) are often medically trained.

2)   often want to help each other.

3)   are increasing in popularity.

 

310

Life coaches try to make people I) be more trusting.

2)   deal with strangers.

3)   think about their life,

 

311

Blaire says that most people need I) a number of sessions.

2) a very long first session. 3) just one session.

 

A12

In a typical session, Blaire would ask if the client was

l) happy with her.

2) worried about the sessions. 3) having any problems.

 

A13

The example of the actor shows that 1) we can all be successful if we work hard.

2)   life coaches do benefit people.

3)   Blaire knows a lot of famous people.

 

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeenlbt Ha aaòamtst BI, Al-A13 pacnoaaecuomcR 6 Pa.3HblX

BI ÕVKßbl aanucbtgawmcžfl õea npoõeaoa u .3HCIKOB npenuncmu.q.

O

                                        Pa3aeJ1        I-ITeHne

YcmaH06ume coom€emcmaue me-u A — G meyçcma.u 1 — 6. 3t1Hecume CBOU omeenlbl Mcno.Qb3Yùme rca.ycòyo õycay moabK0 oÒtlH pa.3. B aaòanuu oÒHa me.'ta auuutfl51.

maâungy.

A.      EXPENSIVE NEWSPAPERS

B.      SERIOUS PROBLEM

C.      DIFFERENT TOPICS

D.      WAYS OF READING

E.       INSTANT INFORMATION

F.       EASIER READING

G.      FAMOUS AUTHOR

I

2

3

There are two than tabloids, stories about the interested in news big headlines, There is an official documents, understand. They confusing, even now make sure

The Tolstoy family years. One of the Tolstoy, was born one of the greatest Anna Karenina,

main types of newspaper: 'broadsheets' and 'tabloids'. Broadsheets are often larger and are 'serious' newspapers. They present the news in detail, and do not have many private lives of famous people. Tabloids, on the other hand, are much more and scandals involving stars than they are in serious news. They often have very particularly on the front page, and have lots more photographs.

Test4\

organisation in the UK called the Plain English Campaign. Their aim is to try to get such as government leaflets, written in a style of English that is easy to say that a lot of written English, particularly when it's talking about legal issues, is to British people. They have had a lot of success, and many government departments that the documents they produce are checked to make sure they're understandable.

have contributed much to Russian society and culture for many hundreds of most famous Tolstovs, Count Lev Nikolaevich, better known to the world as Leo in 1828. He was a writer, politician and philosopher, and is now considered to be novelists of the 19th century. Many of his books, including and Peace and are still extremely popular todav. Leo Tolstoy died in 1910.

4      If you're reading a newspaper and you want to find out what's on TV at 8 0'clock tonight, you don't  read every word on the TV page. You ignore all the programmes on earlier in the day, and just look at  the information about programmes on at S pm. With a news report, however, you may read the whole thing through quickly to get a general idea of what it's about. If it looks interesting, you might decide to read it in more detail.

5      When we want to find a company's telephone number, we look in a telephone directory. The

Internet, however, doesn't have a directory of websites, so how can we find the website of a business we're interested in? The answer is to use a 'search engine'. One Of the most popular search engines at the moment is Google. Let's say you want to find a company called Haymarket. You do a quick search on Google, and all the websites which have the word Haymarket in them appear in a list.

6      Many people suffer from some form of dvslexia. This means that their reading or writing ability is not as good as you would expect from their level of intelligence. There are actually manv different types of dyslexia. If you have 'scotopic sensitivity syndrome', for example, you find it difficult to read black print on white paper. Other colours, however, are much easier to read.

Ne •reKCTa

1

2

3

4

5

6


I IV[' knou for certain where and zehcn chess teas invented.

2      Will never know for sure why the game is called 'chess'.

3      It is possible that the rules of the game Will change in the future.

4      A man called Charles Darrozt' invented Monopoly.

5      Darroct' 's family helped him make the board game.

6      Parker Brothers also made a version of the game for the UK.

Test 4

[Ipoqumaùme  1 — 6 u caeðyougue aa HII.UU moccmbl. Ycmcmouume coome,emcmaue .ueycòy yme,epycòO111fLM11 u coòepyanue.u me,tccmoo. Hanutuume tgucþpy 1 — ec.lll vmoepycòeptue oepnoe, 11 Igucþpy O — eccll/ ymeep.ycòeH11e neeepnoe. Jemecume cooti onwenžbl o maõautgy.

The two-player game chess is one of the most popular board games in the world. It is also one of the oldest, although there is uncertainty regarding where and when chess originated. Several countries claim to have invented the game.

One possibility is that chess was invented in India about 1,500 years ago. Another theory, however, says that the Chinese were playing a form of chess over 800 years before that. We shall probably never know for sure, but we do know where the word 'chess' comes from. It comes from the Persian word shàh, which means 'king'.

The rules for chess have changed several times during the centuries. Many of the modern rules were introduced in the 1 5th century, and minor changes to the game were also made in the 19th century. An international organisation called FIDE (Fédération Internationale des Echecs) is now responsible for making any further changes to the rules.

1

2

3

4

5

6

The enormously successful board game Monopoly has an interesting historv. Although many people believe that Charles Darrow created the game, it is now known that he did not. In the 1920s, there were a number of home-made games in the USA called Monopoly, all very similar to the game we play today. Charles Darrow played one of these games, enjoyed it, and decided to make his own version. He, his wife and his son made the sets by hand and he began to sell them. The game's popularity grew and, in 1935, Darrow sold the game to the American companv Parker Brothers. The UK version of the game, with London street names, was produced by Waddington Games in 1936. In a short space of time, there were versions for cities and countries all round the world. It has been estimated that since 1935 more than 500 million people have played Monopoly.


[Ipoqumaùme moccm u 6b1110AH1žme A14-A20, gucþpy 1, 2, 3 unu 4, coomgemcmoyouçy'/0 H0Jtepy 6blÕPaHHO?O ߌuu oapuanma omuema.

You've won the car, you've won the holiday for two in the Caribbean, to the final for a chance to win one million pounds!' even the screaming and clapping of the audience wouldn't be able to drown beating heart. She couldn't believe it — the first time she'd ever taken part in she was in a potentially life-changing situation. to herself. 'Don't lose control now.' the presenter. 'Now, skill has got you this far but, as you know, there's chance in the final and this week is no exception.' Angela nodded. She'd and knew what every round entailed. 'So let's have a look at how you pounds!' board descended from the ceiling of the studio. On the board were three large one of these doors is one million pounds. Pick the right one, and you're millionaire. Pick the wrong one and you're going home with... 'The audience Bob's catchphrase for him:

Even Angela mouthed it, she knew it so well.

don't want that, do we? So pick a door, Angela, and may luck be with you!' before answering. 'The middle door please, Bob,' she said finally.

repeated Bob. 'Okav! But before we have a look, I'm going to open a door that choose. He opened the door on the far left, revealing a picture of a bus cheered. Angela's heart started beating faster.

'We're going to be nice to you. You've got another choice to make. You your original choice — the middle door — or you can change your decision and right-hand side. Xhat's it to be?'

'Congratulations, Angela! and now you're through Angela was sure that out the sound of her a game show and here 'Stay calm,' she thought 'Okay, Angela,' said Bob, always an element of never missed an episode could win one million A brightly-coloured doors. 'Angela, behind going home today a didn't hesitate to complete

. just your bus fare!'

'That's right! And we


Angela thought carefully 'The middle door!' you were wise not to ticket. The audience 'Now, Angela,' said Bob. can either stick with opt for the door on the

As a mathematician, Angela had come across the very same problem at university. Now, here she was, facing it in real life. She couldn't believe her luck. She knew what not many people know, a fact that seemed to contradict all reason and common sense. She did the maths in her head one more time just to make sure she wasn't mistaken. She wasn't. When she'd picked the first door, she had a one in three chance of being right. Looking at it the other way round, she had a two in three chance of being wrong. Those were not good odds. But one of the wrong doors had now been eliminated, so if she changed her choice to the other possibility, she would double her chances of being right, of winning the million. It seemed impossible, but she knew it was true. 'What are you going to do Angela? Stick with your original choice or switch to the other door?' 'Bob, I'd like to switch, please.'

'Angela's going to switch! Let's get this right, Angela. You now believe — you now hope — the million pounds is behind the right-hand door. Is that correct?' 'The right-hand door, yes,' said Angela weakly.

'Not the middle door?'

'No, not the middle door.'

'What are you going to do if it is actually behind the middle door?' asked Bob.

'Cry, probably!' said Angela. The audience laughed.

'I'm going to open the door you chose, Angela — the right-hand door. Let's hope there isn't a bus ticket behind it. Here we go!'

Time seemed to stand still as Bob outstretched his arm and began to open the door. Angela had never known a feeling like this. Surrounded by so many people, she felt like the only person in the universe. Here was the moment of truth, and she was not sure she could face the consequences, whatever they were.

Test 4

A14      When she got through to the final, Angela couldn't believe that 1) her heart was beating so loudly.

2)   she'd never taken part in a game show before.

3)   the audience were supporting her so much.

4)   her life might be about to change completely.

AIS    The presenter tells Angela that

I) she will need some luck to win the money.

2)   he won't make an exception for her.

3)   her skill will increase the chances of her winning. 4) there is a small chance her skills will be useful.

A16    When the presenter doesn't finish a sentence, it's clear that 1) the audience has already been told what to say.

2)   the presenter is unsure exactly what to say.

3)   the presenter is well known for saying something. 4) Angela had to complete a well-known saying.

A17    When the presenter opens the first door, I) he knows that Angela has won the money.

2)   he doesn't know which door the money is behind.

3)   he knows which door the money is behind. 4) he thinks she has made a bad choice.

A18        Angela 'couldn't believe her luck' that

1)              her education would help her with this decision.

2)              the presenter was giving her an extra chance.

3)              she'd been in the same situation at university. 4) she knew far more facts than most people.

A19       Angela was absolutely certain that

l) the money was behind the right-hand door.

2)   she could increase her chances of winning.

3)   she had an impossible decision to make.

4)   she had to analyse the problem in a different way.

A20      As Bob began to open the right-hand door, Angela felt 1) there were too many people around her.

2)   knowing the truth was the most important thing.

3)   worried by what the future would bring. 4) annoyed by Bob being so slow.

ObPATJ4TE BHMMAHME, Ltmo omeenlbt Ha aaÒaHUH B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaaecuomcH 6 pa.3HblX qacmm• ÕACIHKU. B2, B3 pacnoaoyeHbl 6 HUYHeÚ qacmu õaawca. 17pu nepeHoce omaemoa 6      B2, B3 ÕVK6bl aanucbtߌomcH õe.3 npoõeaoe u .3HŒC06 npt'h111HaHllH.

                            Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTHKa JleKC1,fKa

Tlpoqumaùme mocc•m 3an0JIHume nponycwu 6 npeònoyceHllfLV not) H0Mepa.uu B4-BI 1 coonzeemcmeyougu.uu cþop.uŒuu cat)6, HaneqamaHHbtx aa¿ta6HbL1tu õycaavuu cnpaea om Kaycòoeo npec)J10yceH11f1.

flpoqumaùme PIPIteeC)eHHblli Hil.ye [Ipeoõpaavùme caoea, HaneqamaHHbte aaaaa6HblMU nocae Ho.uepoe B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHU zpa.wuamuqecwu u nexcuqecycu coomaemcmgoeaau coòep.ycamuo meyccma. 3ano.1Hume nponycycu noayqeHHbL8t11 caoga.Mll. Ka.ycÒblÙ nponyc»c coomeemcmeyem omòeJ1bH0,uy aaòamuo 11.3 epynnbl B12-B18.

B12      Many of our TV and film stars also perform in plays in    FAVOUR the theatre from time to time.

B13      They often see it as an opportunity to do some 'real'         ACT despite the fact that theatre work is not usually well paid.

              B14      Giving a live                               is quite different to performing on film, and PERFORM

BIS in many ways is more and risky. DANGER B16 In the theatre, an actor cannot stop and ask the if they DIRECT can do the scene again. The show must go on whatever happens!

B17 Also, the and response of the audience can affect how the BEHAVE actor feels and performs.

However, a major problem for theatre actors is that doing the same show

                 BIS night after night can become                               after a while.                            BORE

Test 4

npoqumaùme mŒccm c nponycwa•tu, OÕ03HaqeHHb1.MU Ho-uepavuu A21-A28. 3mu Ho-uepa coomeemcnwyom aac)aH11HJf A21-A28, 6 KOmOPbLV npeòcmaŒWHb1 60,3.bto.YHb1e eapucmnlbl omaemoe. Oõoeòume Ho-uep BblÕPCIHH020 oa.uu gapuawna omaema.

How was Jackson going to A21  rid of Simon? That was the question that had kept him awake for the previous three nights, and which he pondered as he now walked home from work. It had all started so innocently, as a favour to a friend.

'Could you put me A22  , Jackson?' Simon had asked. 'Just for a couple of nights.'

Jackson of course had said yes, thinking that it would be just for two nights. How wrong he had been.

Now, more than four months on, Simon was still in the flat and there seemed little evidence to suggest he was A23  to leave. The evidence, in fact, pointed to quite the opposite conclusion. Simon seemed to have A24  in so comfortably, Jackson wondered sometimes if it was actually Simon's flat, and he, Jackson, was the one staving there as the guest. Jackson knew he should A25 his feelings clear to Simon — that he valued his own privacy, that he didn't want to live with someone else on a permanent basis, that he felt Simon was abusing his hospitality — but the truth was he was scared. Not scared of how Simon would react physically, but scared that Simon would take offence, and would A26 him of being selfish and not caring about a friend who was in trouble. And Simon was in trouble. With no job, no money and nowhere else to stay, where would Simon go if Jackson A27 him out?

'Mavbe I am being selfish,' Jackson thought, 'but the situation just can't go on like this.'

He made the decision to bring the subject up sometime that evening. 'I won't ask him to leave immediately,' he reasoned. 'That would be unfair, and would put him in a difficult

A28   But I'll explain that the whole arrangement was meant to be temporary, has gone on for a very long time now, and that, while it's been nice having Simon as a flatmate, it just can't go on indefinitely.'

For the rest of the walk home, he rehearsed exactly what he was going to say.


A21                   I) have                     2) get                     3) take                   4) set

A22                  I) in                         2) out                    3) over                 4) up

A23                  1) intending             2) assuming           3) devising            4) conceiving

A24                   l) settled                  2) established         3) launched          4) relaxed

A25                  1) convey                 2) express              3) make                 4) tell

A26                  l) charge                 2) condemn          3) blame              4) accuse

A27                  1) let                        2) sent                    3) threw                4) did

A28                   l) location                 2) position            3) point                 4) site

pa3Hb1.v yacž11H.r õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb1 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu ÕJICIHKa. TIPI/ nepeHoce omeemoa 6 aaðcmunx B4-B18 õYKßb1 aanucbtea»omcR õe.3 npoõeaoe u .3HCIKOß npen11HaH11H.

                                          Pa3neJ1        IIHCbMO

omeemoa Ha 3aÒaHllH CI, C2 ucno.lbayúme WIAHK OTBETOB M2.

õyðym 01ßHueamt.cfl niOJ1bKO no aanucnu, CÒe:1UHHb1Jt e WIÄHKE OTBETOB M2. HUKŒcue aanucu qePH0611,rca He õvòvm .vqumblßanlbt'fl .9Kcnepn10M.

aamuuume C60ù omeem Ecvlll OÒHOÙ cmop0Hbt Õaamca ueòocmamoquo, 6b/ *toyeme ucno.lbaoaanlb òpypyo cmop0HY ã1ClHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.


This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

../can 't wait to come andstay withyou next month. We'regoing £0 have such a lot offun./ what   think the weather     like? what kind afdothes should/ briny with me? How much money / need? Haveyou     interesting things for us to do? Let know! Hope to hearfromyou seen!

Love,

 

Write back to Alex answering his questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many people enjoy watching television. However, some people believe it can be harmful.

What can you say for and against watching television?

         Write 200-250 words.                                                Use the following plan

1.   Introduction (State the problem).

2.   Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.

Bbl non.vuume                                 Komopoù npeòcmaŒWHb1 mpu aaÒaH11f1 ()151 ycn1H020 omeema.•

C3 — me-Itamuqecwoe                                             (3b1c,tca3b1dauue,

C4 — ()IIŒQOP c lge.1b/0 oõ.ueHí1 cþt1K•muqecK0ù umþop.ua«ueù, C5 — c)uav10? c ICJ1b10 ot1Mt'HG' otßHot1HOÙ uncþop.uatgueñl. OKOHtlClHlte (3btnoaHeH11.q KayÒOPO aaðt1H11f1 onpeòeastem BK.3Œuenamop. Bo OPC'Mfl npooeòeHllf1 omoÙ1 qacmu .9K.3a.Mt'HC1 Idòem nocmomqnafl aanucb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

Test 4

                                 Pa3aeJ1        1'0BopeH11e

3aaamaq 3K3aMeHVeMOro

The teacher will play the part of the shop


STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on your favourite subject at school.

Remember to say:

      why it is your favourite subject

      what things you do in a typical lesson in this subject

      what you have learnt by doing this subject

      whether you want to continue studying this subject in the future, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are in a bookshop. You want to buy a book for a friend of yours who is keen on horses. His/her birthday is next week. Your friend already has lots of books about horses, so you want one that's only recently been published. You have only £15 to spend.

Before making a decision, ask the shop assistant about:

                   books about horses available

                   when they were published

                   the price

assistant and will speak first. Remember to:

                   be active and polite

                   get all the information you need  make a decision

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

It's Saturday afternoon. You and your friend are discussing how to spend the evening. You can:

                   watch a DVD or video at home  go to a café

                   go ice skating

                   play computer games

                   listen to music and chat

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

                   discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: first task

A   Look at the task on page 54. You will hear an extract from what each woman says. As you listen, match each speaker to a job.

Speaker I

a saleswoman

Speaker 2

b secretary

Speaker 3

c journalist

Speaker 4

d shopkeeper

Speaker 5

e website designer

B   As a class, discuss what you think each woman's working life is like. Decide which job you would rather do and explain why.

Section 2 Reading: first task

C Match each of the phrases below to another phrase that means something similar.

1 simple meals  

a famous chefs

2 popular cooks

b latest fact

3 safe cooking

c hard work

4 new discovery

d tasty food

5 difficult job

e different routine

6 delicious snacks

f easy dishes

7 changing habits

g hygienic food

Text 4  chefs teach viewers and readers how to cook.

Text 5

You should choose something that is  to prepare for a dinner party.

Text 6

Today, more people  while they


eat.

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: first task

E Read the first text on page 60. For each gap in the text B4-B11, decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F).

1    (134) We need the passive voice.         TI F

2    (B5) We need the past progressive to express a fact about the past.   TIF

3    (B6) We need the simple past because this is an action in the past. TIF

4    (B7) We need a comparative form using -er.   TIF

5    (B8) This is the future in the past, so we need to use would. TIF

6    (B9) We need the past simple to go with since.           TIF

7    (BI O) We need a comparative form using -cr.            TIF

8    (Bll) We need a verb in the plural because cars is plural.        TIF


D Read the six texts on page 56. Complete each of the following sentences with a word or phrase from the text.

Text 1

Researchers  there are actually five tastes.

Text 2

You have to cook meat to kill all the


Text 3

Being a head chef is a real


F Choose the correct word or phrase to complete each sentence. Use the words in bold to help you.

1    Since the start of the 20th century, cars very popular.

A  became B have become C were becoming

2    Cars now are muchthan they used to be.

A  quick B quicker C quickest

3    In 1900, Mr Daimler said that in the future evervonea car.

A  drove B will drive C would drive

4    Driving fast near schools more chance of an accident.

A  mean B means C is meaning

Section 4 Writing: first task

G  Look at the first task on page 62. Imagine you are going to write an answer to Sheryl. Write notes to complete this table. Remember that you don't have to tell the truth.

Do you ever argue with your parents about clothes?

How often?

Is it important to you to be fashionable? Why?

What sort of clothes do you like wearing? Why? 

Should Sheryl wear what her parents tell her to? Why/ why not?

\That other advice do you have for Sheryl?

H 


Decide if the following is a good idea when you are writing an informal letter and circle either 'Do' or 'Don't'.

1   Put your address in the top right corner.    Do 1 Don't

2   Start with Dear Sir or

         Madam,.                                   Do 1 Don't

3   Use short forms (I've, it's, etc) in your writing.     Do 1 Don't

4   Use a friendly tone of voice. Do 1 Don't 5 Finish with Yours sincerely,. Do 1 Don't

6     Finish with Love, or Best wishes,. Do / Don't

7     Write your full name at the end. Do 1 Don't

Section 5 Speaking: second task

I Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 63. Read this extract from a dialogue and find five mistakes. Underline them and write the correct form above the line.


Shop assistant: Good morning. Can I help you?

Student: Good morning. Yes, I hope so. I'd like buy a computer game for my brother. What computer games you have at the moment?

Shop assistant: Well, we've got one called


Fantasy Island.

Student: I see. My brother's nine years old. What Fantasy Island is like?

Shop assistant: It's an adventure game. You

have to solve easy puzzles to find treasure.

Student: Oh, right. He might like that.

And how much it is?

Shop assistant: It's £25.

Student: Oh. I only have £20. What computer games other do you have?


Test 5

                                      Pa3aea        AYAMI)0BaHue

Bbl yc.Qb11uume 5 6blCKC13b16CIHUÙ. Ycmauoaume coon16emcn16ue .ueycðy 6b1CKa.3b1ßt1HUfLJtu Kaycðoeo 2060Pflt«eeo I — 5 u yrnaep.ycòehtumtu, ()aHHbLUU 6 cnucvce A — F. Mcno.1b3Yùme Ka.ycðyo õYK6Y, ymæp.ycòehllte, ntW1bKO oat"' pa.3. B Jar)ar-tuu ecntb oðrto atttU1tee ytneepyòe,'tue. Bbl yc-lbltuume aanucb ðeayòbl. 3anecume C60U omaembl B maãQ1d10'.

A.      Her job gives her the chance to meet people.

B.      She thinks she should be paid more for the work she does. C. Her job doesn't leave her with much free time.

D.      She's thinking of trying to find a completely different job.

E.       She doesn't have a good relationship with the people she works with.

F.       She has to travel a lot for her job.

IòBopqLIÅMf1

1

                 2                   3                    4

5

 

YTBepxneHJ1e

 

 

 

Bbl ycalbltuume pa.3zoaop noauueùc»coeo co ceuðemeae.u npecmynaeHlffl. Onpeòeaume, Kcocue 11.3 npuaeòëHHbLt ymgepycòektuù Al-A6 coomeemcmeyom coòepycamuo merccma (I ), RC11CUe He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o         6 meKcme He cya.3CIHO, mo ec•mb Ha ocwoaanuu maccma HC'Ab3fl

c)amb Hil noaoycumeulb,qoeo,            omeema (3). C)õ6eòume HOMep 6blÕPCIHHOZO aa.M11 eapuawna omaema. Bbl ycvlblluume .3anucb Òga.ycÒb1.

        Al    The crime took place at 4 pm.

                               l) BepHO                2) HeBepH0               3) B •reKCTe He CKa3ŽlHO

        A2    The witness called the police on her mobile.

                               1) BepH0               2) HeBepHO                 3) B -reKc-re He cKagaH0

        A3     The witness tried to stop the thief from escaping.

                                l) BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKc-re He cKt13t1H0

        A4    The witness knew who the thief was.

                              1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3) B -reKcere He cKagaH0

        AS     The thief was carrying a torch.

                                1) BePHO                 2) HeBepH0                 3) B TC'KCTe He Ck•a3žlHO

        A6  The police arrived a quarter of an hour after the crime was committed.

                               1) BepHO               2) HeBepH0               3) B TeKCTe He CKt13aHO

 

Test 5 a

Bbl ycalbltuume 6btCKa3b16t1H11$1 -woðeùl 6 ce.uu paaaut1Hbtx cumvtll!llfl-r. Omeemwne Ha eonpocbl no coòep,ycamno BblCR•a3b1ßCIHUÙ, Bblõpaa oò11H 113 npeòA0Yt'HHbtr Bapuawno,g omeema. B

A7-A13 oõaeðume Igucþpy I, 2 3, omeeng KOHIOPblÙ 6Œ'vt Kaycemcfl Hauõoaee Bbl yc.lblluume KaycÒoe 6blCxa,3b16ú'HUC' Ò6aycÒbl.

 

    You will hear a man talking about mobile phones. How does he feel about them?

1)   He thinks they are unnecessary.

2)   He thinks they are annoying.

A8

You will hear a man talking about a magazine. Why does he like it?

I) It often has interesting interviews.

2) It explains how to do things. 3) It comes with a free CD.

You will hear a woman talking about a wedding. What went wrong?

1)    Some of the guests got lost.

2)    Some guests didn't receive invitations.

3)    Some people arrived who hadn't been invited.

AIO

You will hear a girl talking about learning to drive. How does she feel about it?

1)   She is nervous about taking the driving test.

2)   She has problems remembering where to go. 3) She finds some things very confusrng.

All

You will hear an advertisement for a new game. How do you win?

1)   by answering questions correctly

2)   by making other people laugh

3)   by collecting the most cards

A12

You will hear a woman talking about her brother. What does she say about him?

1)   He never comes to visit her.

2)   He never listens to her.

3)   He never invites her to stay.

A13

You will hear a woman talking about her local park. How does she feel about it?

3)   He thinks they cause accidents.

1)    She thinks it is attractive.

2)    She thinks it is untidy.

3)    She thinks it is dangerous.

110 Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTn CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, teno omeembl Ita aac)aH11H BI, Al-A13 pacnoaaewomcfl 6 pa.3Hb1.r qacmqx t5J1aH}€a. BI pacnono.yceH0 6 HilYCHeÙ qacmu õ.nawca. flpu nepeHoce ome,emoe 6 aaòaH1411 BI õYK6bl aanucb16ŒomcH õea npoõeJ106 u .3HCIK06 npet111HüH1ffl.

                                         Pa3neJ1          LITeHne

ycmaH06ume coomeemcmeue me-M A — G meR•cmaM 1 — 6. 3aHecume ceou omeembl 6 maõ.au«y. Mcnoabayùme Kaycðyo õYKßY mŒ1bKO oðuH pa.3. B aaðaHuu oma me.ua JIUUIHSISI.

A. SIMPLE MEALS B. POPULAR COOKS

c. SAFE COOKING D. NEW DISCOVERY

E.      DIFFICULT JOB

F.       DELICIOUS SNACKS G. CHANGING HABITS

Tesla

2

3

              4          

6

I

2

3

4

We're all used to the lemons), salty (like salt, tongue react to a fifth sauce, mushrooms and One thing you have to with white meats like fork to test whether the careful when preparing is that we don't want killed when we cook

Running a busy restaurant businessman. With so chef has to make sure great food without can do it.

Walk into any bookshop cooking and for teaching from the very friendly


idea that there are simply four tastes. Our food can be sweet (like sugar), sour (like of course) and bitter (like olives). Now scientists have found that parts of the taste, which they call 'umami'. Umami is quite a rich taste, found in red meat, soy hard cheese, such as Parmesan. "lhe word •umami' comes from Japanese.

remember is that meat can contain bacteria. You have to be particularly careful chicken and pork, Make sure that you cook them properly. Use a metal skewer or a meat is done or not. The juices from the meat should be clear. You should also be food. Use separate chopping boards for meat and vegetables. The reason for this any bacteria from the meat to find their way onto our vegetables. They might not be the vegetables.

is a real challenge. A head chef has to be part army officer, part artist and part many people working in a busy kitchen, it's not easv to keep control and a head that everyone does their job properly. At the same time, he or she has to create wasting ingredients. It takes years of training to become a head chef and not everyone

or turn on your TV and you can't avoid celebrity chefs. They are famous for the nation how to cook. They each have their own style and their own fans, style of Jamie Oliver to the more formal style of Delia Smith. However, they all have one thing in common: they are all very good at communicating their enthusiasm for food and for

5

6

cooking.

The thought of cooking for friends at home makes most of us a little nervous. It needn't be such a nightmare, though. The secret is planning. If you keep your menu simple and stick to dishes you know well, your dinner party will be a success. Give your guests something that is easy to prepare and that doesn't mean you have to be in the kitchen all the time. That way, you can enjoy the occasion too!

Traditionally, eating was something that we all did together as families. In the past, most parents insisted that the whole family sat around the dining table at a certain time. All that has changed. These days, we're more likely to watch TV while we eat, or to eat at different times from the other members of our family. In a world where it's so easy to cook a microwave meal in seconds and both parents go out to work, it's very rare for families to share their news over a good meal.

Tlpoqumaùme ymßepycòeHllH 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HILUU meyccmbl. YcmaH06tune coomeemcmgue .ueycòy ymaepycòeHlfflM11 u coðepycaHue,vt meccmoe. Hanutuume tgucþpy 1 — ecau yn16epycðeHlŒ eepnoe, u tgutþpy O — ecau ymeepycòeHue Iteaepnoe. .3cmecume ['6011 omeembl e maauucv.


I

2

3     silent

4     Stan for

5     Stan both

6

Chaplin 's first performance teas in America.

Chaplin made the first full-length comedy film.

Chaplin stopped making films in the late

1920„

Laurel was famous appearing with Charlie Chaplin.

Laurel's Parents appeared on stage.

Laurel and Hardy became famous for acting together in the early 1920s.

Charlie Chaplin was the greatest comedian of his generation, and probably of all time. He was born in 1889 in England, where he first appeared on stage at the age of five. He travelled to America in 1912 and stayed to work for the Kevstone Film Company. Films in those days were silent, so actors had to find characters that could be recognised immediately on the screen. Chaplin's great character was the little tramp, who appeared in around 70 short films, as well as a number of feature-length comedies. In fact, Chaplin was the first comedian to make a full-length comedy, Tillie's Punctured Romance (1914).

Talking films began to appear in the late 1920s, but Chaplin continued to make silent films until the mid 30s. He was unusual because he not only starred in his films but also wrote, directed and produced them. He even wrote the music for some of his later films. He will long be remembered for bringing enjoyment to millions throughout the world.

Xhen Charlie Chaplin went over to America, there was another comedian on the same boat — Stan Laurel, who was to become famous as one half of Laurel and Hardy. Stan was born in 1890. His mother was an actress, while his father managed a number of theatres. His family moved around during his childhood and he spent some time living with his grandparents. He learned a lot from watching the comedians who performed at the theatres run by his father.

1

2

3

4

5

6

 

Stan first appeared in a film with Oliver Hardy in 1921, but their fame as a double act didn't begin until 1927. They starred together in dozens of films over the next 30 years until Oliver's death in 1957. Even today, their films bring pleasure to young and old alike.


Ilpoqumaùme macc:m u 6btn0JlHume ,3aÒaHllfl A14-A20, oõ60Òfl Igucþpy 1, 2, 3 unu 4, coomgemcmeyougyo HOJtepv 6blt5pctHHO?O (3Œ1tu eapuamna omaema.

quite as Lazlo had expected. He'd been in London for six months had almost disappeared. None of the galleries were interested

Things weren't working out now and all his early optimism in his paintings and he was tired of carrying the same pictures from one buyer to the next. The response was always the same: a shake of the head, some comment about portraits not being fashionable these days and a suggestion to try somewhere else, usually somewhere he had already tried. He was beginning to lose hope and was thinking of going back home. It would be difficult, and he would have to face his parents saying 'I told you so', but at least he could find a steady job.


He was sitting on a bench in a park one day considering this when he noticed a newspaper beside him. He glanced at it and the word 'artist' caught his eye. He picked the paper up and read more closely. It was a job advertisement. An advertising company was looking for a portrait artist to work on a new advertising campaign. Lazlo ripped the advertisement out of the paper and started to look for a public phone. 'I won't be able to choose my subjects,' Lazlo thought to himself, 'but at least I'll be able to pay the rent, and that's a bit more important right now.' He spotted a phone, put a few coins in and dialled. After a few moments, a female voice answered. Lazlo explained who he was and that he was applying for the job. They arranged for him to go to their office the next day with some of his work. He went home excited and nervous.

That night, he chose three paintings from the dozens in his flat that he thought showed what he was capable of. He selected a self-portrait he had done a few years before; he thought it showed a thoughtful side to his work. He also chose a portrait of an old man that he had met in a café. It was simple but clear, and Lazlo thought that maybe that was the style they would want for an advertising campaign. The third one was a painting of his mother. It had always seemed to him that that picture captured a lot of feeling that was difficult to put into words. A lot of people thought it was the best portrait he had ever done, and Lazlo knew that if anything was going to impress them, that painting would.

The next morning, he woke early and got ready. He rolled the pictures up, placed them in a large tube so that they wouldn't get damaged and set off towards the bus stop. There was a lot of traffic, but he arrived on time. When he got to the office, he saw that another four people were waiting, each with a large tube of paintings just like his. The secretary asked him to take a seat.

Lazlo sat and waited for his name to be called. He knew that a lot depended on the next half an hour or so. With a job, he could begin to sort out his life, maybe doing his art in his spare time. He knew he would never completely give up on his dream, but he had also come to realise that he had to live in the real world, and talent doesn't pay bills. Without a job, he wouldn't survive the month; he had just about enough for the ticket home. The secretary picked up the phone and had a short, quiet conversation. She turned to Lazlo. 'You can go in now,' she said, smiling.

A14

When Lazlo first arrives in London, he I) immediately loses his job.

2)   is confident of success.

3)   doesn't expect to stay for six months.

4)   knows that he will have to work hard.

A15

The people at the art galleries Lazlo visits I) are very impressed by his work.

2)                 often give him helpful advice.

3)                 ask him to come back with different paintings. 4) tell him that his work is old-fashioned.

A16

It seems that Lazlo's parents

I) disapprove of his choice of career.

2)   forced Lazlo into becoming an artist.

3)   will be happy to welcome him home.

4)   can help him to achieve his ambitions.

Al 7

Lazlo thinks the job will

1)               give him more artistic freedom.

2)               provide him with a salary.

3)               mean that he has to move house. 4) stop him from studying.

AIS

Lazlo chooses to take the portrait of his mother because 1) it was the third one he thought of.

2)                 it was used in an advertisement before.

3)                 the people at the company ask to see it. 4) it expresses emotion well.

A19

At the office, Lazlo realises that

1)                 his paintings are the same as everyone else's.

2)                 he isn't the only person interested in the job.

3)                 he should have chosen different paintings. 4) he has come at the wrong time.

A20

One of the things Lazlo's experience has taught him is that

I) he needs money to live.

2)                      art is more important than money.

Test 5

3)                      following your dream is a waste of time. 4) he has no artistic talent.

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, 'Imo omeembt Ha aaòaH11f1 B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaapcuomcH 6 pae3Hb1X qacmnr ÕaaHKa. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1 6 HUYCHeÚ qacmu õaamca. [Ipu nepeHoce omaemoo

                         Pa3aeJ1          rpaMMaT1dKa JleKC11Ka

Ilpoqumaùme mt'Kcm 3anov1H11me nponycxu 6 npeðaoycenuzr noò HO-vtepauu B4-B11  cþop.$ta.ltll ca10ß, naneqamaHHb1.r aaua6Hb1.uu cnpaea om KaycÒoeo npeòaoycenua.

Test 5

The Automobile

 

Cars are a common sight on roads today, but that wasn't always true.

 

B4

Back in the days before the car         , the only personal means of transport were the horse and the bicycle.

INVENT

 

The first cars their power from steam and gas, and had a maximum speed of around nine miles an hour.

GET

 

In Britain, there was a law     cars from going over two miles an hour in towns.

At the end of the nineteenth century, cars started to use petrol and

STOP

 

became much                             than they had been.

FAST

B8

Very few people at that time said that cars the world in the future.

That is exactly what has happened, though, and since then

CHANGE

B9

we                             close to eighteen million miles of roads on the Earth.

BUILD

BIO

Perhaps the     sign of the success of the car is the fact that there are over 800 million of them in the world.

BIG

Bll

However, having more cars on the road more pollution, and that's a major worry for many people.

MEAN

[Ipoqumaùme npugeÒeHHblñ Hityce meKcm [Ipeoõpaayùme calt)ßtl, HaneqamaHHb1e .3C1&1ClßHbLUll Õ_YK6a.Mll nocae HOMePOß B12-B18 maK, qmoõbt OHU epa-u.uamuqecwu 11 nelCCUqeCKU coomgemcmeogaau coòepycaH1110 maccma. 3anoaHume nponycK11 no./1VtWHHbLU11 caoea.uu. Kaycòblù nponycK coomaemcmeyem omðea1bH0Jty      113 epynnbl 1312-1318.

Llpoqumaùme meRcm c nponycKŒuu, OÕ03HatWHHbLU11 HO.uepa.uu A21-Ä28. 3mu H0Mepa coomøemcme,yom .gar)anumt A21-A28, 6 KOHIOPbL'C npeðcmaeaeHbt 60.3MOYCHbte capuamnbl on16emot3. Oõeeòume Ho-Mep 6blÕpaHHO?0 6Œuu 6apuamna omoema.

Advertisers and others Interested in the make-up of society occasionally use the term 'Generation to describe a certain section of the population. There is no strict definition for the term, but it A21  to those people born between 1964 and 1981. This is the generation parents were born at the end of or A22  the Second World War.

In America and Europe, the 1960s was a decade of big dreams. People believed that they could change the world for the better and that global problems could be solved through understanding belief in peace. However, during the 1970s many people began to realise that things were much complicated than that. Children A23  up in the 70s and 80s saw that their ideals had failed. Divorce rates rose rapidly and many Generation Xers experienced the splitting their family. They blamed their parents for industrial, social and economic problems and had no of their own to rely on.

Of course, this image of a Generation Xer is a stereotype. Not all people born into that generation the same. However, it does seem possible to pick out a few characteristics that people born between those years might A24  One is a certain A25  to work. Generation Xers are likely to have spent some time doing a low-paid job, such as working in a food restaurant, and may have had a number of different jobs. They probably prefer to work on own from home or take a risk and A26  up their own business, rather than a large company.

They are more likely to A27  divorced, although they are also more likely to that they A28  marriage seriously. Generation Xers are likely to be cynical comes to politics. Generation X is also the generation that has seen technology become a big part their lives and they are likely to be quite comfortable with using computers and the Internet.

X' usually whose

and a more parents' up of ideals

are


fast their work for

say it of

                       1) discusses             2) refers                 3) mentions           4) means

                        1) during                 2) between            3) while                 4) whenever

                       1) growing               2) turning               3) bringing           4) getting

                       1) own                     2) belong               3) share                 4) do

                       1) behaviour            2) attitude              3) mood                4) impression

                       1) put                       2) do                      3) make                 4) set

                       1) turn                    2) come                 3) get                    4) go

                       1) have                     2) take                    3) bring                 4) hold

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE 17EPEHECTn CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, timo omeembl Ha 3aÒaH11f1 B4-B18 u B

PCI.3HbLr Ltacmqr õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb16 HltYCHeð1 qucmu ÕacžHKa. TIPI/ nepeHoce ont6em06 6     B4-B18 õYK6bt .3anucb16Œomcn õea npoõe.106 u ,3HZIK06 npen11HaH11f1.

J-l.aa omcemoe Ha aar)tlH1151 CT, C2 ucno.lb.3yñyne Fx7AHK OTBETOB .Nþ2.

Tlpu ßb1noanenuu aaòauuù CI u C2 ocoõoe OHIL',tanue oõpamume HO' mo, timo ($CIIUU omaembl õvðym moabK0 no aanucnu, CðeACIHHbLU e WIAHKE OTBETOB aanucu qepH061Œa He õvòvm yqunlbloanu.cn .9Kcnepmo.u.

aanutuume caoù omoem Ec„lll OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1     HeÒocmamotlH0, Bbl vuoyeme ucnoab306amb ()pveyo cmopouy õaamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from Sheryl, your English pen friend.

Test

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many students go on school trips. Some people say they are interesting and educational. Other people say that they are a waste of time and children should learn in the classroom.

What can you say for and against school trips? Use the following plan

Write 200-250 words.                                                I. Introduction (State the problem).

2.   Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.


Pa3aeJ1      1'0BopeHne

Bbl noayqume Kapmoqrcy, Ha ycomopoù npeòcmaeaeHbl mpu 3CIÒaHt1f1 ycmH0?0 omaema:

C3 — me-Itamuqecvcoe  (3b1Cxa3b1ßanue,

C4 — ()11Œ10? c lge.Rb'0 oõ.ueHa cþcncmuqecyoú llHCþop.§tažgueÚ, C5 — c)uaaoz c lge.lb10

OIVHOLIHOÙ LIHCþopJta«ueù. ()K0Hqcmue 61.1/10JIHeHUf1 KaycÒO?0 3aÒaH11f1 onpeòeanem .9Raa.ueHamop. Bo 6PeMfl npooeòeHllfl .ynoù qacmu .9R•aa.ueHa llòem nocmOHHHCIH aanucb Ha ayòuc»caccemy.


3aaaHH¶

STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on sport. Remember to say:

      which sports are popular in your country

      which sport is your favourite to watch, and why

      who your favourite sportsmen/women are

      which sports you enjoy playing, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are in a computer shop. You would like to buy a computer game for your younger brother, who is nine years old. You can pay £20 only.

Before making a decision, ask the shop assistant about:

              computer games on sale at the moment

              what the games are like  the cost

Test 5

3K3aMeHveMoro

The teacher will play the part of the shop assistant and will speak first. Remember to:

              be active and polite

              get all the information you need

              decide on the computer game to buy

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You have a friend called Peter and it is his birthday soon. You and another friend are planning a surprise evening out for his birthdav. You can go:

              to a fast food restaurant  to a swimming pool

              to a funfair

              to watch a football match

              to a concert

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

 discuss all the options

              take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons

              find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

O

Section 1 Listening: second task

A    Listen to these extracts from the second task on page 66 and circle the

phrase you hear.

1 £95 / £9.50 2 £7.50 £75

3

4       11 am / I l pm

5       14th / 4th

6

B     Listen again and match each extract to a word or phrase.

6       LONGER HOLIDAYS

fun,

7       FOOD INCLUDED meal,


D In pairs or as a group, discuss the words and phrases you wrote down. If someone makes a sensible suggestion that you haven't already got, add it to the list above.

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: first task

     1                                 a per night

 

     2                                 b per hour

       I (B4) Can we say:        . a parrot on him

     3                               c double room

         shoulder'?                                       yes I no

     4                                d floor

2 (B5) What tense is 'doesn't he'?

     5                                e breakfast

present simple I past simple

     6                                 f single room

3 (B6) Which tense often comes before 'for'

+ a period of time?

present simple I present perfect

Section 2 Reading: first task

4 (B7) Which tense do we need here?

C Look at these headings for different

present simple generally) I

texts. For each heading, write two or

present progressive at the moment)

three words and phrases that you would text.

5 (B8) Is 'carry' the main verb of the

E Read the first task on page 72 and answer these questions for each item B4-B11.


expect to appear in the

1     LIGHTER SUITCASES

bays,

2     BUYING TICKETS money,

3     FAST-MOVING TRANSPORT

    sentence?                                        yes I no

6      (139) Can we say: 'steal them bags and

    money .                                          yes I no

7      (BIO) What do we need here?


active voice I passive voice

8 (BII) Which tense often comes before 'in


journey, recent years'?

4     TRANSPORT CHOICES

past simple I present perfect bus,

5     AEROPLANE EXERCISES

flight,

Section 4 Writing: second task

3

Animals should have the right to live where they want.

F Look at the second task on page 74.

4

It's cruel to take an animal off the streets

Decide if the following is a point for (F) or against (A) allowing stray animals to

 

and then possibly put it down.        

live on the streets. Write F or A on the

5

There are lots of people who would be

line provided.

 

glad to give a stray animal a home.

1 Stray dogs sometimes bite people.

6

People's pets might be taken by mistake and that could be a tragedy.

2 Cats and dogs can receive medical


treatment if they are taken    G Discuss which of the statements above off the streets.

you agree or disagree with. Explain why.

Section 5 Speaking: third task

H Look at the Student Card for Task 3 on page 75 and make notes to complete the information.

PET

reasons for choosing this pet

reasons for not choosing this pet

cat

cats are veyy warm andfriendly

dog

hamster

rabbit

goldfish

O

                                      Pa3neJ1        AYAH1)0BaHne

Bbl ycabltuume 5 6blCKa.3bl(3CIHUÙ. YcmaH06ume coomoemcnwue .ueycðy 6b1CKa3bldClHU$LUU Kayòoeo eoaopnugeeo I — 5 u ymaepycðeuunuu, ()CIHHbLUU 6 cnucxe A — F. Mcnoabayùme lc•aycðyo t5YK6Y, oõoauattapougy,'0 .vmaepycðeuue, oðu,'t paa. B aaòauuu ecntb oðuo auzunee ymaep.w•ðenue. Bbl ycablluume aanucb c)oa.wòbl. .3aHecume ('601/ on16en1b1 6 matîautgy.

A. She would like to get less homework. B. She enjoys taking tests.

C. She has recently moved to a new school. D. She thinks some lessons are too long. E. She's had several tests today at school. F. She wants to be a teacher.

                          1

2

3

4

5

 

Y'1'Bepx;teH11e

 

 

Bbl yc.,Qb1tuume paaeoeop aòuuuucmpamopa c npuõbldtueù 6 omealb eocmbeù. Onpeòeaume, KCIKUC' 11.3 npugeòëHHbtr ymaepycòeH11ù Al-A6 coon16emcmeyom coòepyamuo mexcma (I KCIK11e He coomeemcmayom (2) u o         6 meKt•me He cyaaauo, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aH11U meKcma neat..3f1 ()amb HI/ noaoycumeAbHO?O, Hll omputgameab,qopo omaema (3). Oõaeòume H0.uep aa.$fll aapuawna omeema. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb ()eayðbl.

          Al     Mrs Torino's husband is on business abroad.

                                 I) BepHO                  2) HeBepH0                  3) B "reK'CTe He Ck'a3ŽiHO

         A2    Mrs Torino can have a single room for the three nights.

                                 I) BepH0               2) HeBepHO                3) B rreKc-re He CKagaHO

         A3    A double room is £20 more expensive per night than a single room.

                                I) BepHO                2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKc•re He cK'd3'dH0

         A4    Mrs Torino will move into her new room tomorrow evening.

                                 I) BepH0               2) HCBepHO               3) B •reKCTe He CKti3aH0

         A5    Mrs Torino is expecting an e-mail from her husband.

                                1) BepH0             2) HeBepH0           3) B TeKCTe He CK'd3ttHO

         A6    Mrs Torino decides to go to an Internet café instead.

                                 I) BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKa3tiHO

66

Test 6

Bbl yc:lbltuume paaeoaop peyuccepa c epynnoú cm-mep06. B .4 7-A13 oõ6eòume I'lltþpy 1, 2 ILQII 3, coomeemcmgyoucyo 6b1ÕPCIHHOMY ea.M11 eapuawny omeema. Bbl ycabltuume KG'YÒoe 6b1CKa.3b1ßUH1te ðaaycÒb1.

A7       The director says they are going to

I) decide what part each actor will play.

2)   hand out the scripts.

3)   read through the play.

A8          There will be

I) regular rehearsals at the weekend.

2) rehearsals on one weekend only. 3) no rehearsals at the weekend.

A9     The director will call or e-mail actors to tell them I) they are not needed for rehearsals.

2)   which actor is in which scene.

3)   what time each rehearsal starts.

9810    The director hopes rehearsals will finish

l) before 10 pm.

2)   after 10 pm.

3)   at 10.30 pm.

Before making or buying a costume, the director wants the actors to

l) talk to the costume designer. 2) decide exactly what they want. 3) discuss their ideas with her.

!A12    The director encourages the actors to

1)  spend their own money on buying a costume.

2)  stay within the budget that he has given them. 3) find a way to increase the small budget.

IA13 Brian, the actor, says that

I) the actors should share their budgets.

2) all the actors should make their own costumes. 3) none of the costumes will cost anything.

110                                                      Bl u Al-A13 HE 34bYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM

OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB

ObPATMTE BHMMAIIME, teno omaembl Ha aac)aH1ffi BI, Al-A13 pacnonaecuomcn pa.3HbLr qacm.nr ãaamca. BI pacnoaoyceno 6 Hil.YCHeÙ qacmu tîaawca. Tlpu nepeHoce 0/11601106 6 3CIÒaHUU

BI õYK6bl aanucblowomcfl õea npoõeaoe u 3,qaK06

67

                                           Pa3neJ1        Llrrerme

   Ycmtmoaume coomaemc:moue         A — G mcwcma.u I — 6. 3auecume

Mcn0J1b3.vùme RZ1.ycÒV/0 õYRßV mŒ1bK0 oòun paa. B .3aÒanuu oÒna me.ua

omeembl (3 maõau«y.

A.      LIGHTER SUITCASES

B.      BUYING TICKETS

C.      FAST-MOVING TRANSPORT

D.      TRANSPORT CHOICES

E.       AEROPLANE EXERCISES

F.       LONGER HOLIDAYS G. FOOD INCLUDED

I Package holidays, which include flights and hotel accommodation in the same booking, have been popular for several decades. Recently, however, a new type of package holiday has been introduced: the 'all-inclusive' package. Manv holidavmakers, particularly those with families or those on a limited budget, are attracted bv all-inclusive holidays. This is because all meals, drinks and snacks such as ice creams, as well as flights and accommodation, are included in the price.

2      The Isles of Scilly, off the south-west coast of Cornwall in the UK, are a popular tourist destination. Many of the visitors to the islands arrive in their own boats, either from Cornwall or from the north coast of France. Those without a boat have a range of options for getting there. There are daily flights from Plymouth and Newquay airports, and a helicopter flies several times a day from Penzance. The ferry Scillonian 111 is also based in Penzance, sailing to the islands once a day, and twice on Sundays.

3      If you're going on a trip and are unsure what and how much to pack, follow this simple rule. Get everything that you could possibly want to take with you ready. Then, when you've made a big pile, put half of it back. Be strict with yourselfl People always take too much with them when they travel — clothes they won't wear, toiletries they won't use. Carrying heavy bags is never fun, so don't take too much with you!

4      Bicycles are not just used for recreation. In Britain, thousands of postmen and women deliver the mail each dav bv bike as it's much quicker than walking. In towns and cities with traffic problems, such as Los Angeles in the USA, a bike is often the quickest way for a police officer to move around. In India, bicycles are often used to deliver lunch to shop and office workers. At large airports in Germany, it's quite common to see airport workers riding around on bikes.

5      On long flights, it's important not to sit still for too long, as this can be bad for your health. A good exercise for your hands is to squeeze a tennis ball — or even a pair of socks if you haven't got a tennis ball — ten or fifteen times. For vour feet, take your shoes off and put your feet on the floor. Raise your toes as high as possible and hold them there for about five seconds. Repeat the exercise until your toes get tired.

6      Not long ago, if you wanted to book a plane ticket or a package holiday, you had no choice — you had to go to a travel agent's. The Internet has changed that, however, and now flights and trips can be booked in the comfort of your own home. It's often cheaper, quicker and more convenient to book tickets online, but you do need a credit card. If you want to pay by cash or cheque, you still have to make that visit to the high street.

rrewra

TeMa

1

2

3

4

5

6

Test 6

Ilpoqumaúme ymaepycòeH11f1 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HUMU moccmbl. Ycmt1H0611me

Mt'9/còy .vmeepyòenumtll u coòep.ycauue„u mewmoo. Hanutuume Illitþpy 1 — ecuttl .vnlßepycòeuue eepuoe, u «ucþpy O — ecau .vmeepycðeuue Heeepnoe. 3auecume ce,ou  matluugy.

1     The hamburger got its name from one of its ingredients.

2     Roast pork sandwiches were eaten in Hamburg for the first time a hundred years ago.

3     Charlie Nagreen changed the shape of the meatballs to make them more popular.

4     know why Charlie Nagreen decided to call them 'hamburgers'.

5     Many people believe that eating sushi means eating raw fish.

6     Modern-day sushi was introduced approximately two hundred years ago.

Hamburgers are one of the most popular kinds of fast food in the world todav. The name, however, can be misleading, as the burger in a hamburger is not made of ham. It is beef.

Although the name 'hamburger' almost certainly comes from the town Hamburg in Germany, the history of the hamburger is unclear.

There was a popular dish in Hamburg several hundred years ago which was basically a roast pork sandwich. It is possible that, in time, that became the hamburger as we know it today.

However, the town of Seymour in Wisconsin in the USA is just one of several other places that claim to have created the     hamburger. Their story goes back to 1885, when a man called Charlie Nagreen tried to sell meatballs at a county fair. They weren't popular, though, as customers had difficulty eating them while walking. Nagreen came up with the idea of flattening out the meatballs and putting them in a bread roll.

He called this meat sandwich a 'hamburger'. Why he chose that name is unclear, and it seems likely that he was not actually the first to use it.

Many large towns and cities in Europe and the USA have at least one sushi restaurant, but what exactly is sushi? A widelyheld belief is that it is a type of Japanese cuisine that involves raw fish. Certainly, if you go to a sushi restaurant, you are likely to eat some raw fish.

In fact, however, sushi is a number of different dishes all made with a certain type of rice. The rice has a topping or filling with it which may be raw fish, but could also be cooked fish, vegetables or egg.

Food similar to sushi has been eaten in Japan for centuries, but sushi as it's eaten today was developed bv Hanaya Yohei in Tokyo, Japan in the early 1800s. It was designed to be a type of fast food that could be eaten at the theatre or in the street.

1

2

3

4

5

6

69


Test 6

Tlpoqumaùme moccm u 61.1/10-uume ,3aòaH11f1 A14-Ä20,         Igucþpy 1, 2, 3 ILIU 4, coonwemcnl(ñ'lotqyo no.vtepy 6blÕPCIHHO?O aa-UU gapuanma omeema.

Sean had never felt so nervous before in his life. Sitting alone outside the closed door, he suddenly realised he was physically shaking, 'This is ridiculous,' he thought to himself. 'Pull yourself together. You've got to stay calm.'

This was easier said than done, and when a middle-aged woman in a smart business suit opened the door and asked, 'Sean Perkins?', there was a definite tremor of fear and weakness in his voice as he answered that that was indeed him. 'Hello, I'm Katie Sutherland. Do come in.'

Sean was invited into a comfortable and spacious office. The walk from the door to the chair he was to sit on seemed to last a lifetime, and Sean was terrified with each step that he'd suddenly trip or stumble. How could something so simple as walking and sitting down be so difficult?

As the interview progressed, however, Sean slowly began to relax. If he'd had time to think about it, he would have realised he was answering the questions put to him quite well. He was giving clear, full answers without saying too much or anvthing irrelevant. Then came a question which, at first, he was uncertain how to answer.

'So, tell me, why do you want to leave your current job?'

Sean hesitated. Should he tell her the truth? This was, of course, that he didn't feel respected. His boss, Mr Dominguez, took him for granted, overworked him, was often rude, patronising and unpleasant and made him dread going in to work each morning. Sean decided a more positive response was called for.

'Well,' he said, 'I've been with Brookes Brothers for over four years now, and although I've learned a lot there, and I'm very grateful for the opportunities they've given me, I think it's time for some new challenges, and this seems the ideal company to provide them. From what I've seen, Fisher & Fisher is an extremely dynamic company, and I'd like to be a part of that. I really think I could help contribute to the company's future success.'

Sean was pleased with his answer and knew he'd been right not to criticise his current employer. From Katie Sutherland's expression, it seemed she was satisfied with his answer too. Her next question prompted Sean to smile. 'What would you say were your biggest weaknesses, Sean?'

He'd thought he might be asked this, and so had already rehearsed an answer. He didn't want it to sound rehearsed, though, so he purposefully hesitated slightly before answering. 'That's a tricky question, isn't it?' he said. 'In fact, I think we both know it's a bit of a trick question too, because if I give a list of serious weaknesses, you won't think I'm suitable for the job, and if I say I haven't got any, you'll think I'm arrogant and over-confident. So, in answer to your question, I'd have to say that one of my biggest weaknesses is not bemg able to talk about mvself in too negative a light, even when I know I'm not perfect. For any other weaknesses I've got, you might be better off asking my current employer, Mr Dominguez.'

His answer was a risk, but he knew that if he said it in a fairly light-hearted manner, he could probably get awav with it. From Katie's response, it was clear that he had. 'Yes,' she said, 'it is a bit of a silly question, isn't it? You'd be amazed what some people say when I ask it, though.

It can tell me a lot. I'm glad you didn't fall into that trap.'

This was the first clearly positive comment that Katie had made on his interview so far, and filled Sean both with joy and hope. Perhaps he really was in with a chance of getting this job. Perhaps he would be able to put Mr Dominguez and Brookes Brothers behind him once and for all.

Test 6

A14    Waiting outside for the interview, Sean realises that

1)   his shaking must look totally ridiculous.

2)   staying calm is not difficult to do.

3)   he has to take control of his emotions.

4) it's the first time he's ever been nervous.

When Sean enters the office, he

1)   wishes the chair he has to sit on is nearer the door.

2)   takes too long to walk from the door to the chair.

3)   almost trips over the chair he is supposed to sit on.

4)   tries to get to the chair without doing anything foolish.

316 The answers Sean gives to the questions he is asked

l) do not contain unnecessary information.

2)   show he knows he is doing quite well.

3)   are a little longer than they should be. 4) show he is often unsure what to say.

'317    Sean feels that the question about why he wants to leave his current job

1)   deserves a totally truthful answer.

2)   should not be answered in a negative way.

3)   was not asked in a respectful way.

4)   is an impossible question to answer.

'318    Sean's answer to the question about why he wants to leave his current job implies that

I) he is not at all happy with the way he is treated at Brookes Brothers.

2)   Fisher & Fisher will be more successful in the future than Brookes Brothers.

3)   both he and Fisher & Fisher could benefit from him joining the company.

4)   the work at Fisher & Fisher will be much more difficult than his current work.

Á19    Sean is careful to hide from Katie Sutherland the fact that he

l) has practised giving an answer. 2) has a lot of serious weaknesses.

3) thinks he doesn't have any weaknesses. 4) knows she is trying to trick him.

320 Katie suggests that she asks the 'silly question' because

l) she's always amazed by the answers she gets. 2) she wants the people answering to feel trapped.

3)  people usually give long answers to that question.

4)  the answers people give can reveal things about them.

no OKOHqaHUU B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ha B2, B3 u A14-A20 paaHbLr uacmax tî1ClH}ca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 Hil.YHeñ qacmu t;aamca. nepenoce onwemoe 6 aaòammx B2, B3 õYK6b1 aanucblßcuomcn õea npoõeaoe u 3+-1'1R06 npe/lll}fflHllH.

                        Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTMKa neKCUKa

Ilpoqumaùme meKcm 3ano.QHume nponycwu 6 npeòaoyceH11fLr not) H0.uepŒuu B4-B11 coon16emcn16Yh01UIlJtu caog, HaneqamaHHbLx .ga¿qaBHb1Jt1d ÕYKߌM11 c:npa6a om KaycÒozo


Pirates

B6

B7

B8

BIO

Bil

of a

He

Most In

Using guns, They money, What Police there

 

 


When you think of a pirate, what do you think of? Most people think man with a beard, a patch over one eye and a parrot on shoulder.      HE often         a wooden leg, too, doesn't he? HAVE people also think that pirates for hundreds of years. NOT EXIST fact, there are still many pirates on the seas, although they the same kinds of clothes that they used to.      NOT WEAR speedboats rather than sailing ships, and often          CARRY pirates today still attack ships.

frighten the people on the ship and steal           bags and          THEY often also taking the contents of the ship to sell.

pirates do  'piracy' and it is, of course, a serious crime, CALL officers to catch a lot of pirates in recent years, but MANAGE are still many more out there.

Ilpoqumaùme npueeòeHHb11i HilYce moccm [Ipeoõpaayúme caoaa, HuneqamuHHbte ÕVKߌUU nocae HO-uepoe B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHU ppa-u»tamutteocu u JWKc•uqeCKU coon16emcn1606Œau coòepycamuo meKcma. 3ano,1H1tme nponycK11 110.,1VtWHHb1.MU CJIOBŒMU. Kaycðblù nponycK coomeemcmevem omòeJ1bHtL$ty aaòamuo 11.3 epvnnbl B12-B18.

Ilpoqumaùme mt'R•cm c nponycwa,$tll, OÕO.3HaqeHHbtatt1 no.uepaatll A21-A28. 3mu H0Mepa coomaemcmawom 3aòaH11f1*t A21-A28, 6 Romopbtr npeòcma6aeHbl ß03JtOYHble aaputlHn1bl omeemoe. Oõeeðume H0.uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?O ea.uu eapuamna omeema.

Some card tricks, the magician, can card trick that put the rest of the

A23 be a good idea to Ask the person must pick up the pack. Don't shuffle this, however. row, etc. XXhen card is in now. with their card in exactly the same final time, hold turn over the cards following phrase:

over the first card, you turn it over.

particularly ones which are based on maths rather than any real skill on the part of be extremely impressive without A21 a lot of practice. Here's a anyone can do. Take a normal pack of cards. Lav out three columns of seven cards and pack to one A22 . You won't be using it for this trick. Now, ask a of the audience to pick one card without telling you which one it is. It might turn your back so they can show the card to everyone else.

which column the card is in. Whichever column thev A24to, you cards column by column so that the column with their card in is in the middle of the the cards, but deal them out again into three columns. Be very careful how you do deal them column by column. Deal the first row of each column, then the second have the three columns laid out, ask the person to tell you which column their

Once again, A25  sure, when you pick the cards up, that the column is the middle column you pick up. Go through the procedure one more time in

A26 . Then, when you have picked up the cards for the third and pack so that the backs of the cards are A27 upwards. Slowly one by one. For each of the first ten cards you turn over, say one letter of the

                              'This is your ...'. So, A28                             example, you'll say 'T' when you turn

Test

6

z

'H' when you turn over the second, and so on. For the eleventh card, say 'card!' as It will be the card they picked!

A21                 1) requesting          2) requiring          3) acquiring        4) inquiring

A22                  I) side                     2) edge                  3) boundary        4) border

A23                  l) being                   2) character          3) person             4) member

A24 1) show 2) direct 3) point 4) demonstrate A25 I) let 2) do 3) make 4) take

A26                 I) way                     2) route                 3) method           4) system

A27                  1) heading                2) regarding           3) looking             4) facing

A28                  1) with                     2) for                      3) by                     4) as

no       B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYUbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB    !

ObPAT11TE BHMMAHME.   HO       B4-B18 u A21-A28         pa.3Hb1wr qacmnx tîaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHb1 HUNCHC'Ú qacmu t5J1(lHKa. [Ipu nepeHoce omøemoa 6 aaðaH11+Lr 134-1318 ÕVRdb1 aculldCb16cuomCH õe.3 npoõe:106 u 3HUK06 npenu+ta}lllfl.

73

                                                  Pa3ne.T1         IIWCbMO

               Ha                  Cl, C2 WIA1-1K OTBETOB

TIPI/ Bbl'10.ueHUU aaÒaHllñ CI u C2 ocoõoe BHU.MCIHIW oõpamume Ha mo, Limo gatuu omeenlbt õyòym 01ßH116an1bc•n moatbRO no aanucxu, CÒeJICIHHb1.u 8 FAAHKE OTBETOB .NE2. 1-111RŒcue aanucu qePH0611KCl He õyòvm yqumb16arnbc•a .9Kcnepmo.M.

TIPII aan0AHeH1i11 WIAHKA OTBETOB .Nþ2 yçaycume ('Haqaaa H0.uep saòaH11H CI, C2 .3ameM aanuuuune C60ú omaem Ecau OÒHOÙ Cmt)POHbl aaamca HeòocmamoqH0, Bbl Moyceme ucno.u.aoeamb ()pyeyo cmopony ÕaaHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

Test 6

This is part of a letter from Maxine, your English pen friend.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Some people believe that animals without owners should have the right to live on the streets in cities.

Others say that they could be dangerous and should be collected and found new homes, or even put down.

Do you think that stray animals should be        Use the following plan allowed to live on the streets?    I. Introduction (State the problem).

         Write 200-250 words.                                                   2. Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

3.  Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.

4.  Conclusion.

                                 Pa3aeJ1        roBopeHne

Bbl noayqume Kapmowy, Ha KomopoÙ npeòcma6aeHbl mpu aaðaHllfl          ycnmozo omeema: C3 — me,uamuqeocoe MOHOJlO?ULteCKOe 6blCKa.3btŒ3aHlže,

C4 — C)IICIJIO? c tge.1b'0 ot5.ueHa tþŒcmuqecK01ž uncþop.uagueú, C5 — c)uaaoe c lgeJlbR) oõJteHa

OlßHOtlHOÙ 1Œcþop.uauueÙ. OKOHqaH1te BblnO,1HeHllH KayÒ020 aaðaHllfl 3K.3ŒueHamop. Bo ape-un npoeeðeH11fi 9moú qacmu .9Kaa.uena llòem nocm0HHHí1fi .3anucb Ha avðuoycaccemy.


saaaHV1fl

STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on your favourite film.

Remember to say:

• what kind of film it is

• who stars in it

     what happens in the film

     why you like it

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are in a café. You want a hot chicken dish for lunch. You don't want to spend more than £3.50.

Before making a decision, ask the waiter/ waitress about:

     chicken dishes available

     whether they are hot

     the cost

Test 6

The teacher will play the part of of the waiter}waitress and will speak first.

Remember to:

     be active and polite

     get all the information you need

     decide on what to order for lunch

3K3aMe1--1VeMOro

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

Your parents have said you can have a pet. You and your brother sister are discussing which pet to get. You can have a:

     cat

     dog

• hamster • rabbit

             goldfish

The teacher will play the part of your brother/sister.

Remember to:

75

             discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons find out your brother's/sister's attitudes and take them into account  invite your brother sister to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: third task

A Look at the task on page 79. Match each of the following statements to one of the situations described in questions A7A13.

I I won't give it away, but the characters aren't what they seem.

2     1 was driving along and suddenly the car started making a funnv noise ... A

3     And the road signs just here aren't very

clear, so that's how it happened. A

4     1'm very disappointed with you, young man.

5     It's a good way to get children involved in the news, I think.

6     1 saw it in a magazine and it looked gorgeous!

7     Well, I was furious because it's not the first time she's done it.

Section 2 Reading: second task

B   Quickly read the texts in the task on page 81 and match the books to the authors. There is one author you don't need to use.

1     My Trip and Other Mistakes

2     Squaring the Ii•iangle

3     Not One Before Another

4     Introducing Myself

5     Shooting Animals

6     Past Lives: The Book 7 Fishing Essentials


a Carol Masterton b Karen Wilde c Henry Bannerman d Greg King e William Shakespeare f Nick McDonald g Vivian Norris h Ian Clarke

C   Find words or phrases in the texts to match these definitions.

1     travel with someone

2     useful

3     rejects something because it is not correct

4     possible explanations          

5     newest          

6     easy to like 7 make better

8     people who like something

9     starting to do

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: first task

D   Quickly read the first text on page 84. Decide if these statements are True (T)or False (F).

I

Charlie's mum believes him when

 

 

he savs there are aliens outside.

TIF

2

She says that she wants to see his

 

 

homework.

TIF

3

Charlie's father thinks Charlie is

 

 

lying about the aliens.

TIF

4

Charlie and his father go outside

 

 

and see aliens in the garden.

TIF

5 There are aliens in the living room when Charlie and his father return. TI F


E    Complete the table.

present simple

present progressive

past simple

past progressive

present perfect simple

past perfect simple

present participle

fly hear begin

sit

flying

 

wasr,vere

hashave

 

flying

Section 4 Writing: second task

F      Look at the second task on page 86. Read the following paragraph and answer the question.

G    Complete the table using the phrases in the box.

Consequently • Despite this • Even given that • In consequence • In spite of this In summary • That may be true, but To conclude • To sum up

Phrases like 'In conclusion'

Phrases like 'However'

Phrases like 'As a result'

 

 

 

Section 5 Speaking: first task

H Complete the notes. Use the words and phrases in the box to help you.

 thriller • romance • children's book biography • adventure • plot • ending • hero/heroine

What's your favourite book?

What kind of book is it?

Who are the main characters in it?

What happens in the book?

Why do you like it?

                                       Pa3neJ1        Aynnp0BaHÞ1e

Bbl ycabuuume 5 6b1CKC13b16CIHUÚ. YcmaH0611žne coomeemcmeue .ueyòy 6blCKU3b16aHUfLUU eoeopmgeeo 1 — 5 u _vmaepycòeHt1*1.uu, C)aHHbL8tU 6 cnuc,tce A — F. Mcno-lb3Yùme Kaycòyo t5YK6V, oõoa,qaqcvoucvwž ymeep.ycðeuue, ma,1bK0 omm paa. B aaÒa,quu ecmb oðuo auuutee ymeepycðertue. Bbl ycalbtzuume .3anucb ÒgaycÒbt. 3aHecume c6011 omeenlbt 6 maõat110'.

A.     His character has changed since he was a child.

Test T

B.      He is moving to the place where he spent his childhood. C. His family moved around a lot when he was a child. D. He spent a lot of his childhood with his grandparents. E. The place where he grew up is now completely different. F. He wanted to live somewhere else when he was a child.

roBopH11V11i

1

2

3

4

5

YTBep>KneH11e

 

 

 

 

 

Bbl ycalbltuume pa,32060p ÒOMOX03HÚKU c KOJLHU60H.yePOM. Onpeòeaume, KCIKUe ua npueeÒëHHb1X

.vmcepYòeHt1ù Al-A6 coomaemcmøyom coòepycamuo muccma (I ),       He coomeemcmay,rom (2) u O 6 meKcme He cycaaano, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUU mewcma Heelb.3fi c)anlb Hil nonoycumevtbH020, Hil omputgameabktoeo omgema (3). ()õ6eòume 1-10,uep 6b1ÓpaH11020 ga•tll eapuamna omeema. Bbl ycJ1blžuume .3anucb ÒeaYCÒbl.

           Al     The woman mistakes the salesman for someone else.

1)   BepHO           2) HeBePHO          3) B TeKCTe He CKagaHO

          A2    The salesman wants the woman to buy a vacuum cleaner.

                                   l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0           3) B -reKCTe He CKa3ŽlHO

          A3    The woman enjoys doing housework.

                                   1) BepH0               2) HeBepHO               3) B -reKc•re He CKt13aHO

          A4    The most expensive product costs £30.

                                   l) BepHO               2) HeBepHO               3) B TeKCTe He CKa3ŽiHO

A5 The salesman offers to show the woman how to use a product. I) BepH0 2) HeBepH0 3) B •re•KCTe He cK',B'dH0

          A6     The woman buys the salesman's cheapest product.

                                   l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0              3) B                He CKagaH0


 

Bbl yc.lblluume 6b1CKa3þ1ßCIHUf1 Ji10òeù 6 ce.uu pa.Mut1HbLV cumya«uax. Omaemwne Ha aonpocbl no coðepyaH11+0 6b1CKa3b16CIHUÚ, 6b1Õpat3 oð11H 11.3 npeòaoyceHHbLV eapuamnoa omeema. B

A7-A13 oõgeÒume 1114tþpy 1, 2 uau 3, oõo.3HaqaŒot«yo omae,'ï4 Komopblñ Kaycemcfl Hautîoaee gePHbLM. Bbl yc.lbltuume KUYÒOe 6blCKU3b1BCIH1že Ò6ClYÒbl.

You will hear a woman telling her son off. What has he done wrong?

1)   He didn't tell her he was going to be late.

2)   He went out without her permission.

3)   He forgot to buy something on his way.

You will hear a man describing a film. What did he like about it?

I) the ending 2) the characters

3) the action

BA9 You will hear a girl talking to a hairdresser. What style does the girl want?

l) shoulder-length, and all one colour 2) long, with a pink fringe

3) short, with some lighter parts

'AIO   You will hear a man talking about a recent experience. How did he feel?

I) annoyed

2) helpless

3) frightened

LAI 1 You will hear a girl talking about her sister. Why was the girl angry?

1)  Her sister asked her for money to go out.

2)  Her sister came into her room without permission. 3) She wasn't invited to go out with her sister.

'A12  You will hear a man talking to a policeman. What is the man's excuse?

I) He didn't know it was a one-way street.

2)   He was in a hurry to get somewhere.

3)   He hasn't been driving long,

A13    You will hear a boy talking about a TV programme he saw. What does he say about it?

I) It lets children choose what news stories appear.

2)   It is a news programme presented by children.

3)   It interviews children around the country about their lives.

no Bl Il Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHHE,    Ha        m, Al-A13 qacmftx ÕaaHKa. BI pacnoao.yceH0 6 HU.YCHeÙ qacmu t5aawca. [Ipu nepeHoce om6en106 6 aaÒŒuu BI õYKßb1 ganucblgcuomc•n õea npoõeaoe u 3HClK06 npen11HaH1ifl.

79

                                            Pa3aeJ1        LIrreHne

YcmaH0B1tme coomøemcmaue me,vt A — G meKt•ma.M 1 — 6. 3cmecume CßOU omeentbt 6 maõau«y. Ucnoalbayùme KC1.ycÒyo õycay mœ1bR0 oòun paa. B aaòanuu oòna me.ua

A.      UNEXPLAINED EVENTS

B.      SPACE TOURISTS

c. DISTANT WORLD

D.      ANCIENT SCIENCE

E.       FAILED HOPES

F.       SPECTACULAR SIGHT

G.      SERIOUS RISKS

1   


When Neil Armstrong first set foot on the Moon in July 1969, many people around the world thought that it was the beginning of mankind's journey to the stars. They expected to see people living on the Moon in special bases. However, it wasn't to be. Getting to the Moon was expensive and of limited scientific value. Those who were expecting a golden age Of space exploration were disappointed.

2    Astronauts face many dangers in space. The take-off and landing are dangerous, and there's always a chance that a meteor is going to hit your spacecraft. Other threats come from something you can't see: radiation. X-rays and other forms of radiation can cause health problems for astronauts above the protection of Earth's atmosphere.

3    For the first time, it's possible to buy yourself a ticket to space — that's if you've got $20 million to spend. Dennis Tito, an American businessman, and Mark Shuttleworth, a businessman from South Africa, have both visited the International Space Station. They were taken up on Russian Soyuz rockets and enjoyed a week of weightlessness before returning to Earth.

4    Look up into the sky at the right time and the right direction and you'll see Saturn. It will look like a bright star, but a pair of binoculars or a small telescope will give you an amazing view. Saturn has rings around it, giving it a beautiful appearance unlike anything else in the night sky. No wonder Saturn has been called the 'Jewel of the Solar System'.

5    Discovered in 1930, the planet Pluto circles the Sun at a distance of approximately six billion kilometres. That's about 40 times further away from the Sun than the Earth is! At that distance, the Sun looks just like a bright star and provides very little heat. A spacecraft launched from the Earth would take twelve or thirteen years to get to Pluto, so don't expect to see close-up photographs any time soon!

America. The famous the movements of the

6    We're used to the idea of modern telescopes giving us views of the universe and astronauts flying to the space station and back again. But did you know that the roots of astronomy go back thousands of years? The Egyptians studied the night sky, as did the original people of North circle of stones at Stonehenge in Britain shows that people there knew about Sun and the Moon at least 2,500 vears before Christ was born.

TeKC"ra

1

2

3

4

5                6

Ilpoqumaðune 60/1POCbl I — 6 u peKaa.uy KHU.YCHb1X H06UHOK A — G. YcmaH0611žne coomeemcmeue Meycðv eonpocauu u Pezqa.UHbLUU OÕ7-,HŒWHUflM11. B ycaycðo.u meyccme Bbl Haùòeme omeem

coomaemcm6youey'+0 meKcmy, 6 KOnlOPOM BŒuu HaùðeH omeem B aaðauuu oðllH mer-ccm JIUIUHUÙ.

As you accompany author Nick McDonald on his journey through France, you'll feel like you're really there with him. My Trip And Other Mistakes isn't just the usual collection of local people and landscapes. With real practical tips on where to stay and where to eat, it's a must for every tourist.

B       Squaring the Triangle, from Vivian Norris, is one of those rare books that gives you a new understanding of an old subject. Everyone knows that planes and ships have disappeared in the part of the Atlantic known as the Bermuda Triangle, but no one knows why. Norris discounts all previous ideas and comes up with one or two interesting theories of her own to solve the problem.

C       Crime writer Carol Masterton has done it again. In her latest work Not One Before Another, she creates a mystery that will have you scratching your head. The unusual name for the book comes from the last words of Shakespeare's well-known play A Comedy Of Errors, and like that work, this book involves a lot of confusion over who's who.

D      After the success of the hardback version last year, it was only a matter of time before Introducing Myself appeared in paperback. Now everyone can enjoy Henry Bannerman's stories of his travels round London as a taxi driver. It's only £3.99, compared to £15 for the hardback, so there's no excuse for not getting to know this lovable character.

E       Beginners will find it too difficult, but expert photographers will love Shooting Animals by Ian Clarke. Clarke shows you in great detail how to catch those moments when animals are at their best. If you want to improve your pictures of wildlife, then this is the book for you.

F        For years now Karen Wilde has been recreating history on ourTV screens in Past Lives. Finally, fans

Of the show can buy her book that shows exactly how our great-grandparents lived. Past Lives: The Book is the result of three years of research and it gives you a very accurate idea of what it was like to be a child back then.

G      This is the perfect book for those of you who are thinking of taking up a new pastime. The author, Greg King, certainly knows his stuff, and Fishing Essentials tells you everything you need to know to start catching the big fish. Simple techniques are explained for beginners with the aid of detailed colour photographs.

O


The ticket inspector handed the ticket back to Dora with a nod of his head and continued on his way down the train. He was a handsome young man, Dora thought, and he reminded her a little of her husband when he had been the same age. She smiled a little at the thought as she watched the countryside roll past the window of the train. She was now eightv-four and although she regularly forgot things that other people found so easy to remember, like where she had put her glasses, that March day when she and Ralph had got married stood out clearly in her mind. They hadn't known each other long, and relatives had tried to advise Dora against it, but they had both known that it was the right thing to do. They quickly found a house to buy and the wedding was organised in a couple of days. Dora was grateful for the fortv happy years they had had together.

The sound of someone sniffing brought Dora's attention back to her surroundings. Sitting opposite her in the carriage was a woman, who Dora estimated to be in her early thirties. She looked up at Dora, who realised that the woman would welcome conversation. Dora pulled a tissue from her bag and passed it over.

'What's his name?' Dora asked with a friendly smile. The woman wiped her eyes with the tissue.

'Michael. He's just got a new job ' the woman began, then laughed a little. 'How did you know?'

Ilpoqumaùme maccm u 6b1/10JIHume aaÒaH11fi A 14420, OÕBOÒH 14114)py 1, 2, 3 coomeemcmeyougyo H0Jtepy 6blÕPClHHO?O (3CLUU gapuawna omaema.

4,

Test 7

'I wasn't always old, you know,' Dora said and looked more closely at the woman. She was smartly dressed, although her clothes weren't new. Clearly she had had money in the past but now couldn't afford luxuries. Dora noticed that she had brought her own sandwiches on the journey, rather than spend money on the train. She had the air of someone who is educated but who has never had much luck at turning that education into money. Dora knew what it was like to keep up appearances on a small income and her heart went out to her fellow traveller.

'Tell me about it,' she said. For the next half an hour, the woman, whose name turned out to be Sandra, told her story. Dora listened. The details of the relationship escaped her and Sandra mentioned people without explaining who they were, but Dora knew it wasn't important. Sandra wasn't looking for solutions from Dora. The only thing that mattered was that she gave Sandra a shoulder to cry on and a sympathetic ear. She nodded in all the right places and by the time the train pulled in at the next station, Sandra seemed a lot happier. Sandra looked up and cried, 'Oh, this is my stop!' She grabbed her bags, thanked Dora for listening and hurried off the train.

Dora sat back and closed her eyes. A feeling of sadness came over her for a moment. Listening to Sandra talk had been what she imagined being a grandmother was like. It would have been nice to have had children and watch their children grow up. Still, it wasn't to be and she and Ralph had spent many happy years travelling the world. She opened her eyes and looked out onto the platform as the train pulled away. Sandra was looking up at the train window and waving at her. Dora waved back and smiled, watching over her shoulder as the train station got smaller and smaller. She turned back to see a teenage girl standing beside her seat. She had a suitcase in one hand and the make-up around her eves had run as if she had been crying. She looked exhausted.

'Excuse me,' she said in a quiet voice. 'Is anyone sitting here?' She pointed to the seat where Sandra had been sitting.

'No, my dear. Sit down,' said Dora, and began to reach into her bag for a tissue. It's going to be one of those days, she thought to herself.

314

Dora has problems remembering

I) how long she was married to Ralph.

2)   simple, everyday things.

3)   where her husband had gone.

4)   what her wedding day was like.

OX15

Before getting married, Dora and her husband 1) waited until they knew each other well.

2)   asked their families for advice.

3)   arranged everything very carefully.

4)   made sure they had somewhere to live.

iA16

Dora thinks the young woman 1) would like to chat.

2)   wants to ask her for a tissue.

3)   looks younger than she really is.

4)   is looking at her in a strange way.

LAI 7

The young woman seems to

l) be poorer than she once was.

2)   like only home-made food.

3)   have problems finding a job.

4)   be careless about her clothes.

While Sandra talks about her life, Dora 1) gives her some useful advice.

2)   tries to focus on the important details.

3)   asks her to explain things more clearly.

4)   acts as if she understands everything.

319

When Sandra leaves, Dora feels unhappy for a moment because she 1) misses her husband.

2)   never had children.

3)   feels sorry for Sandra.

4)   doesn't see her grandchildren often.

A20

Dora thinks it's going to be 'one of those days' because I) she would prefer the girl to sit somewhere else. 2) she can't find the tissues in her bag.

3) the girl seems to have the same problems as Sandra. 4) the girl doesn't realise that Dora is exhausted.


no OKOHLICIHUU B2, B3 u Ä14-A20 HE 3ABYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, B2, 133 u A14-A20  d Pa.3HblX qacmnr õaamca. B2, 133 pacnoao.yceHb1 6 Hid.ycHeù qacmu õaaHKa. npu nepeHoce 0171601106 B aaòaH11H.r B2, B3 QVK6b1 aanucb1BŒomcH õea npoõeaoe u .3HClK06

83

                   Pa3aeJ1         rpaMMaTÞIKa JleKC11Ka

Tlpoqumaùme moccm 3anovquume nponycçu 6 npeò.aoycenuqx not) H0Jtepa.M11 B4-B11 coomeemcn16YH)11'1LM11 cþop.ua.M11 CJ106, HaneqamaHHbLr aa¿aa6Hb1Af11 ÕVK6Œ1f11 cnpaea om KaycÒ020 npeòaoyceHllfl.

B4

'Aliens                           over our back garden, right now!'

FLY

B5

His mother laughed. She anything so silly. 'Really, Charlie,' she said. 'You know there are no aliens. Now, have you finished your homework? I want to see it.'

NEVER HEAR

 

'It's true!' Charlie cried. 'There are aliens outside, for a place to land their spaceship!' Charlie's father looked up from his newspaper.

LOOK

 

'Now, Charlie. What's all this? 1 you so many times before not to tell lies. There are no aliens and they certainly don't fly down Acacia

Avenue.'

TELL

B8

'Okav,'                           Charlie. 'Come and look. If there's nothing there,

SAY

Visitors from outer space

Charlie ran downstairs and burst into the living room. 'Aliens!' he shouted.

I promise I'll just do my homework.'

Charlie's father sighed and put his newspaper down. 'Okav, Charlie. I'll come B9 outside with you and see if there are any aliens in garden.' They went into the garden, but there was nothing there. 'But ... but ...


BIO they were ... ' Charlie to say. His father took his arm and BEGIN led him back inside.

They walked back into the living room and suddenly stopped. There were two

Bll large green creatures on the sofa next to Charlie's mum, who SIT looked very nervous. 'Hello, dear. I think we've got visitors,' she said, weakly.

Ilpoqumaùme npueeòeHHb1ù Hil.yce meçcm 17peoõpaayùme caoea, HaneqamaHHb1e aaZQC16Hbl.Ull õYK6Œuu nocae HO.uep06 B12-B18 max, gmoõbl OHU epa,wtamuqecxu u at'KCU¼C'CKU coomeemcmeoaaelll coc)ep.ycaH1d10 maccma. 3ano.uume nponycxu nonyqeHHb1-uu CJ106CIMll. Ka.yðblù nponycK coomaemcmavem omòe.tbH0MY apynnbl B 12-B18.

B12 Imagine what life used to be like before people had    food. FREEZE Everything had to be bought fresh and fresh meat lasted only a few days.

B13 That all changed in 1916 when an                                    called Clarence              EXPLORE

Birdseye went on an expedition to Canada with his family. They were

B14 to get fresh vegetables, so Clarence used ice to make their ABLE food last longer. After a lot of hard work, he finally found a way of

B15                                   freezing food. He returned to the USA, started a business SUCCESS

B16       and became                              Clarence Birdseye is famous for finally           WEALTH

B17      finding the     to a problem that people had been trying to  SOLVE solve for thousands of years. Even today, you will find Bird's Eye products

B18 on                                  in supermarkets all over the world.                                    SELL


Test 7

Tlpoqumaùme meKcm c nponycxa.uu, OÕoanaqeHHbtJt11 HO.UePa.8tu A21-A28. 3mu H0Jtepa coome,emcmeyom 3CIÒt1H11fL$t ,421-A28, 6 Komopbl-r npeòcmaaaeHb1 60.1Uo.YCHbte gapuamnbl omæmoe. ()õeeòume H0.uep BblÕPG'HHO?0 6Œuu eapuamna omeema.

Mr and Mrs Atkinson sat at the breakfast table. The toast was in its usual place, to the left of the teapot. And Mr Atkinson, as usual, wasn't in a A21 news on TV as he chewed a piece of toast. Mrs Atkinson tried to cheer him A22 as she did every morning, usually without much success.

'1 A23  a very strange dream last night,' she said. 'You won the lottery.'

'Hmm?' Mr Atkinson responded, without taking his eyes from the TV screen.

'Yes,' his wife continued. 'You won millions of pounds and bought us a lovely house in the country.' 'No chance of that while I'm working for Simpson's,' he said. His wife A24  no attention to his negative comment.

'Wouldn't it be wonderful, though, to live in the countryside, instead of in this flat?' Mr Atkinson smiled at the thought.

'Yes, it would be nice,' he said, before he frowned once more. 'But we'll never be able to

A25  it.' He stood up and went to collect his coat and briefcase. Mrs Atkinson sighed. Every week she bought a lottery ticket, and every week she checked the numbers. Of course, every week she was disappointed. She thought that maybe it was time to A26 and just accept that this was her life. She sighed again. The TV news was A27 an end.

     and finally, here are this week's winning lottery numbers .. , 17, 28, 29, 37, 40 and 42.'

Mrs Atkinson went white. She A28  her breath for a moment, then walked over to her desk. She opened a drawer and, very calmly, pulled out a small piece of paper. It was a lottery ticket. Mr Atkinson came back into the room.

'Right. I'm off. I shouldn't be too late, so ... Wendy, are you all right?' Mrs Atkinson handed him the lottery ticket and then very slowly sat down. She buttered a slice of toast and chewed thoughtfully.

                         1) high                     2) good                  3) strong               4) light

                         I) round                  2) out                    3) off                    4) up

A23

1) had        2) got  3) saw 4) took A24   1) paid           2) put 3) gave           4) made

A25                  1) cost                      2) charge                3) afford                4) invest

A26                  I) give                      2) stop                    3) turn                   4) hang

                          I) going                   2) bringing            3) moving             4) coming

A28

                          1) kept                    2) paused               3) held                  4) saved

no OKOH¼CIHUU B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE HEPEHECTM CBOJ4 OTBETb1 B FAAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BWIMAHME, qmo                   Ha .3aòaHllH B4-B18 u A21-A28

Pat3HbLV qac•mfLr õ.'1üHRa. B4-B18 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HUYHeðl qacmu ã1d1HKí1. 171211 nepeHoce 0111607106 6                B4-B18 õYKBbl aanuc•bldŒomcH õe.3 npoõeaoe u .3HdlK06 npenlUfflHUfl.

85

                                        Pa3neJ1       TIMCbMO

       omaemoe Ha              CI, C2 ucn0J1b3yùme K'7AHK OTBETOB M2.

õyòym out'H116amb('H moat,K0 no aanucnu, CÒeaCIHHbLU d WIAHKE OTBETOB Y2. HURUKUe aanucu qepH0611Ka He õvðym vqun1b16an1bt'H .9Kcnepmo.u.

Ilpu aano-QHt"--tuu WIAHKA OTBETOB Y2 yca.yume cHaqaaa H').uep        CI, C2 .3ameM aanutuume caoù omaenz Ecau oòH01i cmop0Hb1 rîaawca HeòocmamotlH0, 6bt .uoyceme ucnoalbaoaanu, ()pyeyo cmopony âQCIHKC1.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.


This is part of a letter from Andy, your English pen friend.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Some people think that pupils should be involved in decisions about their school and should have a say in how things are run. Other people think that pupils are too young to take part in such important decisions.

What can you say for and against pupils being Use the following plan involved in running their school?     1. Introduction (State the problem).

     Write 200-250 words.                                              2. Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against"

4.   Conclusion.

                                Pa3neJ1        1'0BopeHwe

Bbl nonyuume Kapmowcy, Ha Komopoù npeÒcmagaeHb1 mpu aaðaHllfl omeema:

C3 — meatamuqecycoe MOHOJIOUlLWCKOe 6blCKa.3bteauue,

C4 — Òuaaoe c lge.lb,LO oãue}-ta       C5 — òuaaoe c ue.lb,zo OÕ.MC'HCI ogeuot1HOÙ uncþop.ua«ueù. OROHt1CIHUe 6blYiOJ1}-œHUfl ycu.yòoeo aaðaH11f1 onpeòeaHem 3K.3Œue,qamop. Bo gpe.',ffl npoeeðeHllH »moil ttacmu  uðem nocmomman aanucb Ha ayòuoycaccemy.

                                                   3aaaH11¶           3K3aMeHveMoro


 STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on your favourite book.

Remember to say:

• what kind of book it is • who the main characters are and whether you like them

     what happens in the book

     why it is your favourite

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are on holiday in England. You would like to go on a boat trip in the next hour with two friends. It is quite a cool day. You only have two hours for the trip.


Before making a decision, ask the trip operator about:

      trips available at the moment

      activities offered on each trip

      the time each trip takes

      places left on each trip

The teacher will play the part of the trip operator and will speak first.

Remember to:  be active and polite  get all the information you need

      decide on the boat trip to take

 STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and a friend are at the Olvmpic Games. You are discussing what sport you would like to buy tickets for. You can see:

      a football match

      a tennis match

      the marathon

      a swimming race

• a judo match

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

anguage and Exam Skills Development'

Section 1 Listening: third task

A Look at questions A7-A13 on page 91 and find words and phrases that have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.

1    main actors 2 not completely

3       asked

4       very

5       a lot

6       unimportant

7       not much 

8       reason for

9       in the right way    

B  Read through the questions again. Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F) according to the questions.

1    Alan will talk about where Battle of the Giants was filmed.

2    Alan placed the advertisement in a newspaper.

3    Alan applied to the film production company for a job.

4    Alan had an interview.

5    In the end, Alan decided against working on the film.

Section 2 Reading: second task

c Read the three texts on page 93. Decide which text each of these ideas is mentioned in. Write 'A' for the first text, 'B' for the second text and 'C' for the third text.

1       You must be a certain age.

2       This is how much money you will make.

3       The job involves serving customers.

4       Phone us if you are interested.

5       You must have a car or van, etc.

O

6       You don't need experience.

7       You won't do any driving.

8       You'll work on Saturday mornings only.

9       You must be available on three evenings each week.

10 You'll stay in and go out.

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

third task

Write a word from the box in each gap to complete the sentences.

achieve • handle • manage • succeed

1    I really hope you in persuading Alice to come with us tomorrow.

2    I really hope youto persuade Alice to come with us tomorrow.

3    I don't know what you're trying to

, but you won't succeed!

4    I think you're going to the situation really well

o'clock so we should be there by lunchtime.

6         Are you going to off for a picnic during the journey?

7         Why don't you  your jacket off if you're too hot?

8         They'll  off the phone if you don't pay your bill.

             appear • arrive • get • reach

9         What time did you  to the airport?

10     What time did you  the airport?

11     What time did you  at the airport?

12     As soon as they  , we can check in.

Section 4 Writing: first task

E  Read Task CI on page 98. Imagine you are the person replying to Jackie and make notes to answer these questions. Use your imagination!

I Have you ever been on holiday just with your friends?

yes I no

2 If yes, did you have to persuade your parents to let you? Give as much information as possible.

 

3 If no, have you ever asked your parents if you could? What happened? Give as much information as possible.

 

4 Do you think Jackie is old enough to go on holiday with her friends? Why / why not?

 

5 Do you think Jackie should try to persuade her parents? If yes, how?

 

6 Do you have any other advice for Jackie?

 

F   Make a detailed paragraph plan for

your letter. Use your notes from Exercise E.

Your address

 

The date

 

Greeting

(Dear + first name,)

 

First paragraph

 

Second paragraph

 

Third paragraph

 

Closing expressions

 

Your first name

 

Section 5 Speaking: second task

C Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 99. Each of these questions contains a grammatical mistake. Rewrite them correctly.

I What time the film starts?

2      What kind of film it is?

3      It is a comedy?

4      It starts within the next half an hour?

5      When it starts?

89


Test 8

                                Pa3neJ1       AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl _ycnbltuume 5 (3b1CK(13b1gaH11Ù. coomgerncrneue Me.ycòy 6b1CK(13b1ßCIHIULUU RaycÒoeo

POBOPHtgeeo 1 — 5 u yrngep.YðeH14fLM1d, ÒCIHHbLUU B cnucvce A — F. Mcn0J1b3yùme Kaycðyo õYlC6_y, yrngep.ycòeHue, moulbK0 oÒE111 paa. B .3aÒmtuu ecmb oÒ110 auumee ymeepmcÒenue.

Bbl ycau,uuume aanucb                 3aHecume C60U on16enlbL maÕnugy,

A. Making a lot of money is the most important thing for me. B. I will probably do the same job as one of my relatives.

C. I want to continue with my education for a long time. D. I'm hoping I can travel a lot in my career, E. Being famous really appeals to me.

F. I am planning to work with children when I'm older.

FOBOPH1uM1i

1

2

3

4

5

 

Yl'Bep>KJlc11Me

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bbl _ycnbltuume paaeogop õuõauornel€apfl u qurnarnen,fl, Onpeòeaurne, ICŒcue 143 npueeÒëHHbLr

_ymæpyòewuù Al-Ab coomgemcmesytom melccma (1), ICCIKUe He coomgemcme,yom (2) u O qëM melccme He cycaaaHO, mo ec/ìlb Ha OCH06aHUU muccma ()amb Hid nonoycumeJ1bH0?0, Hid ompugameJtbH0?0 ome,ema (3). ()õgeòume HOMep ßb1ÕpaHHOPO 6tlMU gapuawna onwema, Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb c)6ayÒb1.


Al

The woman has used this library before.

l) Bepuo                   2) IleBep110                3) B TCKCTC Ile cka3a110

A2

The woman usually carries her passport with her, I) Bep110 2) 11cBep110 3) B •rewre Ile cKa3a110

A3

The woman has something with her that can be used as identification.

I) Bep110                2) 11cBep110                  3) B •rewre Ile cKa3a110

A4

You have to pay if you keep a book for more than two weeks.

l) Bep110                 2) Ilei3ep110                  3) B •rewre He cka3a110

A5

The library only has books.

l) Bep110                 2) Ilei3ep110                  3) B •rewré He cka3a110

A6

You can borrow a maximum of six things at the same time.

                     l) Bep110               2) IleBep110               3) B TCKCTC Ile cKa3a110

Bbl ycalbltuume umnep6bR) C AMHOM AOCOHOM, KomoPb1Ù mt)JtbKO timo CHA,ICR B cþualb.ue. B aaÒG'HURX A7-Ä13 oõaeòume gutþpy 1, 2 WII/ 3, coomaemcmgyotgyo dblÕPCIHHOMY aa.uu gapuamny omaema. Bbl ycutbltuume

Alan says that

1)  he probably won't be in the finished film.

2)  people might not see him in the film. 3) he's one of the stars of the film.

 The film Battle of the Giants was 1) completely made in Hollywood.

2)   not made in Hollywood at all.

3)   partly made in Alan's local area.

A9 The advertisement which Alan saw called for people I) who were particularly good-looking.

2)   with plenty of acting experience.

3)   who wanted a minor role in a film.

    AIO    Before the film, Alan had

I) never done any acting at all.

2) only done a small amount of acting. 3) done a large amount of acting.

All Alan heard from the film production company I) one day after he had applied.

2)   one week after he had applied.

Test 8

3)   three months after he had applied.

A12 Alan thinks the purpose of the interview was to 1) test how good at acting he was.

2) see if he really wanted to be in the film. 3) measure him for some clothes.

A13 Most of the work Alan did on the film involved 1) standing in a crowd of people.

2) learning how to act properly. 3) running away from the giants.

no Bl u Al-A13 IIE 3AbYUbTE TIEPEIIECTÞI CBOU OTBETb1 B WIÄHK OTBETOB !

ObPATUTE BIIMMAIIME, qmo Ha m, Al-A13 qacrnnr ãqawca. BI pacnoaunceH0 B HU.YCHeÙ qacmu õ.aawca. Tlpu nepeHoce orne,ernog 6 aaÒ(1Huu BI õYKBbl õea npoõenoe u 3M(11C06 npen14H0H1dfl.

O


                                     Pa3neJ1        LITeHne

YcrnaH06urne coorngerncrngue me.M A — G rnexcrna,u 1 — 6. 3aHecurne cgou orngeržlbl 6 rnaãauuy.

A. SLOW SUCCESS B. FILM MUSICIAN

c. LONG HISTORY

D.     SEA SOUNDS

E.      GREAT CHANGES

F.       WONDERFUL PLAYER G. LIVE PERFORMANCES

 

I While the electric guitar was invented quite recently (in 1931, by Adolf Rickenbacker), the guitar itself has been around in various forms for an incredibly long time. Musical instruments remarkably similar to the guitar have been played for at least the last five thousand years. The instrument which million of teenagers today dream of playing in a rock band started its life in Persia (now called Iran), in Central Asia.

2       Humans have only been able to record sounds to listen to later since the middle of the 1800s. Since then, however, technology has developed at an enormous speed. Records, cassettes and CDs have all allowed people to listen to recorded music in their own home. These days, more and more music is becoming 'digital'. We can save pieces of music as files on our computer, and can carry thousands of songs around on personal MP3 players.

3       Everyone knows that the British group the Beatles was the most successful pop group of all time. In the early 1960s, John Lennon, Paul McCartney, George Harrison and Ringo Starr changed popular music forever. Things weren't easy for the band at the beginning, though. Lennon and McCartney started making music together in 1957. By 1962, almost every single record company in Britain had rejected them, saying they would never achieve anything. Finally, one record company decided to take a risk with them. By 1964, they were the most popular band in the world.

4       Before pop groups and singers go on tour, they have to make a decision regarding their music. They probably want to play the songs from their latest album in their concerts, but the question is: should the songs sound as similar as possible to the sound created on the album, or should the audience hear a new version of the song? Madonna, for example, is always keen to Sing her songs in a different way at concerts. Other singers choose to sing their songs as they sang them on the album.

5       Jerry Goldsmith spent much of his career writing the music for Hollywood movies. From the early

1950s until 2003, Goldsmith wrote the soundtracks for several hundred hit movies, including the Star Trek and Rambo series of films. He often worked on as many as sixmajor movies in one year. If that wasn't enough, he also found the time to come up with the theme tunes for a large number of American and radio shows.

6       Dolphins and whales can hear much better than humans can. They can also hear much better than they can see, This does not cause them many problems, however, as sound travels through water much better than light does. They often use sounds to locate things such as rocks and food. Male humpback whales make noises that sound like they're singing. One whale can hear another Whale's 'song' hundreds of miles away.

 

N2 •rewra

1

2

3

4

5

6

Texqa

 

 

 

 

 

 


coom„emcrneue

//anutuume guq5py 1— ec•au _ymaepyðe+tue eepnoe, u gucþpy O — ecau ymgepYðeH1te ueeepnoe. 3Œecume         omeembl maõnugy.

The person doing this         Part-time sales job will only work on 1 one day each week.       We're looking for a part-time busy city centre bookshop on 2 The bookshop will only I      trustworthy, approachable be consider trained sales 1 public. NO experience is

given. The position would be assistants for this job.        but anyone with a love of

Write to Mrs J. Smythe at

Street, Stratford and explain

Do you like looking

3     This job will continue

1   when the children go         we're looking for someone aged back to school.       1 three children during the summer

and Caroline (l l) are three brighc

need to be kept busy! You would

4     The successful 6 pm. Occasionally, we Will need applicant might have to 1 games With the kids at home, and work at the weekend 1 (No driving required.) Good rate sometimes. 1 Experience preferred. Please call

5     The band plays all over I Drummer wanted to join the country. at weddings and parties in the weekend. You should be an play a wide range of music

6     The successful blues and soul). You must have applicant must be aged 1 own transport. You must be between 45 and 55. Saturday and Sunday evening, evening. You can expect to

1   two-hour performance. You band are aged 45-55.

them on day trips too.

pay for the successful applicant

between 6 pm and 9 pm.

your own drum kit and your 1 for performances every I for rehearsals every Friday I approximately £70 for every I1 be any age, but the rest of the 1

                                                                        assistant wanted          1

sales assistant to work in our Saturday mornings. You must and enjoy working with the necessary as full training will be

1 ideal for a university student books can apply.

Smythe's Books, 25 Candon why you want to work with us!

Test 8

after children? 1 between 18 and 25 to look after our holidays.Adam (aged     (9)          1 friendly and energetic children who 1 work Monday to Friday, 8 am to         1 you on Saturdays too.you'll be playing 1 taking of

5757

successful local experienced (including

available and

earn can

1

2

3

4

5

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

Test 8

17poqumaùme rncwcrn u 6b1no„mume aaòL'H1dfl A14-A20, OÕ60Òfl I'll(þpy 1, 2, 3 unu 4, Coom6emcmgyotgyo H0Mepy 6b1ÕPaHHOU) ea.uu gapuawna onwema.

'I want everyone to be absolutely clear how seriously I'm taking this,' said Mrs Lowry. The twelve children stared at her silently and intently, their frightened expressions demonstrating that they did Indeed recognise the gravity of the situation.

'We will not tolerate stealing in this school. It's quite simple. Whoever has taken Julie's purse must return it to me during the lunch break. If you do that, we won't say anything more about it. I shan't punish you, and I won't tell the head teacher or your parents. But if Julie's purse hasn't been returned by the end of lunch, then I'm afraid I'll have no choice but to go to Mr Jenkins, and you know what he'll do. There's a school policy for situations like this and there's no getting out of it. That's right — he'll bring the police in. They'll come this afternoon, and they'll interview you all. They'll find out who took the purse, I'm sure of it, and whoever it is will be in very, very serious trouble. So, please, for your own good, if you took Julie's purse, bring it to me during the lunch break. I'll be in here, on my own, the whole time. Does everyone understand?'

'Yes, Mrs Lowry,' said the group Of nine-year-olds in chorus.

Lunch break came and went with no one handing in the purse to Mrs Lowry.

'This is a great shame,' said Mrs Lowry sadly. 'Before I go and talk to Mr Jenkins, I'm just going to ask you, Julie, one more tune: are you absolutely one hundred per cent sure you brought your purse to school this morning?' 'Yes, Mrs Lowry.'

'And when did you last see it?'

'During the break, at eleven o'clock. Just as I told you. took out a pound coin to go and buy a can of Coke. When I came back with the change, it had gone.'

'And Elizabeth, you saw Julie take the pound coin out of her purse, did you?'

'Yes, Mrs Lowry,' said the girl sitting next to Julie. 'Julie's telling the truth. We went to the drinks machine together and when we came back, Julie's purse wasn't in her bag anymore. That's when we came to find you.'

'I'll ask you all one more time. Does anyone know anything about the whereabouts of Julie's purse?'

There was absolute silence in the classroom. 'Then I shall go and get Mr Jenkins now.'

Mrs Lowry had already opened the door and stepped into the corridor when a voice shouted: 'Mrs Lowry! '

She immediately turned and came back into the room. 'What is it?' she asked.

David, sitting right at the back of the class, was pomting excitedly at the radiator on the wall next to him. 'Look, Mrs Lowry! Behind the radiator! I think it's Julie's purse!'

There did seem to be something colourful behind the radiator. Mrs Lowry ran to the wall, bent down and picked it up. 'Is this your purse, Julie?' 'Yes!' said Julie.

'Remind me how much was in it.'

'A five-pound note.'

Mrs Lowry opened the purse. 'Thank goodness for that,' she said. 'Julie, here you are. David, I'd like to talk to you outside, please. The rest of you just sit quietly until I return.

Mrs Lowry and David stood silently outside the door. She looked at him sadly. 'I'm waiting, David,' she said eventually. 'What for, Mrs Lowry?'

'For an explanation.'

'What do you mean?' Tears were already beginning to well up in his eyes.

'I'm not stupid, David. Don't think I am. I want you to tell me exactly what you did and why you did it. If you do that, it'll go no further, I promise.'

'I didn't do anything! I saw the purse and I called you in.'

'I don't think your parents are going to believe that, are they? Do you want them to know you're a thief?'

'I'm not a thiefl I'm not!' He wiped his eyes with his sleeve. 'How can I make you believe me?'

 

 

Test 8

A14

The children's faces showed that they 1) were going to remain silent for a long time.

2)   were scared of having things stolen.

3)   knew exactly what Mrs Lowry would do.

4)   were aware how serious the theft was.

AIS

Mrs Lowry said that, if the purse wasn't returned, she would have to 1) punish all of the children.

2)   tell their parents.

3)   tell the head teacher.

4)   inform the police.

A16

Mrs Lowry was confident that

1) the purse would be returned during the lunch break, 2) she knew who had taken Julie's purse.

3) the police would be able to solve the crime. 4) the thief was really a good person.

Ali

After lunch, Mrs Lowry wanted to make certain that 1) Julie's purse had been stolen.

2)   Julie's purse was still missing.

3)   Elizabeth hadn't taken the purse.

4)   Julie's purse did have money in it,

A18

Mrs Lowry showed she was relieved that 1) it was actually Julie's purse,

2)   Julie's money was still in the purse.

3)   it was David who had found the purse.         

4)   Julie hadn't had more money in the purse.

A19

In the corridor with David, Mrs Lowry

1)   asked David to explain why he was crying.

2)   realised how sad he was about what had happened.

3)   felt very sorry that David had to experience this.

4)   was hoping that David would confess to the crime.

A20

Mrs Lowry made it clear to David that

1)   she'd definitely tell his parents he was a thief.

2)   she knew why he had stolen Julie's purse.

3)   she would not tell anyone if he confessed.

4)   his crying would not change anything,

no        132, 133 u A14-A20 IIE 3AbYAbTE TIEPE/IECTU CBOU OTBETb1 B WIÄHK OTBETOB    !

ObPATUTE B/IUMAIIUE, qrno Ha B2, m u A14-A20 pa.3Hl,Lr qacrnax õaamca. 132, B3 pacnonoyceHbl 6 HILYCHeÙ qacrnu ÕMHICí1. Ilpu nepeHoce orngerž10B 6 aaÒaHURX B2, B3 õYKBbl aanucbleawrncfl ("ea npoõenog u npen1dHí1H11fl.

Test 8

                      Pa3neJ1         rpaMwaT11K'a n JleKCWKa

Ilpoqumaùme mezcm. 3an0JtHume nponycxu npeònoyceptu.qx- noò Ht).uepaauu B4-B11 coomgemcmayotgu.uu cþop.ua.uu (.7106, HanettamaHHb1.r aaaqadHb1auu õycaaauu cnpaaa om Icayðopo

 

 

136

138

B9

BIO

Bli

The Moon

Would you like to go to the Moon? The Moon is about 385,000 kilometres away from  here on Earth.

It's much  than the Earth, and is not really a planet.

It's a 'satellite' of Earth. This means it  round the Earth.

Before 1969, humans  able to get to the Moon. Then, on July 20th, the spacecraft Apollo 1 1 on the Earth's only satellite.

The world watched with excitement as the first humans on the Moon's surface.

In total, twelve people  the Moon so far.

However, the last time anyone  on the surface of the Moon was in 1972.

WE

SMALL

GO

NEVER BE

WALK usrr

STAND

Ilpoqumaùme PIPUßeÒeHHblÙ HidYce moccm [IpeoÕpa3Yùme caoaa, HaneqamaHHble õyct$avuu noc.ne B12-B18 malC, urnoõbl 0/411 epaM„uarnuttecK1d u aelœuqecxu coomaemcrnaoaa.au coòep.ycamuo melcrma. 3ano.,murne nponycxu ntmyqeHHbLUU c.aoaa.uu. Ka.ycòblù nponycK coornaerncnusyern ornðeJ1bH0„uy aac)amuo 143 epynnbl 1312-1318.

 

 

B12

B13

B14

B15 B16 B17

B18

The Russian writer Anton Chekhovs who was born in 1860 and died in 1904, has made an enormous  to modern literature. His success was a remarkable , and came despite the fact that Chekhov's family lived in severe poverty for much of his

Chekhov's works have had a great influence on 20th century literature in many ways, particularly in terms of expression, plot

and narrative structure, and character

Even today, more than a hundred years after his

Chekhov's stories are extremely popular all over the world and major new  of his plays are frequently mounted, to great success.

CONTRIBUTE

ACHIEVE

CHILD

EMOTION

DEVELOP DEAD

PRODUCE

Tlpoqumaüme me}ccm c nponycraauu, OÕ03HaqeHHbLUU Htwepaauu A21-A28. 3mu H0Mepa coornßemcmßyom gat)aH1ffiM 1421-A28, IcomopbLY  603MO.H'Hb1e gapuawnbl omgem06. OÕ6eòume H0.uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6W„tU 6apuawna omgema.

 

 

I had only been at university for a few hours when the enormity of it finally dawned on me: I was now independent. Having lived at home with my parents all my life up until that day, I had often dreamed of the freedom that living A21  yourself gives you. There's no one to tell you when to go to bed, when to get up, what to do, what not to do. Now, though, I felt the responsibility weighing down on me. True, there was no one giving me rules to obey, but there was also no one to

A22     on but myself If I didn't remember to go to the supermarket, there wouldn't be any food in the flat. If I didn't budget correctly, there wouldn't be Mum or Dad nearby to lend me

some money. If I didn't pay the bills on time, the electricity or water would be A23 off. It was a frightening feeling, and I prayed I would be able to deal with adult life in a A24  enough way.

Over the next days and weeks, I began to realise how much I still had to learn, How could I have

A25  to the age of eighteen without ever having ironed my own shirt? Was that laziness on my part ('Mum, can you iron a shirt for me? S), or had my parents and teachers failed to provide me with the skills I now needed? Whichever it was, I quickly had to learn. And learn I did partly through trial and error, and partly A26  to the help of the new friends I was making. Many of them were in a similar situation, but we each had different skills to share. I could show them how to cook a tasty spaghetti Bolognese — a A27  every student should be able to prepare — and they could teach me how to light a gas oven or defrost a fridge.

When I went home for Christmas, I sensed that my parents were a little surprised that I had

A28  to survive so well. I didn't admit it, but I felt extremely proud of all I'd accomplished so far.

     A21                  1) or                         2) by                      3) with                  4) on

                               1) follow                 2) believe               3) rely                    4) trust

     A23                  1) cut                      2) taken                 3) set                    4) stopped

      A24                           1) grown2) developed                   3) mature              4) ripe

     A25                  1) reached               2) got                    3) arrived            4) appeared

     A26                   1) recognition          2) praise                 3) credit                4) thanks

                              1) dish                     2) plate                  3) portion            4) serving

     A28                   1) managed               2) succeeded        3) achieved            4) handled

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 IIE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEIIECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB    !

ObPATMTE BIIMMAIIME, qmo omgenlbl Ha aaÒaHlÆH B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacno.n.apawmcH e pa.3HbLX yacmqx (mamca. B4-B18 pacnonoye+-lbl B HUYCHeÙ qacmu Õaawca. flpu nepew»ce on16en106 .gaðaHldflx B4-B18 õYKßb1 aanucblßcuorncq õe.3 U .3HG','C06 npe,VlllHaHlffl.


                                    Pa3neJ1       11MCbMO

Ha                  Cl, C2 WIAHK OTBETOB

Ilpu Bbl"lOJIHeHUld aac)aHuÚ CI u C2 ocoõoe "HILM(IHUC' oõpamume Ha mo, grno 6CUUU omgenlbl õyòym no aanucmt, CC)ea1CIHHbLM 6 WIAHKE OTBETOB v,W2. IllUCCUCUe aanucu qepH061uca He õyòym ygumb16an1bcH .9Kcnepn10M.

17pu aanomw,quu WIAHKA OTBETOB vMg2 y,rcayume cwaqa-qa HOMep CI, C2 aameM gamuuume C60ù omgem Ecnu OÒHOÙ cmopow-,l Heðocmam0¼H0, 6b1 Jtoyceme ucn0J1b30ßanlb ()pypyo cmop0HY ÕJtaHICa.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

The car has become the most popular means of transport in the history of the world. However, some people say that the world would be better off without cars.

What can you say for and against the use of cars?            Use the following plan

Write 200-250 words.                                                            1. Introduction (State the problem).

2.   Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.

                                     Pa3neJ1        IR)BopeHne

Bbl no.ayqurne Rapmowcy, Ha Romopoù  rnpu              ().ŒH ycmuoeo omaema.•

C3 — meauamuqecycoe MOHOJIO?UUC'CICOC' dblCKa.3b16t1HUC',

C4 — c)UWtop C 1'C'Jtb,tO cþG'KmuqecK0ù 1Œcþop.,uagueù, C5 — ðuanop C 1ßJtbW)

OIÇ'H(BIHOÙ 11H(þopauatgueù. ()KOHqaHue dblnOJIHC'HUH       aac)t1H1dfl onpeòe„uwrn 9K.gaaueHamop. Bo ept'Mfl  .9,vnoù qacmu :-ycaaauew.' llòem nocm0flHH0'fl aanucb Ha ayòut»caccemy.

3anaunq  3K3aMenyeMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on the weekend. Remember to say:

      what you usually do at the weekend

      whether there's anything you don't like about the weekend

      which people you like to spend time with at the weekend, and why

      what your 'perfect weekend' is like

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

It's early evening. You are at the cinema. You want to see a film that starts within the next half an hour but you don't like love stories.


Before making a decision, ask the ticket salesperson about:

      films on this evening

      what kind of films they are

      what time they start

The teacher will play the part of the ticket salesperson and will speak first.

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on a film to see

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and your friend want to spend next Sunday at an adventure park doing a sport you've never done before. You are discussing which sport to do. Whichever sport you choose, all equipment will be provided and trained experts will make sure you are not in danger. You can go:

canoeing

      rock climbing

      mountain biking

      horse riding

      sailing

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

      discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions

come to an agreement


Test 9

-Tñèñt

 

anguageandiEžamSkillS eVélö

Section 1 Listening: first task Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: third task

A Look at the first task on page 102. Match the statements A-F to the following   C speakers.

1 Xhat is the name of the group?

1    'It's very important to them that I do well at school.'       Statement

2      What instrument does Ashley play?

3      What instrument does Yasmin plav?

4      Who wrote the band's new song?

5      What instrument does Mike play?

6      How does Mike get to

2    'They'd like me to be a doctor, but I want to be a teacher.'         Statement

3    'They always seem to be busy and never have time to listen.' Statement

4    'They think they can tell me who I can spend time with.'       Statement

5    'They've got experience and they're happy to give me advice.'          Statement

6    'I can't decide things for myself, and it's not fair!'       Statement

Section 2 Reading: third task





Quickly read the text on page 109, ignoring the gaps. Write a word or short phrase to answer each question.

the practice session?

D Read these sentences from the text and

B Quickly read the text on page 106. choose the correct answer. Look at the Decide if these statements are True (T)        text again and the options given in the or False (F).         task if necessary.

1    Ben is the writer's brother. TIF I Ashley Gray unlocked the door to the garage, swung it open and

2    The Sharpes lived next door to the ,421the lights on. writer in the past. TIF

A The garage is dark and Ashley makes 3 The writer's mother works as a it light. lawyer. TIF B The garage is light and Ashley makes 4 The writer is outside when the new it dark.

         neighbours arrive.                                TIF        2 It had been expensive and he was


5     The new neighbours arrive in a green car.      TIF

6     The writer introduces herself to

Ben.    TIF ,422  of the fact that he had earned the money to buy it himself without any help from his parents.

A    He feels good about buying it with his own money.

B     He feels bad about buying it with his own money.

3 'I printed out the song and

A23  at it briefly. Seems okay.'

A     He looked at the song for a short time.

B     He looked at the song for a long time.


Section 4 Writing: first task


E Read the first task on page 110 and write notes to complete the table for yourself.  Then interview a partner.

 

 

You

Your partner

How long have you been learning English?

Do you enjoy it? Why?

 

How do you learn new vocabulary?

watch TV / films in English find an English pen friend read books in English keep a diary in English read the dictionary every day go to an English-speaking country

read web pages in English on the Internet chat to your friends in English your own idea.'

watch TV / films in English find an English pen friend read books in English keep a diary in English read the dictionary every day go to an English-speaking country read web pages in English on the Internet chat to yourfriends in English your   idea:

What do you think are the best ways of learning English? Choose two.

Section 5 Speaking: third task

F    Complete the phrases using the words in the box.

1 1m  I don't agree because ... 5 Yes, 1 agree with you. 2 I agree up to a , but ... 6 Well, I agree to a  extent, but ...

3 That's a  point, and . 7 You right, and 4 1  to disagree with you.

G   Write each phrase in Exercise F in the correct column in the table.

agree

partly agree, partly disagree

disagree

 

 

 

                                       Pa3aeJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycabltuume 5 6b1CKa.3b1gauuÙ. Ycmanoaume coonwemcmeue Jteycòy BblCKC13b16aH11HJfU KWiCÒOU) 20601'Htueeo I — 5 u ymeepycòehlllfi.uu, ÒCIHHbLMU 6 cnucwe A — F. Kaycðyo õycay, ot503Haqwot10'1(' ymaepycòeHue, mo.'1bK0 oðtut pa.3. B aaðarauu ecntb oðHO autunee ymeep.wðeuue. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb ÒgaorÒb1. 3anecume coot' omaembl 6 maõaugy.

A. My parents don't give me a lot of freedom. B. I would like to spend more time with my parents. C. My parents put a lot of pressure on me to work hard. D. I have learned a lot from talking to my parents.

Test 9


E. My parents don't agree with my future plans. F. My parents try to choose my friends for me.

roBop¶11A111't

1

2                        3

4

5

Bbl yc.,qbltuume paaeoaop XO.3f1ÙKU òo.ua c paõotlll-u-cmpoumeae.u. Onpeòenume, KClKUe 11.3 npueeÒëHHblX ymoepYòeH11ð1 Al-A6 coomaemcmoyom coòepyamuo mt'Kt•ma (I ),         He coomeemcmayom (2) u o       6 meKcme He cwaaaH0, mo ecmb Ha OCH06ClHUU meyccma He.Qb3fl ()amb HI' nono.yumeJlbH020, Hil ompuuameJtbH0?0 omaema (3). Oõ6eÒume Ht).uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?O ea.uu gapuawna omeema. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanuctb ÒBCIYòb1.

           Al     There is a large garden at the back of the house.

                                   l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKœre He cw,13tlH0

          A2     Recent bad weather has caused the problem.

                                   l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO              3) B •rek'CTe He CKt13t1HO

A3 The builder says the work will take a long time. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B •reKCTe He CKa3t1H0

          A4    The home-owner is planning to build a new house.

                                   l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKcre He CKagaHO

          A5     The builder suggests that the home-owner put her ideas on paper.

                                    l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO               3) B TeKCTe He CKa3tiHO

          A6    The home-owner knows a good architect.

1)   BepHO          2) He13epH0          3) B TeKCTe He cKagaH0

Bbl ycabltuume BblCKa3b16UHUS1 :uoðeú e CCUII pau111¼HbLr cumya«unr. (_)moenwne Ha gonpocbl no coòepyamuo 6btcya.3b1aanuñ1, dblõpaa npeòaoyceH11bLM gapuaumoe omeema. B aaòaH11fLr Ä7-Ä13 oõeeòume I'll(þpy 1, 2 uau 3, oÕ03Haqayou0'h0 omeem, KO'110Pbl٠ߌu Kaycemcfl Hauóoaee eePHbL',t. Bbl ycatbtluume Kaycòoe 6blCKa.3bleaH1te ðeaycòbl.


You will hear a woman talking about a sport she is involved in. Why is the sport not more popular?

1)   The media tend to ignore it.

2)   Her team rarely wins any matches.

Test 9

3)  



Young people aren't interested in it.

AS

You will hear a radio commercial for a hotel. What is special about it?

I) The rooms are very cheap.

2)  The food is very good.

3)  The facilities are very impressive.

A9

You will hear a man talking about a decision by his local town council. How does the man feel about it?

1)                He disapproves of it.

2)                He is indifferent to it. 3) He approves of it.

AIO

You will hear a woman talking to a colleague. What is the problem with his work?

1)   He often arrives late.

2)   He often leaves early.

3)   He takes long breaks during the day.

All

You will hear a man talking about his hobby. What does he enjoy about it?

I) creating something beautiful

2)   spending time on his own

3)   displaying his things in galleries

A12

You will hear a woman talking about a recent accident. What was unexpected?

1)   the other driver's reaction

2)   the policeman's reaction

3)   her own reaction

A13

You will hear a man's opinion on whether 16-year-olds should be allowed to vote. What does he think about it?

l) He disapproves of the idea.

2)   He supports the idea.

3)   He is uncertain about it.

no Bl Il Al-A13 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CB01f OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB

ObPATLITE BHMMAHME, qmo omeenlbl nu aaòaH11f1 131, Al-A13 pacnoaaeŒomcH 6 pa,3HbLr qacmnr ã1ClHK•a. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HidYHeñ1 qacmu rî7é1HKa. TIPI/ nepe,qoce omgemoe 6 3ClÒaHUll Bl tîYK6b1 aanucbtgatomc•H õet3 npoõeaot$ u 3HüK06 npenuyumu.q.

                                             Pa3aeJ1          I-ITe1-me

YcmaH06ume coomaemcmaue me,vt A — G moccma.u I — 6. 3anecume c6011 omeembl e maõaugy.

A. EASY PICTURES B. EXPENSIVE MISTAKES

c. FUTURE POSSIBILITIES

D.     DREAM PAINTER

E.      ANIMAL ARTIST

F.       SHOCKING STYLE

           3                     4

6

 

and

a

art

years' artists

Test 9 á

G.    


STOLEN PAINTINGS

I

2

3

4

5

It was the kind of event that every museum has nightmares about. In 2004, two robbers threatened guards at the Munch Museum in Norway and took two Of Edvard Munch's pictures: The Scream Madonna. Munch was Norway's best-known artist and the two works are worth about $19 million together.

Congo's art is bought and sold by collectors. His paintings have been sold at auction for around $8,000 each. It doesn't sound out of the ordinary, until you hear that Congo was actually a chimpanzee. He produced abstract paintings in the late 1950s and a number of collectors are interested in his bright colours and bold splashes of paint. Congo died in 1964.

Jackson Pollock was famous for his action pictures, although many people say that it didn't take much artistic skill to produce them. Pollock would hang a bucket of paint on the end of a piece of rope over a canvas. As the bucket swung over the canvas, paint would fall through a hole, creating painting without Pollock having to do anything.

When buying a work of art, it's very important to be sure that it is genuine. Buying a fake work Of can cost you a lot of money that you will probably never get back. Some people make a living from copying famous works and selling them to unsuspecting collectors. To make sure that never happens to you, always have paintings you are thinking of buving checked out by an expert.

In these days of rapid change, it's not easy to predict what kind of art we will be enjoying in 50

time. Of course, traditional art and abstract art will still be around. However, we may find that prefer to work with computers more and more because of the control it gives them. We may even discover that computers are capable of creating art on their own.

6 In 19th century France, a group of artists appeared who are known as the Impressionists. Their art was very new and many people were shocked by their paintings when they first appeared. They were full of light, energy and ordinary life while the art world was used to formal paintings. Not everyone welcomed this new view of art at the time, although Impressionists such as Monet and Cézanne are very popular today.


Tlpoqumaùme vmaep.ycòeH11f1 1 — 6 u caeòyouguðl .3t1 HtLMU me,tccm Ycmcmoaume coomaemcmaue ate.ycðy ymaep.ycÒeH11f1.M11 u coòepyccmue.u meKcma. Hanutuume Igucþpy 1 — ec:lll ymaepycòeuue oepuoe, u tgucþpy O — ecatl ymoepycðeuue neoepltoe. 3aHecume ('6011 omaembl d maõautcy.

I People lived in Machu Picchu from 1440 to 1911.

2      The Incan Empire included the cehole of modern-day Chile.

3      The Incas lived in a simple society and only had basic skills.

4      IVE know Why the Incas disappeared.

5      Pizzarro persuaded Atahualpa to join his army.

6      The Spanish beat the Incas because they had better weapons.

High in the mountains of Peru can be found the ruins of the city of Machu Picchu, Built in around 1440, it was inhabited for nearly a hundred years and then was forgotten until it rediscovered in 1911. What is the story behind this amazing 'lost city'?

It was once lived in by a people called the Incas. The Incas started as a small group of people in the twelfth century AD, who built a city called Qosqo. From the middle of the fifteenth century onwards, the Incas began to take control of other They built a large empire, which included the modern-day countries of Peru, Ecuador and Bolivia and parts of Argentina, Chile and Colombia. They had a very developed society and were expert builders, engineers, artists and farmers. There one reason why they never grew further as a civilisation and why they disappeared: the Spanish arrived in South America

1532,

Francisco Pizzarro, a Spanish explorer, landed in Peru with hundred men, not nearly enough to beat the Incas. However, invited the ruler of the Incas, Atahualpa, to a meeting and captured him, later killing him and many members of the family. More people joined Pizzarro's army and the Incas gradually defeated. They lasted for approximately 40 years fought back against the Spanish, but the Incas were no match for European technology. Thev had never seen guns and cannons before and had nothing similar. The last Inca leader, Tupac Amaru, was finally killed in 1472.

When the Incas left Machu Picchu, nobody else knew it was there. In 1911, an American historian named Hiram Bingham was led to the site by people living in the area. Today, so many tourists visit Machu Picchu each year that there is a real that this amazing place could be damaged.

was

1

2

 

 

Test 9

[Ipoqumaùme meKcm 11 6b1/10AHume aaòaH11H A14-A20, otî60Òfi I'll(þpy 1, 2, 3 11,111 4, coomeemcmayouovo H0Jtepy 6btÕpaHHO?0 tsa•tu dapuanma omaema.

The first time I saw Ben was when his family moved in next door. It was a hot, sunny day and we'd heard that the new neighbours were arriving that day. Our old neighbours, the Sharpes, had moved out a couple of months before and, to be honest, we had not been sorry to see them go. They were an argumentative couple and once a month there would be one or other of them at the door, going on about noise, or our cat, or where Dad parked his car. We were all hoping that whoever moved in next would make a bit more of an effort to get on.


That morning, Mum and Dad were both busy on various projects of their own. With Mum, it was her ongoing attempt to turn herself into her idea of a traditional housewife, at least for a weekend. She was going through a baking phase so she spent hours in the kitchen making biscuits that were either too hard or too sweet for even my young taste. She had a successful career as a lawyer so she didn't take her domestic failure too badly. Dad was decorating one of the bedrooms. I was cycling up and down the street, looking for the removal van every time I reached the corner and turned back. I wanted to be the first to see it so that I could then be the one to dash inside with the news. Finally, a large green van with the words 'Baxter's Removals' in gold lettermg on the side turned into our street, followed by a blue car. I can't say that that was the moment when I first saw Ben, although I suppose I registered that there were people in the car. I was too busy dropping my bicycle by the side of the road and running into the house shouting, 'They're here! They're here!'

Mum wiped her hands on a towel and said, 'Yes, Katv. Let them settle in, though. We'll give them a few hours before we start bothering them, shall we?' I felt disappointed that her reaction wasn't more like my own. I ran back outside and down our garden path to the front gate. I stood on the gate, watching. By this time, the removal van and the car had both pulled up next door and two large workmen had begun to open up the back of the van. Inside were neatly packed items of furniture. The family had also got out of the car and were looking up at the house as if they'd never seen it before, although Dad said he'd seen them looking round when they were thinking of buying it. The man was tall and dark-skinned, while the woman was very beautiful and looked younger than my own mum. They were clearly enjoying the moment of arriving at a new place. A boy of about my own age stood between them, looking at me. He didn't smile.

They unlocked the door and went inside, the workmen following with the first of their belongings. I watched for a while as they came back and forth with boxes, banging them down noisily, occasionally pointing to tell each other where to put things. I had an odd feeling of being watched and something made me look up. At one of the windows stood the boy, looking down at me. I smiled and he disappeared into the room. I had had such high hopes, and now it seemed that it was going to take a lot of hard work to make friends. I sighed and watched the workmen a little longer. Just as I was thinking of going inside to see how Dad was getting on, I heard a small voice behind me.

'I'm Ben. Hello.'

I turned to see the boy standing behind me.

 

Test 9

 

 

A14

According to the writer, the Sharpes I) were very noisy neighbours.

2)   often found things to complain about.

3)   were sad to leave the street.

4)   came round with   advice.

 

-AIS

The writer says her mother

I) is annoyed that she has to work so much.

2)   doesn't know what her child likes to eat.

3)   tries to do something she isn't very good at.

4)   thinks that more women should have careers.

 

uA16

Judging from the text, the word 'dash' in paragraph 2 probably means

l) run very quickly. 2) write something down.

3)   make up a story.

4)   become excited.

 

Al 7

When the van finally arrives, the writer 1) is eager to tell her family what is happening.

2)   tries to follow it on her bicycle.

3)   sees Ben for the first time.

4)   falls over and hurts herself.

 

AIS

The writer's mother

l) decides to go to meet the new neighbours.

2)   feels as excited as the writer does.

3)   tells her to go and help the neighbours move in.

4)   suggests that she waits before going to introduce herself.

 

A19

The family stand outside the house looking at it because 1) they are not sure they're at the right house.

2)   they are happy to be moving into a new house.

3)   it's the first time they have seen it.

4)   they are trying to decide whether to buy it or not.

 

A20

The writer looks up to see the boy at the window because I) she hears a loud noise.

2)   the workmen point in that direction.

3)   she hears a voice from that direction.

 

 

4) she feels someone is looking at her.

pa.3Hb1.r qacnlftx t;aamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu Õaawca. 17pu nepeHoce omgemoa 6 aaòaH11fLr B2, B3 õYKßb1 aanucblBŒomcR õea npoõeaog u .3HZlK06 npenunaHllH.

                              Pa3aeJ1          rpaMMaTHKa JleKCHKa

 Test 9]


Ilpoqumaùme maccm 3anoanume nponycxu B npeòaoyceH11Œzr not) Ht).uepa.uu B4-B11 coomeemcmayot"ll.uu d)0PMŒvt11 CJZ06, HaneqamaHHb1.r .3aaqaßHb1-MU Õycaa.uu cnpaaa om ycaycÒO?O YIPeÒmyeHllfl.

B4

B5

B6

B8

BIO

Bil

Shoes

It's difficult to imagine life without shoes. Ever since people first started to make clothes, we  many different ways of protecting our feet. TRY

Early shoes  out of leather.

In those days, people's shoes were much simpler than are today.

They didn't have a heel and some shoes  very long toes     HAVE to show how important the wearer was.

In colder countries, moccasins           people's feet warm. KEEP This was  important in warmer countries than in colder  1-rrrLE countries, so open-toed sandals were more popular there.

Until 1790, you  fasten your shoelaces, because they hadn't CANNOT been invented yet! It was in that year that an Englishman came up with the idea for the first time.

Another thing we have today that people in the past  is      NOT DO different shoes for our left and right feet. They appeared in the middle of the 19th century.

 

 

Ilpoqumañme npueeòeHHb1ù Hil.ye meK•cm [Ipeoõpaayúme cv106a, HaneqamaHHb1e aa?JIC16Hb1.MU õycea.uu nocae H0Jtepot3 B 124318 maK, qmoÕbl OHU epaat.uamuqecwu u JWKC1tqeCKU coomøemcmß06aau coòepyamuo meŒccma. 3anoamume nponycwu 110.1VqeHHbLUU C.106ŒUU. Kaycòblù nponycK coomcemcmevem omòeJ1bHo„uy aaðamoo 11.3 epynnbl B12-B18.

 

 

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

BIT

BIS

London is one of the great cities of the world, and there is evidence that people lived in the area in      times. However, the history of the city really began with the of the Romans in 43 AD.

They built a wooden bridge over the River Thames. This bridge was very and soon the city of Londinium (as it was called) grew

around it. The city played an important role in the  life of the country, as it does today. The          of London since then

has been incredible, and the modern city is home to about 7.5 million From small beginnings nearly two thousand years ago,

London has become a place of                         importance.

HISTORY

ARRIVE

USE

ECONOMY

GROW

INHABIT

GLOBE

 

Test 9

 

 

 

 

 

npoqumaùme me,zccm c nponyæcaatll, OÕ03HaqeHHbLU11 Ho-uepa-&tu A21-A28. 3mu 110-uepa coon16emcn16.yŒom .421-A28, o Komopblx npeòcma(3aeHb1 60.3MOYCHbte eapualffllbl omeemoe. Oõßeòume HOMep 6b1ÕpaHHoeo BCLUII aapuawna omæma.

 

Ashley Gray unlocked the door to the garage, swung it open and A21  the lights on. A drum kit sat in the middle of the garage. Next to it there was a keyboard on a stand and to the side were three speakers. Ashley's group, Cat's Eye, had been using the garage to practise for a few months now. Ashley opened his guitar case and took his guitar out. It had been expensive and he was

A22  of the fact that he had earned the money to buy it himself without any help from his parents. He plugged it into an amplifier and began to tune the strings.

'Did you get my e-mail?' Ashley turned to see where the voice had come from and saw Yasmin, the band's drummer, in the doorway.

'Yes,' he replied. 'I printed out the song and A23  at it briefly. Seems okay.' In fact,

Ashley knew that it was one of the best that Yasmin had written, but he wasn't going to A24 it straight away.

'Where's Mike?' asked Yasmin. Ashley shrugged his shoulders. Mike was always late for practice, but he was the best keyboard player they knew. For now, his position in the band was safe, but Ashley was beginning to find his attitude annoying. Each time it happened, Mike A25 that it wouldn't happen again, but it always did. Ashley had even considered putting an ad for a new member in the local paper, but hadn't gone through with it. The three of them A26 on reasonably well together and they were beginning to build a small but loyal group of fans. Ashley had a feeling that real success was just around the corner and he had no A27 of doing anything that would threaten that possibility.

The sound of a motorbike engine told Ashley andYasmin that Mike had arrived. A moment later, he strode into the garage.

'You're A28  time for once,' Yasmin said, and smiled. Mike smiled back.

'Yeah. My watch must be fast.' A minute later, they were playing the new song and Ashley knew that it was going to be big.

 

 

 

 

 

 

A21                  1) made                  2) operated           3) turned              4) opened

A22                   1) satisfied               2) happy                 3) pleased             4) proud

A23                   1) viewed                2) observed            3) glanced             4) glimpsed

A24                   1) confess                2) allow                 3) agree                 4) admit

A25                  I) gave                     2) put                    3) said                  4) took

A26 1) went 2) got 3) brought 4) came A27 1) plan 2) intention 3) idea 4) aim

A28                  1) at                        2) with                  3) on                    4) into

no        134-1318, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOII OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, timo on16en1b1 Ha 3CIÒCIH11f1 B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacnoaaecuomcfl 6 pa.3HbLr Ltacnmx õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHbl B HilYCHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoß

 

Test 9

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                              Pa3neJ1        IIHCbMO

                CT, C2 ucn0Jlb3Yùme WIAHK OTBETOB N2.

[7pu Bbl'10JIHeH11U aaðaH11ù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HlL.uaHlde oõpamume Ha mo, qmo eatuu omeenlbl õyðvm moabK0 no aanucmt, B K'7AHKE OTBETOB Y2. HilKaK1te aanucu qepH0611R•a He õyòym yqun1b1e,aÐ1bcf1 .9Kcnepmo.u.

Tlpu aanomtotuu Ik7AHKA OTBETOB ycaycume cnaqaaa H0.uep CI, C2 aamt'M aanutuume C60ù omaem Ecau cmop0Hbt t5aaHR•a Heòocmamot1H0, Obi *toyeme ucno,lbaoøamb ()pyeyo cmopouy õaawca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from Claudia, your German pen friend.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many people argue that ordinary people can do a lot to help the environment, including recycling materials and preventing waste. However, this depends on towns providing facilities for recycling and educating people on the need to help the environment, which some people think is too expensive,

Do you think your town does enough to            Use the following plan support people who want to help the        I. Introduction (State the problem).

              environment?                                                            2. Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

Write 200-250 words.                                               3. Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.

4. Conclusion.

                                     Pa3aeJ1       1'0BopeHne

Bbl noayqume Kapmot1KY, Ha Komopoù mpu aac)01H11+1   ycmH0?0 omaema: C3 — meuamuqeocoe MOHOJIO?UtWCKOe 6b1Ci•ca.3b16aHue,

C4 — c)uaaoe c lgeabR) OÕ.ueHCl cþeucmuqeucoðl uucþop.ltatgueù, C5 — c)uaat)? c lge.tbJ0 ot;.uena

OLßHO¼Hoðl llHcþopua«ueÙ. OKOHtlCtHUe ,tcayòozo aaÒaH11H onpeòeaqem 9K.3Œueuamop. Bo epe.MH npoeeòeH11H qacmu 3K.3Œ$teua uÒem nocn10HHHZlH aanucb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

3aaaH11S1 3K3aMeHveMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on hobbies. Remember to say:

      what hobbies are popular today

      what hobbies you have

      how much time you spend on your hobbies

      why you enjoy those hobbies

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You would like to buy a ticket to a pop concert this weekend by your favourite singer. You need a seat on the balcony and can only spend £15.

Ask the box-office attendant questions about:

      available tickets

      the ticket price

      the length of the concert

The teacher will play the part of the boxoffice attendant and will speak first.

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      buy a ticket on the balcony

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

Your class at school is planning a school trip. You and a friend have been asked to decide where to go. You can go to a:

      museum

      factory

      sports stadium

      beach

• farm

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

*       discuss all the options take an active part in the conversation and be polite

*       come up with ideas

*       give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: second task

A     Listen and circle the number or phrase that has a similar meaning to what you hear.

I 5.30 am/ 4.30 am

2   6.45 / 7.15

3   5.30 / 6.30

4   8.40 9.20

5   4.35 / 5.25

6   3 am / 3 pm

7   Il am / Il pm

  8 under 300 / under 400

9 under £500 under £600

10 650 / 6.5

11 91/2 / 91/4

12 2.4 / 2.25

13  81/4 / 8 3/4

14  2.3 / 2/3

15  3.4 / 3/4

Section 2 Reading: third task

B  Quickly read the text on page 118 and make notes to answer these questions.

I  Who does Julie work for?

2  What problem has Julie had for several days?

3  What time is Julie's appointment?

4  Is that while Julie is supposed to be at work?

5  What does Mrs Worthington notice when she looks at Julie?

6  Does Mrs Worthington let Julie go to her appointment?  

C 


Read the text again and find words or phrases that have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.

I  very fast 

2  the thing you should view as most important  

3  difficult 

4  just 

5  very strong, very serious 6 probable

7  strength, power   

8  formed the wrong opinion about  

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

first task

D  Read through the first task on page 120 and answer these questions for each item B4-B11.

I  (B4) What kind of word usually comes before the word 'than'?

a comparative I superlative adjective or adverb

2   (B5) Complete the table for the verb 'do' when it is a main verb.

3   (B6) What is the main verb of this sentence?

wear I dress

4   (B 7) What tense do we use to talk about general truths?

present simple I present progressive

5   (B8) What tense do we use to talk about a completed action at a specific time in the past?

past simple I past progressive

6   (B9) Complete the table for the verb

'bring'.

bare infinitive        bring past simple past participle       

7   (BIO) Complete the table for the verb

'be'.

bare infinitive        be past simple past participle

8   (Bll) Which tense do we often use with

the word 'now'?

present simple I present progressive

Section 4 Writing: second task

Read the second task on page 122.

Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F).

When you write your composition, you should:

1    make sure you answer the question.

2    make a plan before you start writing.

3    copy whole sentences from the question.

4    use informal grammar and vocabulary.

5    use words and phrases such as

'however', 'such as', etc.

6    express your own opinion in the conclusion.

7   


give examples where possible.

8    present a logical argument. 9 always use very short and simple sentences.

10 make sure your handwriting is readable.

Il check your work carefully for mistakes at the end.

Section 5 Speaking: third task

F    Write a word from the box in each gap to complete these phrases.

about • best • do • don't idea • let's sure • thing • think • wonder

1  1 if we should .

2  Maybe the best  would be to ...

3  Why  we ... ?

4  What do you think

5  I think the  thing might be to .

6  I'm not  I agree, to be honest. 7 I don't  we should .

8         I'm not convinced it's a good  because ...

9          think about

10    So,  we agree?

G  Work in pairs to carry out the activity below. Use the phrases from Exercise F to help you.

 You and your partner are friends. You have another friend, called Catherine, whose birthday is next week. You want to get her a present together. You can get:

*    • a necklace

*    a CD

*    a book

Discuss the possibilities. Try to reach agreement at the end.


Test 10

Pa3aeJ1

Bbl ycalbltuume 5 BblCKTh3b16CIHUÙ. Ycmanoaume coomeemcmeue .ueycc)y dblCKaab16(1H11fiJfll eooopmgeeo 1 — 5 u ymeepyòeuumtu, C)CIHHbL1tU (3 cnucxe A — F. Mcnoa1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õYK6)'s oõ03Haqawugyo .ymaepycòeuue, mœ1bR0 oðun paa. B aaðauuu ecntb oðHO autuuee ymeep.ycðenue. Bbl ycabtluume aanucb ÒoaycÒbl. 3anecume ('6011 ome,embl d maõautcv.

A. I'm always very careful about what I eat. B. I don't eat any meat at all.

C. I don't put on weight, even if I eat a lot. D. I'm trying to lose weight at the moment.


E. I always have a large breakfast. F. I'm not a very healthy eater.

F0BopH11U1ñ

YTBepxneH11e

1

2

3                                4

5

 

 

 

Kaycue 11.3 ,'1P116eÒëHHbLV ymoepycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomeemcmøyom coòep.vcamøo mexcma (I), KCIKUe

He coomgemcmayom (2) u o LlëM 6 meyccme ne c,çaaauo, mo ecmb Ha OCHOBCIHUII mexcma HW1b.3H ()amb Hid nono.ycumeJ1bHo¿o, Hil omt$ema (3). ()õaeòume H0Jtep 6btt5PCIHHO?0 6ŒM11 gapuanma omeema. Bbl ycvlblluume aanucb ()6ClYCÒbl.

 

Al The woman prefers Montreal to Vancouver. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B ereKC"re He

A2 How much the flight costs might affect when the woman travels. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B •reK'c-re He cK"d3'dH0

         A3    There is a flight at 6.30 am on 10th September.

                                 I) BePHO                2) HeBepH0              3) B TeKCTe He CKŽBIIHO

A4 The woman has spent the night in an airport before. I) BePHO 2) HeBepH0 3) B TeKC"l'e He CKa3ŽIHO

         A5    The flight on 17th September is more expensive than the flight the day before.

1)  BepHO    2) HeBepHO          3) B TeKc•re He L'Ka3auo

         A6    The woman decides to book flights that cost under £700.

                                 l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKcere He

 

Bbl ycJ1b11uume õeceðy mpenepa cþymõo„lbH0ù       c 112POKOM. B aaðaH11f1.r A 7-A13 oõeeòume gucþpy 1, 2 11.1113, coomoemcmayougyo 6b1õpaHH0.uy 6ŒU11 aapuamny omeema. Bbl yc„lbltuume aanucb c)ga.ycÒbl.

Mr Davenport wants to

1) give Adrian his training plan and schedule.

2) show Adrian around the football club.

3) talk to Adrian about his new job at the club.

Adrian is asked to

1)   inform Mr Davenport before giving an interview.

2)   take an interest in what the media says about him.

3)   always remember how famous and successful he is.

Adrian makes it clear that he

I) had not realised he would have to give interviews.

2)  will talk to Mr Davenport before talking to a journalist. 3) is not going to do any interviews with journalists.

SIO If a company asks Adrian to advertise its product, Adrian I) must discuss the situation with Mr Davenport first.

2)   must first make a new contract with the football club.

3)   might want to benefit from Mr Davenport's knowledge.

Al 1 Adrian doesn't need any more information about

l) his training schedule.

2)   his accommodation.

3)   the payment of his salary.

A12 Mr Davenport says they do not usually pay players

1)   in cash.

2)   by cheque.

3)   through their bank accounts.

A13 Adrian chooses to be paid every 1) week.

2)   two weeks.

3)   month.

110 Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ltmo omaembt Ha .3aÒaHUfl BI u Al-A13 pacnoaaewomcq 6 pa.3HbLt qacm.qx Õaamca. BI pacnoaoyeH0 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu ÕJICIHKa. Ilpu nepeHoc•e ome,emoa 6 aaòcmuu BI õYK6bl t;ea npoõeJ106 u JHWC06 npenllHaH11H.

                                          Pa3neJ1        Llrrerme

Mcnoabayúme KW*CÒVIO t5ycay moat,K0 oÒuH paa. B aaðtmuu oÒ1ta me.'ta JIUIUHHH.

A. EXPENSIVE EQUIPMENT B. CONFUSING RULES

c. NO WINNERS OR LOSERS

D.     LEARNING AND ENJOYMENT

E.      IN CONTROL

F.       A MAJOR EVENT

G.     A DANGEROUS ACTIVITY

I In football and rugby it's the 'referee', in tennis and cricket it's the 'umpire'. Whatever name each sport decides to give to this particular person, their role is essentially the same. They are in charge. They start and stop the game, they make sure the players follow the rules, and thev have the power to make decisions when there are disagreements between players on opposing teams. With this power comes responsibility, however, and referees and umpires must be equally fair to both teams.

No •rewra

1

2

3

4

5

6

2    


The most important game in American football each year is the Super Bowl. This is the final Of the National Football League, which is held either on the last Sunday of January or the first Sunday of February. This championship game is so popular in the States that it's always one of the most watched TV shows of the year. At any one moment during the game, approximately 80 to 90 million Americans are watching it on TV!

3     Motorcycle racing has been popular with riders and spectators alike for about a hundred years. The high speeds at which the riders go, however, can sometimes lead to disaster. For example, on the Isle of Man, which is a small island between England and Ireland, an annual motorcycle race called the Isle of Man has been held since 1907. The roads and tracks which the riders race on are extremely narrow, increasing the chances of accidents. Since the race started, almost 180 riders have been killed while racing there.

4     If you ask most people why they choose to do a particular sport, they'll probably tell you it's because it's fun and gives them pleasure. They might also say that it helps keep them fit. Another major benefit of team sports such as football, basketball, cricket and rugby is that they can teach us to work together as a group. This is particularly useful for children, who can then use the skills they have learnt while doing sports in their working and social lives as adults.

5     Although most sports are competitive, involving individuals or teams trying to be better than their opponents, recreational fishing is quite different. Whether you're salt-water fishing in the sea, or fresh-water fishing in a river or lake, whether vou're on your own or with other people, fishing is about relaxation, enjoyment and the occasional moment of excitement. There are no prizes for catching the most or the biggest fish, and no one goes home at the end of the day thinking they've lost. It's not that kind of sport.

6     The games snooker and pool, both of which involve hitting balls into pockets on a table covered with material, are extremely popular in the UK, and many pubs have either a pool or a snooker table. If you want to play at home, though, it can be costly. A full-size professional snooker table can cost several thousand pounds — the price of a new car, in other words — and a good 'cue', which is the name of the stick used to hit the white ball, can cost several hundred pounds.

Test 10

Ilpoqumaùme ymeepYðeH11f1 1 — 6 u caeòyouguù aa HILUII meyccm YcmaH06ume coomeemcmeue Meycòy _vn16epYðeHllflAtll u coòepyaktuey,t mexcma. Hamuuume Igucþpy 1 — ec:lll _vmaepycòutue eepnoe, u I'll(þpy O — ecau ymeepycòeHue Heeepnoe. 3cmecume ceou omaenlbl 6 maõau«y.


1    Roald book

2    Matilda's is usually her.

3    Mrs to parents

4    Both children film

5    The different book.

6    The the famous

Dahl wrote a called Matilda.

brother Mikey very kind to

Trunchball is nicer

Matilda than her are.

adults and will find this funny.

is in a very style to the

person who wrote screenplay is also a film director.

Several of Roald Dahl's children's books, including James and the Giant Peach and Charlie and the Chocolate Factory, have been made into successful films.

The film Matilda, directed by and starring comic actor Danny DeVito, is based on the Roald Dahl book of the same name and is perhaps the most successful adaptation of them all.

Mara Wilson stars as Matilda, a sweet and intelligent six-and-ahalf-year-old girl whose parents (Danny DeVito and Rhea Perlman) treat her terribly. When they're not ignoring her, thev're mean and rude to her, and make her life a misery, as does her horrible brother Mikey (played by Brian Levinson).

Matilda is desperate to go to school and eventually her parents send her to Crunchem Hall, where the evil headmistress Mrs Trunchball (brilliantly played by Pam Ferris) treats her worse — if that's possible — than her family does at home.

Matilda has friends at school, though, including her kind teacher Miss Jenny Honey (played by Embeth Davidtz), and she soon discovers she has some strange powers which enable her to fight back against the people who want to harm her.

Although Matilda, which was originally released in 1996, is a highly amusing children's movie, much of the humour will appeal to adults too and the film is extremely well directed and acted. As a director, DeVito manages to capture completely the tone and stvle of the original book. Indeed, this is one of the rare occasions where the film of a book is equally good, if not better. The screenplay was written by Nicholas Kazan, son of the famous film director Elia Kazan.

1

2

           3                    4

              5                         6

 

The film is also known as Roald Dahl's Matilda in some countries.


Test 10

17poqumaùme mewcm u 6btnoauume 3K1òaH1ffl A14-A20, oõß0ðfl 1411Cþpy 1, 2, 3 Will 4, coomeemcn16Y0110'10 Ho.uepy 6b1õpaHH0?0 ea.uu eapuamna omeema.

Although Julie had been with Mrs Worthington just three days, she had already learnt that her boss was the kind of person one had to be careful with. Her changes of mood could be rapid, she definitely did not tolerate failure, laziness or poor work and she firmly believed that everyone's highest priority should be their work for the company. Julie was enjoying her job as Mrs Worthington's personal secretary, but she knew that today would be tough.

For several davs, Julie had been experiencing toothache. At first, it was merely a minor annoyance that could be ignored. 'It'll probably go away by itself,' Julie told herself. 'If not, I'll see the dentist when I'm more settled here at work. It's not that urgent.'

It didn't disappear, however, and after an extremely uncomfortable night, Julie awoke to severe dental pain. 'That's just what I need,' she said to herself. 'Maybe I can get a dentist's appointment for this evening, after work.'

Julie called the dentist's. 'I'm afraid the only time the dentist has available today is at 3.30 pm this afternoon,' said the receptionist. Julie had to make an immediate decision. 'I'll take it,' she said. The question was, how was Mrs Worthington going to react? Would she say, 'Of course you can leave early, Julie. In fact, leave at lunchtime and don't come back until you're completely better.'? Julie knew a far more likely response would be something along the lines of: 'Well, that really is most inconvenient. Couldn't you have arranged to see the dentist in your own time? You have to think about the company as well, you know. We can't all take time off whenever we feel like it. We'd never get any work done if we all spent the day running around seeing doctors and dentists. Can't you change the time of your appointment?'

The pain was increasing in intensity, though, and Julie knew she had to see a dentist today. If the only solution was to leave work early and face Mrs Worthington's displeasure, then so be it.

'Here's your coffee, Mrs Worthington,' said Julie, as she went into her boss' office for the first time that morning.

'Thank you, Julie,' said Mrs Worthington, without looking up. 'Don't forget I need those reports typed up by three o'clock at the latest. I've got a meeting with Mr Price this afternoon.'

'Yes, Mrs Worthington. I've nearly finished them. Umm , .. Sorry, Mrs Worthington, but I wonder if I could ask you something. It's quite important.'

'What is it, Julie?' She looked up from the documents she'd been studying, and without giving Julie a chance to reply, said: 'Oh my goodness! What's happened to your face? It's all swollen on one side. Are you all right?'

'I've got really bad toothache, Mrs Worthington. I called the dentist and tried to make an appointment for this evening but the only time he can see me is at half past three and I know that would mean leaving early but I don't know what else .

'Stop!' said Mrs Worthington. 'I quite understand. These things have to be dealt with or they only get worse, don't they? Get it sorted out, as quickly as possible.' 'Thank you, Mrs Worthington.'

'Do you think you can work this morning, Julie? If you can't, tell me and we'll find a solution. If vou can, just finish those reports as quickly as you can and then go home. Have you taken anything for it, by the way?'

'No, I haven't. I think I'd better wait as the dentist will probably have to give me an anaesthetic and you have to be a bit careful, don't you? But, yes. I can definitely stay and finish the reports. It's not that bad.'

'Well, it looks bad enough. I do appreciate it, Julie. I really do.'

As Julie returned to her desk, she wondered if she hadn't misjudged Mrs Worthington. 'I couldn't have asked for a more understanding person to work for — this morning, at least,' she said to herself, and smiled, despite the pain.

no        B2, B3 U A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE 11EPEHECTn OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB   !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo omaenlbl Ha 3aÒCIH11H B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacno.Qt1?ŒomcH B pa.3Hb1X qacmnx t5aamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu õaamca. Ilpu nepeHoce omeem06 B aaòammr B2, B3 õYK6b1 aanucbtacnomcfl õe.3 npoõe.106 u .3HCIK06 npenunaH11f1.


Tesl 10

A14

Julie knows that Mrs Worthington

l) thinks all of her staff are lazy and bad at their work.

2)   is only in a good mood for a few minutes each day.

3)   thinks that Julie is not hard-working enough.

4)   wants Julie to put her work before everything else.

315

When Julie says 'That's just what I need', she

l) means the opposite of what she says.

2)   is being optimistic about the situation.

3)   is trying to pretend she is okay.

4)   suggests she has found a solution.

Julie expects Mrs Worthington to respond by I) suggesting Julie sees a doctor instead.

2)   allowing Julie to leave work early.

3)   criticising Julie for being selfish.

4)   telling Julie to stop complaining.

SA17

Mrs Worthington doesn't look at Julie because she is busy I) drinking a cup of coffee.

2)   talking to Mr Price.

3)   typing some reports.

4)   looking at some documents.

LAI 8

Mrs Worthington interrupts Julie to

1)   give her permission to see the dentist.

2)   tell her to leave the building immediately.

3)   express her displeasure at what she said.

4)   find out some more information from her.

i819

Mrs Worthington asks Julie whether she 1) can think of a solution to the problem.

2)    has taken any medicine for the pain.

3)    has already finished typing the reports.

4)    can tell her what work has to be done.

ŽA2()

When Julie leaves Mrs Worthington's office, she

l) feels that she hadn't misjudged Mrs Worthington after all.

2)   wonders why she'd misjudged Mrs Worthington so badly.

3)   recognises some good qualities in Mrs Worthington.

4)   wishes Mrs Worthington had been more understanding.

Tlpoqumañme npueeðeHHb11i HilYCe    npeoõpaayùme ca.oaa, HaneqamaHHbte t5YK6Œ8f11 nocae HOMÚ'POB B12-B18 maK, qmoÕbl OHU epa-wtamuqecK11 u neKC11tWCKU coomgemcmeoeaau coòep.ycaH1t+0 me,zccma. 3anoamtme nponycKll caogaatll. Kaycòblù nponycK coomaemcmavem omòevQbH0J1.v .3aòaHl/*0 epynnbl B12-B18.

Test 10

 

Do you have to wear a uniform at school or can you wear what you like?

 

 

Many people believe that uniforms are         than casual clothes for children at school.

Uniforms remind the children that they have to follow rules at school.

GOOD

 

Casual clothes                             this.

NOT DO

B6

With all the children at school           the same clothes, children from rich families dress the same way as children from poorer families,

WEAR

 

A uniform also           a feeling that everyone at the same school is part of the same community.

CREATE

B8

In the 1960s and 1970s, many schools in Britain     having a school uniform because of the expense for parents.

STOP

B9

Since then, however, a number of these schools      uniforms back.

Their new uniforms are more comfortable and more fashionable than

BRING

BIO

uniforms                            forty years ago.

They're so popular that many of the head teachers at schools without

BE

Bll

uniforms                             now about bringing uniforms back there too.

THINK


                           Pa3neJ1       rpaMMaTHKa W JleKCWKa

Ilpoqumaúme meKcm 3anoamune nponycKt1 npeòaoyceuunr not) H0Jtepaatu B4-B11    cþOPJta.Mll celOB, HaneqamaHHb1-v 3aaqa6Hb1.M11 ÕVKea.U11 cnpaea om KaycÒ020 npeòao.yceH11f1.

School Uniforms

Test 10

Ilpoqumaùme moccm c nponycycaM11, OÕ03HaqeHHbLUU HO.uepŒuu A21-Ä28. 3mu H0Jtepa coomeemcmcvwm aaÒaH11fLU .421-A28, d KomopbLr npeòcmaœl&tbt 60X1tOYCHbte aapuahtmbl omeemoe. Otîeeðume H0.uep 6b1ÕpaHHOZ0 ga.',fll eapuamna 01116ema.

The main argument used against the space programme is that the enormous amount of money it costs could be better spent on solving problems such as poverty and environmental damage here on Earth. Initially, this view A21  persuasive, particularly when confronted with how huge the amounts of money we are talking about actually are. Surely, the argument goes, if, instead of sending hundreds of billions of dollars up into space for a pointless walk on the Moon or a few glossy colour photographs of Mars, we channelled the funds into A22  projects on our own planet, we could solve all the world's problems in about as short a time as it A23 for the space shuttle to circle the globe.

How appealing and — perhaps sadly — how untrue. The fallacy of that argument is in the idea that all of the money allotted to the space programme is wasted in space. It isn't. None of the money goes into space at A24  . It stays right here on Earth and is fed back into the economv. Take the astronauts and tens of thousands of other people who are involved in whatever way with the space programme. They spend their salaries — and pay tax on them — here on Earth. That tax is used by governments to do a number of important things: build hospitals and schools,

A25  pensions, pay for the police service and, yes, fund the space programme. Take

the cost of all the spacecraft, the technology inside them and the research that's done to create that technology. All of that money goes to companies here on Earth, companies which pay tax if they A26  a profit, and pay salaries to their workers, who then pay tax to the government, which builds hospitals, etc.

Looking at it the other way round, what would happen if all the governments in the world which have a space programme A27  their programmes down tomorrow? Would they have a lot more money to spend on other things? Onlv for a very short time, because along with the

A28                          savings there would be enormous costs from the increased unemployment and


reduction in taxes received.

A21                 1) sees                     2) sounds             3) views               4) hears

A22                   1) generous              2) pleasant             3) worthwhile       4) optimistic

A23                  1) takes                    2) needs                 3) lasts                  4) spends

A24                  1) once                    2) best                  3) last                   4) all

A25                 1) provide               2) donate               3) contribute      4) sponsor

A26                  l) make                   2) build                 3) construct         4) manufacture

A27                  1) finished               2) ended                 3) turned               4) closed

A28                  1) urgent                2) immediate        3) hurried            4) fast

OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB

ObPATMTE BHJ4MAHIfE, qmo omeembl Ha B4-B18 11 A21-A28 pacnoaapa,romcq 6 pat3HbLr qacmm• ÕaaHKŒl. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb1 e HilYCHeÚ qacmu Õaamca. 111911 nepenoce ome,em06 6 aaòcmuŒLv B4-B 18 tîVK6bt  tîe.3 npoõeaocs u 3,tlClR06 npenunaH11f1.

                                         Pa3aeJ1      TIVICbMO

         0111601106        Ha aaðauu.q CI, C2 ucno-Qb3Yùme WIÄHK OTBETOB X2.

Ilpu BbtnovlHC'HUU aaðtmuù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHILVtCIHUC' oõpamume Ha mo, Limo gatuu omaenlbl õyòym o«eHU6an1bCH movibK0 no aanucxu, cðeaaHHb1.M B WIAHKE OTBETOB 'E2. flurccucue aanucu qepH0ßurca He õvòvm yttunlblßantbc•fl .9Kcnepmo.u.

aamuuume ceoù omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hbl Õaamca Heòocmamot1H0, Bbl euoyeme ucnoab.306an1b òpypyo cmop0HY t;aawca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

Test 10


This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

...Guess what! I'm ill with chickenpox and the doctor says / have to stay iM bedfor at (east the next two weeks. It's awful! Haveyou ever had to stay iM bedfor a (eng time becauseyou were ill'? How am lying topass the time?   bored! what can /        two weeks bed? I'm a             too. How    catch up?

Write soon,

Love,

Andrea

 

Write back to Andrea answering her questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many young people go to university after leaving school. However, a number of school-leavers feel that university is not for them and choose not to go.

What can you say for and against going to Use the following plan university? 1. Introduction (State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.

Test 10

                                Pa3aeJ1        roBopeHvte

Bbl noayqume Kapmowcy, Ha Komopoù npeÒcmaeaeHb1 mpu aac)cmun omegema:

C3 — mewltamuqecwoe                                           6b1CKa,3b1eaH11e,

C4 — c)uaaop C            oõJteHð1 cþcucmuqecK0ù llHcþopMa«ueð1, C5 — ÒuŒQ02 C lge.'Zb10 or5MC?Ha

01ßHot1Hí)ù uutþop.uagueù. OKOHtlClHlle KaycÒO?O aaòaH11H onpeòeanem .9K3ŒueHamop. Bo ape.}tH npoaeðeHllH .Оnoù qacmu 3K.3ŒueŒ-ža nocm0HHHCIH aanucb Ha avò110Kaccemy.


3aaaH11¶

STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on where you live.

Remember to say:

      what kind of building (house, flat, etc) you live in

      who you live with

      what the neighbourhood is like

      whether you like where you live

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she Will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are in an electronics shop and are looking at the mobile phones. You want to buy a mobile phone which costs not more than £100 and which you can use to take photographs.

Before making a decision, ask the shop assistant about:

             mobile phones available

             a camera being included

             other features included

            


the cost

3K3aMeHyeMOro

The teacher will play the part of the shop assistant and will speak first. Remember to:

             be active and polite

             get all the information you need  make a decision

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and your friend have won a competition. The prize is some money to spend on equipment for your school. You and your friend are discussing what to spend the money on. You can afford:

             a computer (with monitor and printer)  a widescreen TV and DVD player • new furniture for your classroom

             200 books for the school library

             a top-quality CD player plus 30 CDs The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement


Test 11

ment

 

Section 1 Listening: second task

C Find words or phrases in the texts to match these words and phrases.

A       Look at the second task on page

126. For each statement, you will hear

 

Text 1

 

two extracts (A and B). Circle the

I

understanding

extract which means that the statement

2

most successful

is true.

1 (Al) The man is staying for less

          than a week.                                       A

B

3

4

easiest parts

Text 2 on the Internet

2      (A2) The man has been to this house before.  A

3      (A3) They decide to go sightseeing

B

5

6

quickly sudden increase

         together the next day.                       A

B

 

Text 3

 

4 (A4) The theatre is near the

 

7

unusual success

         museum.                                               A

5 (AS) The bookshop is in the centre

B

8

success

Text 4

         of town.                                              A

B

9

was clearly the best at

6 (A6) They arrange to meet at the

 

10

beat

 

         Railway Café.                                       A B

11

groups

Section 2 Reading: first task

 

Text 5

 

 

12

stop existing

B Look at the task on page 128. Use the

13

free-time activities

headings A-G to complete the sentences below.

 

Text 6

 

 

14

had been created in

 

1 The rules of chess are  , but becoming good at it takes years.

15 the only one of its kind

2 In chess, the Queen is  and is

16 ordinary                              

worth a lot more than the other pieces.

D Use some of the words and phrases you

3 Kasparov is a great chess player and is

found in Exercise C to complete these sentences.

4 The popularity of chess is

I Tim beat me five times, but I finally

and lots of people play it these days.

 him and won the last game.

5 Ron had only just learnt how to play, but

2 Flying over the Grand Canyon was a

he was  in the chess

 experience.

tournament.

3 I'm just going to go  and

6 Good chess clubs in this area are

check my e-mail.

 and soon there won't be any.

4 My grandfather taught me the

7 Leaving your King in the middle of the

              of judo when I was a young

board in chess can be  — never

boy,



angüäWd EžäiñSQitlš •eVé10

do it!


5     1'm a bit disappointed because my grades this year have been very

6     1'd love to have a  and become a famous singer!

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: second task

E    Quickly read the second text on page 132 and answer these questions.

1    When was Marlon Brando born?

Section 4 Writing: second task

2   
Was he a good student at school?

3    In which city did he study acting?

4   


Whose ideas about acting did he learn about?

5    Which film made him a star?


F     Look at the second task on page 134. Make notes to complete the essay plan, using the questions to help you. Remember to use your own words. When you have finished, work in pairs to compare your plans.

Structure

Questions

My essay

Introduction

(State the problem).

Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.

Make a conclusion.

What is the problem? What do some people think? What do other people think?

Are you in favour or against? What are the most important two/three reasons for your opinion?

What are the two/three most important arguments against your opinion? IV71Y is each one wrong?

IV7zat is the gist ofyour argument? Hou can you summarise it?

 

Section 5 Speaking: warm up

G Make notes to answer these questions, then work in pairs to interview your partner. Make a note of their answers.

 

You

Your partner

What's your favourite food?

Is there anything you can cook?

Do you like going out to eat? Why?

 

 

                                        Pa3neJ1        AYAHl)0BaHne

Bbl ycalblluume 5 6b1cxa.3b1t;anuñ. YcmaH061tme coomgemcmt311e .&teycðy t3b1CRU3blŒaHlfflJt11 KLIYCÒO?O ?060pmueeo I — 5 u ymeepycòeH11f1.uu, ()aHHbLUU 6 cnucxe A — F. Mcno,1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õYK6Y, oõ03Haqa10t«yo ymgepycòeHtte, moat'KO OÒ"H pa.3. B aaðmtuu ecnlb oÒH0 auuutee ymaepoeðeuue. Bbl VCJ1b11uume aanuct, Ò6aYÒbl. 3Œecume ('6011 on16en1b1 6 maõnutgy.

A. I like this writer because he she has unusual ideas. B. I have read all this writer's books more than once. C. I think this writer understands how young people feel. D. I like this writer because his/her books are very funny.

Test 11


E. I like this writer because his/her books have helped me at school. F. This writer has helped me choose my future career.

roßopquutli

1

2

3           

4                        5

YTBepx;ueHne

 

Bbl ycabltuume pauoaop X03HÙKU c)0Ata c npuexa6tulL$t 6 eocmu c)pypo.vt ceMb11. OnpeÒeaume, KCIKUe 113 npugeÒëHHblX ymeepycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomeemcnwv,tom coòepyct1H11'0 moccma (1 ), ,tccncue He coomaemcmeyom (2) u o tiëM 6 mt'Kcme He cycaaaHO, mo ecnlb Ha OCH06CIHU11 meyccma

c)amb HI' nonoycumeJ1bH0?0, Hil omeema (3). Oõaeòume HO-MCP 6b1ÕPCIHHO?O gaatu 6apua,qma omcema. Bbl ycnbtzuume aanucb t)eaYCÒbl.

 

             Al     The man is staying for less than a week.

                                      l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0              3) B •rewre He CKtt3aHO

             A2     The man has been to this house before.

                                       l) BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKc•re He cw13t1H0

A3 They decide to go sightseeing together the next day. I) BepH0 2) HeBepH0 3) B TeKc rre He CKa3,2HO A4 The theatre is near the museum.

                                      I) BepHO                2) HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKa3t1H0

             A5    The bookshop is in the centre of town.

                                       l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                  3) B 'rewre He cKa3•aH0

             A6    They arrange to meet at the Railway Café.

                                       l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B •rewc•re He CKtt3ttHO


Bbl ycatblluume unmep6bJ0 c cyòbeù no meHHucy. B A7-A13 oõaeòume 111tcþpy 1, 2 uau 3, coomeemcmayougyo BblõpaHH0.uy 6Œuu 6apuaHžny omeema. Bbl ycalblluume aanucb òeaycòbl.


Patricia became an umpire because she 1) was fired from her last job.

2) got hurt playing tennis.

3) couldn't find another job.

The part of training Patricia found the most difficult was I) dealing with the players.

2)   remembering the rules.

3)   being the centre of attention.

Patricia's mistake at her first game as an umpire didn't matter much because

l) she managed to put it right quickly.

2)   it was an unimportant match.

3)  




she didn't take the match seriously.

AIO

Patricia's most embarrassing moment came when she I) was careless in writing down the score.

2)   started an argument with one of the players.

3)   forgot to keep a written score of the game.

All

Patricia says it's most important that an umpire can

1)   get on well with the players.

2)   keep the crowd informed.

3)   perform well when he/she is tired.

A12

According to Patricia, one disadvantage of being an umpire is 1) the low pay.

2)   the travelling.

3)   the working hours.

A13

Patricia says that if you want to be an umpire, you should

1)  play a lot of tennis.

2)  read about umpiring. 3) watch a lot of sport.

qacnlftr õaamca. BI pacnoaoyceuo g HUYChteÚ uacmu Õaawca. 111711 nepenoce omeemoe 6 aar)auuu BI õYK6b1 aanucb16ŒomcH õea npoõe.Q06 u ,3HaKOß npeY111HaHllfl.

                                     Pa3neJ1       LITeHwe

 

Ycmcmoaume coomeemcmeue mewl' A — G mexcma.M I — 6. 3aHecume ('6011 01116011b' 6 matluugy. Mcnoab3Y1ime Kaycòyo õYKßY mo.QbK0 oð11H pa.3. B .3aòanuu oòlta me-Ita atilU1fflH.

A.      EASILY LEARNED

B.      EXTREMELY DANGEROUS

C.      SADLY DISAPPEARING

D.      REALLY VALUABLE

E.       RARELY BEATEN

F.       SURPRISINGLY SUCCESSFUL G. QUICKLY GROWING

I Draughts (or 'checkers' as the Americans call it) is one of the most popular games around the world. The rules are simple. Even young children have no problem working out how to play. The top players study moves in the same way that chess players do but anyone can pick it up and have a go. Getting to a high standard takes a lot of hard work and practice but the basics are not particularly difficult.

TeKc-ra

Tesla

1

2

3

4

5

6

2    


Since 1997, when the game Ultima Online became popular, many thousands of people have played all kinds of games online — and the numbers are still increasing rapidly. Every year, more and more people discover the pleasures of playing over the Internet and the next generation of games consoles are being designed with that in mind. There seems to be no sign that this explosion in online games will stop any time soon.

3     It has been called the greatest phenomenon in the history of games, but when Trivial Pursuit was created by two friends in 1981, few people had any idea what a hit it would be. It was a quiz game and none of the games companies expected it to do well, until an American company became interested in it. Many millions ofTrivial Pursuit games have been sold since then in 19 languages and 33 different countries.

4     Tigran Vartanovich Petrosian was chess world champion from 1963 to 1969. He dominated the game during those years and almost never lost. He was known as a player who was strong in defence and very few players got the better of him. In fact, his defensive play was so good that he was known as 'Iron Tigran'. When he did lose, it was big news in Moscow chess circles.

5     It seems that there have been some big changes in the British playground. Twenty years ago,       traditional children's games were played in every school across the country during the break. These days, they are quickly being replaced by hand-held games consoles and other electronic games. Before long, there is a danger that traditional games could die out. Once they are forgotten, it may be impossible to bring these enjoyable pastimes back to the playground.

6     In 1831, a farmer on the Isle of Lewis, north of mainland Scotland, discovered sets of chess pieces that dated from the middle of the 12th century. Carved from walrus tusk, it is almost impossible to put a price on these pieces because they are a unique find. There are 78 pieces in total, 67 in the British Museum and the rest in the Edinburgh National Museum. Whatever they are worth, you can be sure it's a lot more than the average chess set.

Tlpoqumañme gonpocbl I — 6 u peKaaatHbte A — G o cnopm116Hbtr gewnpa.r u ycma,qoeume coomgemcnlßlte Meycðy gonpocŒuu u peKaŒMHb1Jf11 otî1'fi6aWHlffiJtu. B meKcme Bbl Haùðeme omeem moabK0 na oÒuH eonpoc. 3aHecume CßOU omeembl 6 maõ.mugy, npuaeòeHHY}0 HU.ye, eòe noð       eonpoca enutuume coomeemcn16Y0110'R) õYKØY. B aaÒaHUU oÒ11H moccm atlZUHUÚ.

 

A       Redwood Sports Complex

We offer a full range of sports and exercise sessions with trained members of staff. Whether you're looking for a new hobby or just want to get in shape, Redwood Sports Complex has something for _.oupg and old alike. For membershiprates,vlease call.

B       Crooksworth Sports Centre

Crooksworth Sports Centre has been serving the local community for over three decades. It's the largest recreation centre in the region. Membership costs just £40 per year (children and seniors 20) and for that you get training and use of all equipment.

C       Dentington Sports Centre

Dentington Sports Centre is a great place to work out. You can now fit your exercise session into your lunch break with our Worktime programme. Younger members will also enjoy our after-school club, Kicks for Kids. One month's membership costs £5, while a year's membership is £50 contact us for details of discounts).

D       Sir Peter Walker Sports Centre

With the newly-built swimming pool, the Walker Centre is now even better. It's got the best indoor rock-climbing wall in the country, where training is given by climber Denise Holmes. Join for a year (£45) or a trial membership of a month (£7). Please note that an extra charge is made for the sessions with Denise Holmes.

E        West Norton Recreation Centre

Although the West Norton Recreation Centre is offering a reduced service until the new gymnasium is completed, there's still lots to do. If you're thinking of taking up a new hobby, why not try our Newcomers Scheme, where you pay half-price to try a new sport? Please note that there is no wheelchair access until the building work is completed.

F        Inborough Sports Centre (ISC)

The newly-opened sports centre at Inborough has an Olympic-sized swimming pool, together With a fully-equipped gym. The ISC philosphy is that sport is for all, so we're pleased to be able to offer special exercise machines for members in wheelchairs. Children are welcome to join ISC, but there are no discounts on the membership fee of£55 per year.

G       Herne Sports and Leisure Complex

We are offering a full year for just £20 (OAPs and children £16), although that does not include the use of equipment such as rackets, for which a small charge is made. However, feel free to bring your own equipment and take advantage of the lessons we run at no extra cost.

4      charges extra for the use of equipment?

1

2

4

5

6

 

 

5     


provides equipment for the disabled?

6      organises special events for children?

[Ipoqumaùme me,tccm u 6b1110AHume .3aòaHLIH A14-Ä20, OÕBOÒH 1411Cþpy 1, 2, 3 coomeemcmcsyoucwo H0Mep_v 6btt5paHHO?O          6apuawna omcema.

4,

plane circled and the pilot pointed down into the Australian desert below.

the runway there,' he said, 'next to the store.' Nancy looked. There was a strip of level next to a few wooden buildings. It looked small and unimportant in the middle of the stretches of red earth and small bushes that stretched as far as the eye could see, but knew that it was a vital link to the outside world for the farmers in the area. As she a figure appeared at the door of one of the buildings and waved up at them. The pilot the plane expertly and thev soon touched down on the line of hard sand. They came to stop by the largest building and Nancy stepped out. A woman of perhaps forty held out her

Welcome to Carter's Cross. I'm Shelley.' Nancy looked at her. She was not unattractive, although long hours in the sun were beginning to take their toll and she had a number of lines wrinkles. Nancy was surprised to see that her clothes were quite fashionable, despite a bit dust. Something in Nancy's expression must have communicated itself to Shelley because laughed and said, 'We're not quite as backward as you might think, This is the 21st century. on into the store.' went inside while the pilot checked his plane. The store was well stocked with farming equipment, tinned food and clothes. An old man was cleaning the counter. He looked up when entered and then carried on with his task without catching Nancy's eye.

come on, Dad,' Shelley said. 'We all know how you feel about them finding oil outside

Carter's Cross, but that's no reason to be rude. This is Nancy Edwards, from the university.' turned to Nancy. 'He's stuck in his ways. Thinks it'll mean the end of farming round here. such a bad thing, if you ask me.' nobody did ask you.' It was the old man. 'My granddad farmed this land, and so will my grandson. I'm not having this land turned into a great big ugly oil refinery.' He looked at 'And I won't be bought off, either.' had heard from her colleagues that this kind of resistance just disappeared when people quite what the find was worth and they happily packed up and headed for the comforts of the nearest city. She hoped this time would be no exception, here to assess the environmental impact, Mt-Williamson,' Nancy said. 'I have no intention building anything.' The old man looked at her and then walked to the door. He pointed out the land.

'Environmental impact?' He shook his head. 'What environment? It's a baking desert and a person's got to work hard to make a living off sheep in a land like this. You aren't going to find endangered species out there, and so you'll go back and write your report and the oil companies will move in. But there's one thing that I bet you don't mention in your report. The He looked out into the sun again. Nancy was a little confused. There had been no mention of a village in any of the information she had read. village?' she asked.

are ten farms that rely on this store. Together, they cover an area of nearly 400 square kilometres. And they're our neighbours. We never miss a birthday, or a wedding, or any other You're going to destroy our village.' Nancy could think of nothing to say. Shelley shrugged her shoulders. Nancy wandered back to the plane to get her equipment.

The 'That's ground empty Nancy looked, turned a hand. 'Hi.

and of she Come They

they 'Now,

TestA1


She

Not 'Well,

Nancy. Nancy realised

'I'm of at

any

village.'

'What 'There event.


'A14    The buildings Nancy sees from the plane are

1)   smaller than she expected.

2)   very important to the local people.

3) left empty most of the time.

4) used to store farming equipment.

EA15 The phrase 'take their toll' in paragraph 2 means that I) the sun has improved Shelley's appearance.

2)   Shelley enjoys spending time in the sun.

3)   Nancy and Shelley both find the sun too hot. 4) the sun has damaged Shelley's skin.

EA16      Shelley laughs when she realises that Nancy

I) wasn't expecting her to be wearing new clothes.

2)   didn't know that there would be so much dust.

3)   is using strange expressions.

4)   wants to be invited into the building.

;317    The man ignores Nancy at first because he doesn't I) like meeting new people.

no B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOII OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB Ml !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo omaentbl Ha           B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaapwomcn 6 pa.3Hb1X qacmnx õacmyca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1 6 Hil.YCHeð1 qacmu ÕaaHKCl. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòaHlffl-r B2, B3 õYKßb1 õea npoõeaoe u 3HaK06 npenunaHllfl.

2)  


approve of what is happening.

3)   see her behind Shelley.

4) want her to see how upset he is.

5318 Nancy hopes that the old man will change his mind when I) he learns how comfortable the city is.

2)   he sees there is no point hiding his true feelings.

3)   he is offered enough money. 4) she explains how important the find is.

jA19   Mr Williamson believes that

I) Nancy has no intention of doing her job properly.

2) the discovery of oil threatens the local wildlife.

3) the oil companies will ignore what Nancy tells them. 4) there is no wildlife worth saving in the area.

A20 Nancy doesn't understand Mr Williamson's reference to 'the village' because I) it covers a large area and is never marked on maps.

2)   the oil company didn't give her all the relevant information.

3)   he's talking about relationships and not a physical place. 4) it's a long way from where they are.

                                Pa3aeJ1          rpaMMaTHKa aeKCHKa

Tlpoqumuùme mexc•m 3an0JIHume nponycKll 6 nor) HOJtepŒ}tu B4-B I coomaemcmßY101U11.Mld cþop.ua.$tu caot3, HaneqamaHHbl-r 3a¿aaßHb1Jtll             cnpaøa om KOICÒo¿o npeòJ10yceH1ffl.


Telling stories

Books tell stories, films tell stories and we tell one another stories. Telling stories important since people first sat around a camp fire. BE Back then, hundreds of thousands of years ago, people TELL stories about things they had done earlier that day while hunting.

TestA11

B6       A hunter could make     sound very brave in his own story.    HE They also made up mythical stories,            the world around        EXPLAIN them and where they came from.

B8 Many of      stories became part of their culture because they THAT were told many times.

Long before writing      , people learnt stories from their        APPEAR parents and passed them on to their own children.

                    BIO      Stories                            to babies by their mothers.                                           SING

Bil This   to be an important form of education in many parts CONTINUE of the world, even today.

 

Tlpoqumaùme npuøeÒeHllbtñl nu.yce macc•m Tlpeoõpaayùme cJ106a, HaneqamaHHbte õYKߌuu nocae B12-B18 max, qmoõbl OHII ppavu.uamuqec}cu u .1CRCUtWCR11 coo,rnoemcm606a.11d coðepycamuo me,tccma. 3an0JIH11žne npon_vcK11 nonyqeHHbL1f11 CA06ŒUU. Kaycòblll nponycK coont6emcmeyem aaÒaHll/0 11.3 epynnbl B 12-1318.

 

B12

B13 B14

BIS

B16 B17

B18

Marlon Brando was perhaps the greatest film  of his generation. He was born in 1924 and people soon realised that he was

 However, he never did very well at school and he never seemed to be interested in When he finally left school, he travelled to New York, where he became a  at drama school. There, he heard about the ideas of the Russian, Konstantin Stanislavski, who had developed a way to bring acting closer to

 Brando used Stanislavski's ideas in his acting and during the 1940s he appeared in        plays on Broadway.

The critics liked him and he slowly became better known. His first major  was in the film A Streetcar Named Desire (1947),

He became world famous and a star was born.

ACT

TALENT

EDUCATE STUDY

REAL VARV

SUCCEED

Tlpoqumaùme mcwcm c nponycwa.uu, HO.uepa•tu .421-428. 3/7111 110.uepa coomgemcmaywm aaòaH11}LM Ä21-A28, B KOD10PbLr npeÒcma6aeHb1 603MOHHbte gapuwunbl omeemoe. Oõeeòume HOAtep ßblÕPCIHH020 aa.'.tu aapuamna omaema.

 

'Come on. I'll help you.' The voice came from the left and Jenny turned her head in that direction. She was blind, and had been from birth, but even without the sense of A21  , she could tell that the voice belonged to a middle-aged man. He touched her on the arm and she pulled back. The guide dog bv her side looked up.

'Please,' she said, struggling to keep her anger A22  control. 'That's very kind of you, but I don't need any help.'

'Oh,' the man said, and Jenny could imagine the look of confusion on his face. 'I'm sorry,' he said finally, and crossed the road. People just didn't seem to realise that there was a huge difference between offering help and trying to take control of somebody else's life. Sometimes she

A23  people's attempts to help funny, but not today. Today it was important to

A24                the impression that she was independent, because today was the first day in her new job.

She waited until the signal from her dog told her that it was safe and she A25  off across the road. When they reached the other side, she paused for a second to A26 herself of the way and then continued. After a few days in the job, her dog would have learnt the way, but for now Jenny had to A27  the distance to the right building. She counted her steps and listened. To anyone who could see, it would have seemed like a quiet street, but Jenny concentrated on the small sounds: her footsteps, a car going past, the bell on a bicycle. They helped her judge when she was coming close to the corner of the street, where she knew number 116 stood.

They got there and she stopped. She patted her dog on the head.

'Well, boy, this is it,' she said. She knew there would be many challenges ahead. There always were. But at least she had overcome the first one: A28  to the building. She stepped inside.

A21                   l) view                     2) 100k                   3) sight                  4) observation

A22                  1) in                         2) on                      3) behind              4) under

A23                  l) took                     2) found                3) kept                  4) caught


A24 I) give 2) hand 3) throw 4) send A25 l) made 2) came 3) put 4) set

A26                   1) remember            2) recall                  3) remind              4) recollect

A27                  1) locate                    2) estimate           3) discover            4) reveal

A28                   l) being                    2) getting               3) making             4) bringing

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CBC)" OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeembl Ha aar)t1H1ffl B4-B18 u A21-Ä28 pacnoaaanomca 6 paallbl.x qacmax t;aamca. B4-B18  o HilYCHeÚ yacmu ÕJIUHKCI. flpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 134-1318 ÕVK6bl aanucbleaw»nca õe.3 npoõeaoe u 3+taKOß npenumtkllffl.


Ha                  Cl. C2 WIAHK OTBETOB E2.

171211 ßbtnoaueuuu aaòauuù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HU..}taHUC oõpamume Ha "10, qmo eatuu omaembl t;yòym  no aanuca.u, WIAHKE OTBETOB M2. aanucu qePH0611K•a He õvðym yqun1b16ambcfl .9Kcnepmo.u.

"pu aan0JIHeHld1d WIAHKA OTBETOB N2 yxa.wume cwaqaaa HO.uep aaòt1H1/51 CI, C2 aame.u aanutuume C601i omuenu Ecau oc)H0ù cmop0Hbt õaamca ueòocmamowto, atoyeme ucnom»aooantb òpyeyo cmop0H.v õ.aamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from Georgia, your English pen friend.

„.Doyourparents don't wellat school? seem toput me so muchpressure. what can / do? think / shouate(/them that it's making me unhappy? Hew can / explain tv myparents how (feel? / try my best at but /just toget top marks. should/ speak to a teacher? Write back soon withyour advice.

Love,

Georgia

 

Write back to Georgia answering her questions.

Write 100-140 words.


Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Some people think that pupils at school should learn practical skills that will help them in later life, such as cooking or car mechanics. Others argue that pupils are at school to learn traditional academic subjects and that those who want to can learn other skills in their oun time.


Do you think that there is a place in schools for practical subjects such as cooking and car mechanics?

Write 200-250 words.

Use the following plan

1.  Introduction (State the problem).

2.  Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

3.  Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.

4.  Make a conclusion.

Test 11

                                 Pa3aeJ1        IòBopeHvte

Bbl non.yqume Kapmotwy, Ha Komopoú npeðcmaœWHb1 mpu ycmH0?0 omaema:

C3 — me.uamuqecxoe *touo.aoeuqeæcoe Bbtcyca.3b16anue,

C4 — ÒuŒqoe C 1/Cäb}O otîuena cþaxmuqecwoù  C5 — ()uŒ10? C gea1b10 oõJf('Ha 01ßHot1H01i  OKOHt1CIH1že Bbl'10.QHeHUH KaycÒoeo aað(1H11H  .9KaŒueHamop. Bo ape-WI npoaeòt'H11fl 9moù qacmu llðem noc•momtnafl aanucb Ha ayò1d0Kaccemy.

                                                   3aaaH1151         3K3ayreHVOtoro

STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on the weather.

Remember to say:

     what types of weather you get where you live

     how the weather changes during the year

     what type of weather is your favourite, and why

     what types of weather you dislike, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You have seen an advertisement for helpers at your local zoo. You are onlv available at the weekend and you have no transport of your own to get to the zoo.

Before making a decision, ask the zoo-keeper about:

                   when they need helpers

                   what helpers have to do

• any experience needed

                   how to get to the zoo


You begin the conversation. The teacher will play the part of the zoo-keeper.

Remember to:

                   be active and polite

                   get all the information you need

                   decide whether you want to become a helper

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and a friend are thinking of creating a website together. You are discussing what you want your website to be about. Here is the list of possible subjects:

                   your favourite singer/group

                   your favourite sport/team

                   your family

                   your school

                   your town/city

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

                   discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: first task

A   Look at the first task on page 138. Match each word in the box to a statement A-F. Some words will be used more than once.

allowed • angry • beds • clean • dad her • key • larger • mess • out • relaxed she • size • smaller • toys • warm

c

B    In pairs or as a group, discuss which other words and phrases you might hear. Add them to your lists in Exercise A.

Section 2 Reading: second task


Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: second task

D Read the text with questions B12-B18 on page 144. Look at the words on the right which you have to change and decide what part of speech is needed to fill each gap.

I (B12) positive adjective / negative adjective / positive adverb / negative adverb

2      (B13) positive adjective / negative adjective / positive adverb / negative adverb

3      (B14) singular noun / plural noun / -ing form / verb

4      (B15) noun / verb / adjective / adverb

5      (B16) noun / verb / adjective / adverb

6      (B17) noun / verb / adjective / adverb

7      (B18) positive adjective / negative adjective / positive adverb / negative adverb


c Quickly read the text on page 141. Find words and phrases in the text that fit in the categories below.

 

poetry

E Complete the table.

noun

verb

positive adjective

negative adjective

positive adverb

negative adverb

solve

complete

origin

luck


Section 4 Writing: first task

F Read the first task on page 146. Imagine that you are Melanie's pen friend and that you have lots of advice to give her because you recently organised a successful party at your house. Make notes to complete the information.


Your party

What did you offer the guests? (food, drinks, etc)

 

What would you do the same way again if you had another party?

What would you do differently if you had another party?

 

Did you decorate the place?

 

If yes, how?

Did you provide music?

If yes, did you have a DJ?

What else did you do to make the party a success?

 

Section 5 Speaking: first task

G   Look at the Student Card for Task I on page 147. Make notes to complete the table.

 

name of famous person

their appearance

 

 

 

 

what they are famous for why you like them

 

 

 

Melanie's party

What should she offer the guests? (food, drinks, etc)

Should she decorate the place? If yes, how?

How should she arrange the music?

What else should she do to make the party a success?

What other advice can you give her?

H   In pairs or as a group, discuss the question below. Use the phrases to help you.

What are the good and bad things about being famous?

There are lots of good bad things about being famous, such as ...

Famous people usuallv / often sometimes ...

One good bad thing is that you can can't ...

If you're famous, you can can't .

If you're famous, you have to don't have to .


Test 12

                                   Pa3aeJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycau.uuume 5 6blCKa3b16aHUå. YcmaH06ume coonwemcmøue MeycÒy 6blCKC13b16CZHUfLUt1 KCIYCÒoeo zoeopnugeeo 1 — 5 u ymoepycòeH11f1.uu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 cnuœce A — F. Ifcnoabayùme Kaycòyo õVK6Y, ymeepycÒeHue, moabK0 oðzut paa. B aaðauuu ecntb oòH0 autunee ynteep.ycðenue. Bbl vc.lbttuume aanucb ()ßaycÒbt. 3aHecume Cßou om€entbl 6 matîau«y.

A.     It's important for me to feel comfortable in my bedroom.

B.      I share a bedroom with my sister.

C.     


My old bedroom was bigger than this bedroom. D. No one can enter my bedroom when I'm not there. E. My parents get annoyed when my bedroom is untidy. F. I try to keep my bedroom as tidy as possible.

roBopqruHÏ1

1

2

3

4

5

YTBepxneHvte

 

 

 

 

 

Bbl ycablžuume llHžnep6b}0 cne«uaaucma omðeaa .uapcenlllhtpa co cayqaùH0ù npoxo.yceñ. Onpeðenume, 'CtlKUe 11.3 YIPUßeÒëHHbLX ymaepycòeH11ñ Al-A6 coomeemcmgyom coðepycamuo meRtma (1), KCZICUe He coomaemcmeyom (2) u o që.u 6 mewcme He CKaaaHO, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUU meyccma He-lb.3fl ()antb Hil nono.ycume-lb,qoeo, HI' ompu«amevQbH020 omaema (3). Oõgeòume HO.uep 6b1ÕpaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuawna omeema. Bbl ycvlblžuume aanucb Òea.ycÒb1.

      Al     The woman buys a new toothbrush every month.

                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3) B Tewre He CKt13aHO

     A2    In the woman's family, each person has their own tube of toothpaste.

                          1) BepHO               2) HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKa3ilHO

     A3     The woman visits her local supermarket once a week.

                          1) BepHO               2) HeBepH0                 3) B •rewre He CKa3tiHO

     A4    The woman buys a new tube of toothpaste approximately every three weeks.

                           l) BepHO               2) HeBePHO                 3) B •rewre He CKagaHO

     A5    The woman believes the mouthwash she uses is healthy and tastes nice.

                          I) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3) B •reKcq•e He cxagaH0

     A6     The woman thinks that 'Freshrinse' is a good name for a mouthwash.

                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B •reKcrre He CKtt3ttHO

 

Test 12

 

 

 

 

 

Bbl ycablžuume 6btCRU.3bteaHUfl moðeú 6 ce-uu paaa11LIHbLr cumya1'11fLt. Omeemwne Ha eonpocbl no

A7-A/3 oõeeòume I'll(þpy I, 2 ILIU 3, oõ03Haqayoug_yyo omeem, Komopblå 6Œu Ka.ycemc•fl Hauóoaee 6'?PHblJt. Bbl ycabtluume KaycÒoe 6blCKa.3b16ClHUe ()ßWICÒbt.

 

    You will hear a woman talking about her son. How does she feel?

1)   proud

2)   surprised

3)   disappointed

     You will hear a man talking about an activity he does regularly. Why does he particularly enjoy it?

1)   It helps to get him out of the house.

2)   It makes him feel fit and healthy.

3)  


It stops him thinking about his problems.

A9

You will hear an advertisement for a new product. Who is the product aimed at?

1)  people who are wealthy

2)  people who are unfit

3)  people with a lot of free time

AIO

You will hear a radio announcer. What is on next?

1)   a comedy

2)   jazz music

3)   the news

Al I

You will hear a teacher talking to a class of students. What is she doing?

1) encouraging the students 2) congratulating the students

3) criticising the students

         Al 2

You will hear a writer talking about his new novel. What is the novel about?

1)   power

2)   revenge

3)   jealousy

A13

You will hear a man talking about the economy. What worries him?

1)   that the price of petrol might increase

2)   that house prices might fall

3)   that unemployment might rise

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B OTBETOB El,'

ObPATMTE BHMMAHUE, qmo m, Al-A13 pacnoaaea,omcH 6 pa.3HbLV qacmsa ÕaaHKa. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu õaamca. [Ipu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaðaHuu BI õYK6b1 aanucblßcuomcfl t5e3 npoõe.106 u .3HaK06 npemŒaHlŒ.

                                         Pa3aeJ1       11TeHne


Yc•maH0ß11me coomeemcmaue me.M — G mexcmŒM 1 — 6. .3aHecume C60U omaembl 6 maóau«.v. Mcnoab3Yùme Ka.ycòYR) Q)'K6Y moabK0 oÒ11H paa. B aaòaHuu oÒua me.',ta JU11UHflH.

A. GOING ABROAD B. BECOMING RICH

c. LIVING WITHOUT MONEY

D.      BUYING PROPERTY

E.       EARNING MONEY

F.       USING PLASTIC

G.      HELPING THE POOR

 

I The World Bank is officially part of the United Nations. Its aim is to fight poverty around the world and, to do that, it lends money to governments and countries which need financial help. Since it was created in 1945, after the end of the Second World War, the World Bank has helped improve the lives of millions of poor people in many different countries.

2      Credit cards have made shopping much easier for millions of people. With a credit card, you don't have to carry lots of cash with you when you go shopping. You just need to take one plastic card with you. With credit cards, you get a bill at the end of each month. If you pay the bill immediately, you don't have to pay the credit card company any money. If you delay paying some or all of the bill, however, the credit card company charges you extra.

3      In America it's the dollar and in Russia it's the rouble. Many countries have their own 'currency' their own money. This means that when you travel from, say, Russia to the USA you have to exchange your roubles for dollars, as shops in America don't accept roubles. Many countries in Europe, such as France, Germany and Italy, now have the same currency, called the euro. This means that Italians travelling to Germanv don't have to worry about exchanging money when they travel.

4      In Britain, people who work receive either a 'salary' or a 'wage'. They are both money that workers receive, but there are small differences between them. If you get a salary, you are paid at the end of each month. A job with a salary of £20,000 means that you get that amount over a year, not each month. A wage is usually paid at the end of each week. A factory worker in Britain might get a weekly wage of about £300.

5      Most people do not have enough money to pay in cash if they want to buy a house or a flat. Because of this, they have to borrow money from a bank. The name for the loan that most people get when they buy property is a 'mortgage'. In Britain, it's common to get a mortgage for up to twenty-five years. In other countries, it's more common to get a mortgage that lasts for onlv ten or fifteen years. Xhen you've finished paying your mortgage, the building is yours!

6      What would the world be like if we didn't have money? It would be a very different place! We would probably have to exchange different things to get what we needed. For example, imagine that you needed some bread. You would go to a baker, but you couldn't buy the bread with money. You would have to give the baker something that the baker needed. If you were a farmer, perhaps you could offer the baker some fresh vegetables. It would be very difficult to get everything we needed, wouldn't it?

 

 

 

 

Ne •reKcrra

TeMa              

2

3

4

5

6

 

Ilpoqumaùme gonpocbl I — 6 u peK•aa-uy meampŒ1bHbtx cneKHl(lKaeù A — G. YcmaH06ume coomaemcm€ue -ueycòy aonpoca.uu u pewqa.MH01"1 cnocmavaeðl. B RayÒOM meyccme Bbl naúòeme omaem ntOJ1bKO Ita oÒt11t eonpoc. B npuaeòeHH0ú Hit.yce matîautge nor) HO.',tepO.M aonpoca enutuume

auumuÙ.

 

 

Which production

1    has only two actors performing?

2    involves a police officer?

3    partly concerns young people's fashion?

4

5

6

includes songs written for the show?

involves someone talking about their work?

is based on a well-known book?

   What's On At The Theatre                            Fe

A     Let The Good Times Roll • Shaftsbury Theatre - Plymouth

Let The Good Times Roll is a comedy for all the family. Set in the late 1950s, the play is a look at the relationships between two teenagers and their parents. The kids are mad about roll and the parents are mad with their kids for what they wear and the music they like!

B     Working For A Living • Angel Theatre - Exeter

A new musical written specifically for the Angel Theatre Company by John Chappell, Living shows us office life as we've never seen it before! With secretaries singing their the photocopying machine and managers dancing on their desks, you're assured of a highly entertaining night out.

C     The Doonray Affair • Torbay Theatre - Torquay

When strange messages start appearing on the notice board of a sleepy Yorkshire village, inhabitants are confused. When a horrifying murder terrifies them, it's time for Chief Carlton to try and discover what's going on. Will he find the murderer before another person is killed?

D     Richard and Liz • Theatre Royal - Topsham

Corin Davers stars as Richard Burton and Wendy Davis is Elizabeth Tavlor in this two-person production exploring the relationship between two of the most famous film stars of the century. Their love for each other was powerful, but so was their jealousy and ambition. a dull moment when Richard and Liz get together!

E      Talent Contest • Lydford Theatre - Lydford

On Friday 17th February, the 1 3th Annual Lydford Talent Contest gives you the chance your talents! If you can sing, dance, tell jokes, juggle or do anything else that's entertaining, Pete Graham on 2341 5654333 before 31st January.

F       Alice In Wonderland • Tavistock Theatre - Tavistock

This new adaptation of Lewis Carroll's famous children's book has been especially designed younger children (aged 3-10). The show's only one hour long, the costumes are fantastic  lots of audience participation. Saturdays and Sundays only. Don't miss it!

G     Roger Linbuck - Live! • Harvest Festival Theatre - Exmouth

For one night only (Tuesday 14th February), successful local poet Roger Linbuck will be poems from his latest collection and answering questions about the life of a poet. His latest Devon Dumplings will also be on sale, and Roger will be happy to sign copies after the event.

 

ar

bru

humorous rock 'n'

Working For A out at fabulous and


the Inspector innocent

twentieth

There's never

show off contact

for and there's

reading book

2

3

4

5

6

 

 

Test 12

 

 

flpoqumaùme mŒcm u aaðaH14H A14-Ä20, OÕ60ÒH Igucþpy I, 2, 3 unu 4, coomeemcmeyougyo H0Mepy 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuawna omeema.

Whether you call it a 'gap year', a 'year out' or a 'year off', the decision to delay going to university for a year after leaving school is a difficult, but important, one.

Becky Roberts, now studying history at the University of Warwick, doesn't regret her decision to take a year off. 'I'd worked so hard for my A levels,' she says. 'I knew it would do me good to do something totally unrelated to studying before embarking on a three-year degree course. My year off working for my dad's company wasn't a holiday by any means, but it was a break from the world of education, and that's just what I needed.'

Carl Sanchez agrees. Now halfway through a biology degree at Cardiff University, Carl spent much of his gap year travelling. 'I worked for about three months to save up enough money, then went to stay with some friends who live in France. I ended up travelling round most of Europe, and even got over to Russia for a few weeks, which was fantastic.'

Both Becky and Carl enjoyed their year off, but do they feel it's benefited them in terms of their university life now? 'Definitely,' says Carl. 'When I left school, I was a normal, fairly irresponsible eighteen year-old. I hadn't been anywhere, I hadn't done anything. A year later, when I went to university, I felt much more like an adult than a child.'

'I know a few people at Warwick who took a year off,' says Becky. 'Generally, we're more dedicated to our studies than those students who came straight from school. We've got different priorities. We want to have fun, of course, but we realise we're here to get our degrees. I don't think some of the others have quite realised why they're at university yet.'


There are drawbacks to taking a gap year, though. Penny Cartwright went straight from school to study medicine at Imperial College, London. 'I thought about taking a gap year but decided against it and don't regret the decision for a minute. Becoming a doctor takes such a long time — I'll be about 26 years old before I can start earning any money — that the sooner you start, the better, in my opinion. It might be fun, but it's really just a wasted year in terms of career development.'

There's also the financial consideration. If you do decide to take a year off, and you don't want to work the whole time as Becky did, you have to be able to pay for it. Susan Jenkins, a Careers Officer, points out that parents are now less likely to fund their child's year off. 'Twenty years ago, it was fairly common for parents to say to their son or daughter, 'Here's two thousand pounds, go and have fun abroad for a few months.' Nowadays, because parents have to pay so much more for their child's education while they're at university, they just can't afford to pay for this extra year too.'

One option, of course, is to do what Carl did: work for a few months in order to save up for a trip abroad. Another option is to find casual work while travelling abroad. 'There are now a lot of books and websites with loads of information for people who want to do this,' says Susan. 'It's a great way to see the world, gain experience, and get money for living expenses all at the same time. But don't expect to earn enough to save any money.'

So, should you take a gap year? The answer is: it depends. If you want a break from books and essays, then it's probably a good idea — as long as you, or your parents, can afford it and as long as you're going to do something worthwhile during your time off. Sitting at home watching TV doesn't count! If you want to get your degree and start regular employment as quickly as possible, a gap year may not be so sensible.

Test 12

DA14  Becky took a year off because she

I) needed to see what working for her father was like.

2)   felt she needed a long holiday before university.

3)   had done so well in her A level exams at school. 4) wanted to do something different for a while.

:A15    Carl says that a year off helped him

I) learn the importance of saving money.

2)   become more mature and experienced.

3)   make friends in many different countries.

4)   become more knowledgeable about geography.

A16 According to Becky, students who didn't take a year off 1) are less hard-working than those who did.

2)   probably won't end up with a degree.

3)   don't want to have fun at university.

4)   are less intelligent than those who did.

-Ali According to Penny, a year off

1)   should be taken when you're about 26 years old.

2)  


is better once you've actually started your course.

3)   merely delays the time when you can get a job.

4)   can be enjoyable and useful for your future work.

-A18    In the past, parents were more likely to

1)   pay for their child's education at university.

2)   encourage their child to go straight to university.

3)   force their child to take a year off before university. 4) give their child money to help with their year off.

UA19  Susan issues a warning about

l) information from books and websites, 2) low wages for casual work abroad.

3) paying for everyday expenses abroad. 4) the difficulty of finding casual work.

A20 This article would probably not appear in I) a textbook for university students.

2)   a handbook for school-leavers.

3)   a magazine for young people.

4)   the education section of a newspaper.

no OKOHttaHUU B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYUbTE TIEPEHECTII CBOM OTBETW B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, gyno omeenlbl Ha .3aòaHllH B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaaecuomcfi e PC13HbLX qacmnr ÕJIZIHICCI. B2, B3 pacnOJtoyeHbl 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu õaamca. Tlpu nepe,yoce omeemoe B aaðcmuxr B2, B3 õYRBb1 aanucuea,zomcH õea npoõeaoe u .3HaKOd npeh11ŒaHllH.

Test IZ


                       Pa3neJ1           rpaMMaTVIKa JleKCHKa

 

flpoqumaùme meyccm 3a110AH11me nponycwu 6 npeÒaoyceH11fLr not) HO.IWPŒUII B4-B11                cþopMŒuu caog, HaneqamaHHbLV aaua6HbLUU t5YK6t1M11 cnpaea om KaycÒopo

 

B4

B6

138

B9

BIO

Bli

The News on TV

Do you watch the news on TV?

Before television, people often  to the cinema to watch the news. GO In those days, they also listen to the news on the radio but they weren't able to see anything.

Of course, newspapers  people the news for GIVE hundreds of years.

Even today, however, a daily newspaper gives  readers      IT yesterday's news and the only pictures are photographs.

The introduction of television  the daily news, with           BRING moving pictures, into people's homes for the first time.

In the beginning, people  the news on TV whenever NOT GET they wanted it, because it was onlv broadcast at certain times of the day.

These davs, there are a number of TV news channels         PROVIDE the news 24 hours a day.

If you want the  news, just turn on one of those channels LATE at any time of day or night.

 

Ilpoqumaúme nPU6eÒeHHbtÙ Htl.yce meR•cm Ilpeoõpa.3Yùme caoga, naneqamaHHbte aauza6HblJt11     nocae H0Mepot3 B12-B18 mew, qmoÕbl OHII ppŒ&LuamuqecKll u JWKCllqeCKU coomaemcmgoe,aau coòepycaHll}0 mexcma. 3anoanume nponycKtl nary'qeHHblMU CJ106a*fU. KaycÒblÚ nponycR coomeemcn16.vem omòe.1bH0M.v aaÒaHlUO 11.3 epymlbl B 12-1318.

 

 

Mary Celeste is a mystery that day. Built in 1861, the ship was       SOLVE but its name was changed to the Mary ORIGIN left New York for Italy on 7th November professional  and the captain's SAIL another ship, the Dei Gratia, spotted sea. To the crew's , they           ASTONISH

Mary Celeste had  COMPLETE food and water on board and the ship

There were no signs of a struggle or fight. EXCELLENCE were never found. No one has ever those nine         men and women. LUCK

What happened to the ship the

B12 remains  to this

 B13  called the Amazon,

Celeste in 1869. The Mary Celeste

B14 1872 with a crew of seven wife and daughter. On 4th December,

B15 the Map:v Celeste drifting in the

B16 discovered that everyone on the disappeared. There was plenty of

B17 was In  condition.

The people on the Mary Celeste

B18 discovered what happened to

[Ipoqumaùme moccm c nponycKŒuu, otî03HaqeHHbLM11 HOMepŒuu A21-A28. 3mu H0.uepa coome,emcmeyom aaò01H1dfL$t A21-A28, 6 Komopbl.r npeðcmaœ1"Hbt 60.3.UOYCHbte gaplltl/ffllbl omøemog. Oõeeòume H0.uep 6b1ÕpaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuamna omæma.

Dear Claire,

It was wonderful to receive your e-mail yesterday. I can't believe it's over six years since we were last in A21  How time flies! It was great to hear all your news, and thank you so much for attaching those photos of you and the family. You haven't aged a bit, and look as beautiful as ever! I'm still living in the same flat in Rome, but it looks very different to when you were here last. I've totally redecorated and knocked the wall through from the kitchen to the living room to make a large living A22 It's a lot more comfortable for me because — and this is my other big news — I now work from home as a full-time writer! You remember that novel I always said I was writing? Well, I finished it, sent it off to a publisher and it was accepted for publication. This was about three years ago. The book A23  out in hardback first and got some fairly good reviews in the Sunday newspapers in the UK, and last year they produced a paperback

A24  ! Can you believe it? I'm not rich yet by any means, but I am earning enough from royalties to have been able to A25 my job. I'm now hard at work on my second novel — let's just hope it doesn't take as long to write as the first one! Actually, it's

A26  well and I hope to have finished it within the next six months or so.

I'll be coming over to the UK the first week of next month. I'd love to meet up! Let me know when you're free and we'll arrange it. I can either come over to your A27  and meet the family, or maybe just you and I can go out to dinner somewhere and A28  up on old times. Whatever you prefer. I'll be staying at a hotel in London and will only have a couple of meetings while I'm there, so I should be free most of the time.

Let me know, and see you soon, I hope!

Lots of love,

Celine


A21                   I) exchange             2) message             3) connection        4) touch


A22                 1) space                  2) opening                    3) hole4) gap

A23                  I) brought               2) sent                   3) came                4) printed

A24                  I) issue                   2) edition              3) copy                4) reproduction

A25                  I) depart                 2) vacate               3) abandon          4) quit

A26

1) going

2) making

3) taking

4) having

 

 

l) point

2) position

3) location

4) place

 

A28

1) carry

2) hold

3) catch

4) bring

 

110                            B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM

OTBETb1 B FAAHK OTBETOB

ObPATJ-1TE BHMMAHUE,          HO      B4-B18 u A21-A28  6 pa.3Hb1X qacmax tîlamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb1 B HUYCHeÙ qacmu Õaawca. Tlpu nepenoce omeemoe 6 aaòt1H11+1-r B4-B18 tîYKBbl  t5e.3 npoõe,10ß u 3HUK06 npe,'111HaHlffi.


                                             Pa3aeJ1     111dCbMO

Ha                           Cl, C2 ucn0J1bJYùme WIAHK OTBETOB .Nþ2.

Tlpu Bbl/lOJl}-teHUU .3aòaH11ù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHIŒuaHue oõpamume Ha mo, Ltmo eatuu omeenlbl õyðym OlßHU6ambCH mo.1bK0 no aanucmt, CC)eaaHHbl.U 6 b.7AHKE OTBETOB .,E2. 1-111KŒcue aanucu gePH06UKU He õyðym yqumb16amt.c•H *Kcnepmo.u.

aanuuuune C60ð1 omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1 ÕaaHKa Heòocmam0¼H0, 6b1 Moyeme ucnoab.goeamb

c)pypyo cmopt)HY õaawca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.


This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

Write back to Melanie answering her questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many countries have 'national service', where young adults must join the army, navy or airforce for a certain period of time after leaving school. Some countries, however, have recently stopped national service.

              What can you say for and against national service?              Use the following plan

            Write 200-250 words.                                                           1. Introduction (State the problem).

2.    Arguments "for".

3.    Arguments "against".

4.    Conclusion.

Test 12

                                  Pa3aeJ1        IR)BopeHne

Bbl nonyqume Kapmoçy, Ha Komopoù npeòcmaeaeHbl mpu aaòaH11f1 c)'lfl ycmH0?0 omeema: C3 — me-uamuqec,çoe -uomžqozuqecxoe Bblc»caaweamte,

C4 — òua.R0? c ot;.ueHa cþaxmuqecwoñ lŒcþop.ua«ueù, C5 — c)uaaoe c oõ-uena OIVHO¼HOÚ 11Htþopeua«ueú. OKOH¼ClHlže KUYCÒO?0 onpeòeaaem 9K.3Œueuamop. Bo npoaeòenuq amoù qacmu .xaa.',tcwa uòem aanucb Ha ayò110Kaccemy.

3aaaHuq  3K3aMeHveMoro

STUDENT CARD

Remember to:

 be active and polite

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

      get all the information you need

      decide on a pizza to order

Give a 2-minute talk on a famous person you


like.

Remember to say:

      who the famous person is

      what he/she looks like

      what he/she is famous for

      why you like him/her

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are on the telephone to Jolly's Pizza Company. You want to order a family-size pizza to be delivered. The pizza topping must not contain any chicken. You cannot pay more than £10.

Before making a decision, ask the person who answers the phone about:

      family-size pizzas on the menu today

      the toppings

      the cost

The teacher will play the part of the person answering the telephone and will speak first.

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and a friend want to take up a new hobby together. You are discussing possible hobbies. You can start:

      doing photography

      painting and drawing

      collecting stamps

      making models (of aeroplanes, etc)

      doing magic tricks

The teacher will play the part of your friend. Remember to:

      discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite

      come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: second task

A   Look at the second task on page 150 and read statements Al-A6. For each of the following statements, tick the ones you think you are likely to hear in this dialogue. Put a cross next to the ones you think you are unlikely to hear.

I 'Why don't we go and see what's on at the theatre?'

2      'I'd like to book some tickets, please.'

3      'Now, would you like to be in the centre or on the right or left?'

4      'One Night in Mexico is on until Sunday the 23rd.'

5      'The seats on the sides are slightly cheaper at £7.50, while the ones in the middle are £8.50.'

6      'Okay, I'll take the seats in the middle, please.'

7      'There is something magical about watching a play in the theatre.'

8      'Certainly, madam. Which performance were you interested in?'

B    Look at the statements you have ticked in Exercise A. Decide whether you think they might be said by the woman calling the theatre or by the theatre booking assistant.

The woman calling the theatre might make statements

The theatre booking assistant might make statements


Section 2 Reading: third task

C    Quickly read the text on page 154. Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F).

I At first, the girls aren't sure what is under the rubbish. TIF

2     The dog has been injured in the past.         TIF

3     The dog is generally in bad health. Tl F

4     Sally's father believes you should help all stray animals.        TIF

5     The dog spends all day lying on the towel.            TIF

6     Verity is happy to leave the dog on the beach.            TIF

D   Complete each sentence with a word from the text. You are given the first letter of the word to help you.

First paragraph

I Don't drop your I on the floor! Put it in the bin.

2 Everyone fell silent when a UFO started to e from the sea.

Second paragraph

3      Would vou like k with your chips, or mayonnaise?

4      Do you live here p or only in the summer?

Third paragraph

5       Martin h for a few seconds and then dived into the sea.

6       Some animals have owners, but s dogs just live on the streets.

Fourth paragraph

7         It seems like a cfight to keep up with all the work we get at school.

8         Do you think any animals s when the forest caught fire?

Fifth paragraph

9         From this hill, you can see the sun rise in the morning and sin the evening,

10     I sa dog and it turned round and bit me on the hand!

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

third task

Quickly read the text on page 157, ignoring the gaps. Write a word or short phrase to answer each question.

1    Who calls the woman late at night?

2    Who does she meet and where?

3    What does she buy?

4    Where do they eat?

5 Whose birthday is the next day?

• Find words and phrases in the text to match these words and phrases.

I stayed in bed longer than you intended to

2      wasn't upset       

3      slow walk

4      money you get to live on when you stop work

5      sweater, pullover           

6      very unpleasant

Section 4 Writing: second task

G 


Read the second task on page 158. Work in pairs or as a group to make a list of all the arguments for and against caring about appearance and fashion.

arguments for:

arguments against:

H  Put a tick next to the points in the list above which you will mention in your composition. Put a cross next to the points you will not mention.

Section 5 Speaking: third task

Look at the Student Card for Task 3 on page 159 and choose 'Do' or 'Don't' for each of the following statements:

1    Remember to ask your friend for their opinion of each choice. Do I Don't

2    Just give vour opinion without any explanation why.      Do (Don't

3    Wait for your friend to ask questions and never ask them any.   Do I Don't

4     Agree or disagree with your friend's suggestions and say why.         Do I Don't

5    Try to say as much about each option as you can. Do I Don't

Complete these questions in as many different ways as you can. Compare

your ideas to your partner's.

 go and watch the planes?

Why don't we ...

 going and watching the planes?


Pa3neJ1

Bbl ycat'ltuume 5 6b1CKa3btcaHUð1. Ycmanoaume coomaemcmaue Ate.ycðy ßbtCKC13b16CIH1fflJft1 Kaycc)oeo poaopmgeeo 1 — 5 u ymaepycòeuumtu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 cnucxe A — F. Mcno.lbayùme Kaycòyo tîYR6Y, ot;oauaqcuougyo ymeep.wòeuue, moat,K0 oðuu paa. B aaÒauuu ecmb   autuuee ymoepoeòeuue. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb ()aa.ycÒbt. 3anecume ('6011 omaenlbl matîautgy.

A.      She likes this subject because it helps her in life outside school.

B.      This subject helps her understand other school subjects. C. Her feelings towards this subject have changed over time.


D. She finds most of this subject difficult to understand. E. She seems to have a natural talent for this subject. F. This subject seems to her to be unimportant.

YTBepxneH11e

1

2

3

4                       5

Bbl ycabltuume meaecþ0HHb1ù paaeoeop c 'CaccilPOM meampa-1bH0ù KClCCbl. Onpeòeaume, KCIK11e 11.3 npuaeòëHHbtr yn1ßep.ycòeH11ú Al-A6 coomaemcmayom coòepycamuo muccma (I ), KClKlle He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o tië.u 6 mewme He ocaaano, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUU me»ccma He,1b3H ()amb HI/ noao.ycumeJ1bHOPO, omptugame.lbH0?0 omæma (3). Oõaeòume HO.uep 6blÕpaHHO?0 6ŒU11 aapua,qma omeema. Bbl yc,lbltuume aanucb ()eayðbl.

      Al     The woman has been to this theatre before.

                           l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B -reKc•re He CKagaH0

     A2    The woman wants to book tickets for all the members of her family.

                           l) BepH0               2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKCTe He

     A3    The woman wants to see the play at the weekend.

                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0           3) B -reKCTe He CKa3t1HO

     A4    The woman decides to book the most expensive tickets.

                           l) BepH0               2) HeBePHO                3) B -reKCTe He cwa3ttH0

     A5    The assistant makes a mistake with the booking.

                           1) BepH0                2) HeBepH0                 3) B -reKc•re He

     A6    There is an extra charge for booking the tickets by phone.

                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B •reKœre Vie cKt13aH0

Test 13

Bbl yc„lbauume õeceòy mpeHepa Õacwemõ0J1bH0ù KOMaHðbt c U?POKCLMU. B .3aòctHLtqx A7-Ä13 oõgeðume Igucþpy 1, 2 Will 3, coomeemcmeyoucy}0 6b1t5paHHOMY 6ŒM11 gapuamny omeema. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb c)6ŒycÒbl.


The coach has called this meeting to I) congratulate the players on their last match.


2) analyse what the players could do better. 3) announce the team for the next match.

A8

Lisa is worried that the team doesn't have I) enough time to prepare.

2) the right facilities to train.

3) players who are good enough.

A9

The coach asks the players to

I) tell him who to blame for the loss.

2) give him their opinion of their own performance. 3) suggest new players for the team.

AIO

In the previous match, Lisa was most pleased by

1)   her level of fitness.

2)   the points she scored.

3)   not running out of time.

All

The coach thinks the players have more energy because they have been I) running long distances.

2)   doing weight training.

3)   eating different food.

A12

Lisa blames her lack of concentration on 1) the noise in the stadium.

2)   her future exams.

3)   the other team.

A13

The coach advises Lisa to

1)    forget about her exams.

2)    take more exercise in the evening.

3)    do something she enjoys before bed.

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB El !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,   omeembl Ha    m, Al-Ä13               qacrnax óaaHKC1. BI pacnoaoyceuo HUYCHeÙ t-tacmu tîaamca. [Ipu nepenoce omeemoø 6 3aðaHuu

                                      Pa3aeJ1        LIrreHne

TeMa

1        2

3

4

5

6

 

 

 

 


Ycmanoeume coomeemcmeue me.u A — G mexcmaat I — 6. 3cmecume caou omaembl a maõnuqy. Mcno.lbayùme Kaycðyo õYKßY moabK0 oÒ11H paa. B aaðauuu oðHa me.'ta JIUIUHMI.

A. FAST HUNTER B. POWERFUL DIGGER

c. PATIENT KILLER

D.      TALENTED BUILDER

E.       FAITHFUL FOLLOWER

F.       STRONG LIFTER

G.      CLEVER HELPER

1

2

3

4

5

6

You may have seen dolphins performing tricks, but did you know that they are amongst the most intelligent creatures on the Earth? They are so intelligent that they can be trained to assist divers in the sea. They are sometimes used by the US Navy to search harbours for mines. They also seem to know when humans in the sea are in trouble. There have been a number Of reports of dolphins protecting swimmers from sharks until the humans can escape.

How do you get a duckling to go everywhere you do? The secret is to take advantage of its powerful instincts. A duckling is programmed by nature to think that the first large moving object it sees is its mother. This is so that it doesn't get lost while very young. If, Instead, the first thing it sees is a human's green wellington boots, the duckling will go wherever the boots go.

Imagine carrying a huge leaf or an enormous piece of food on your back that weighs 50 times more than you do. It sounds impossible, but that's exactly what millions of ants do every day. Different ants might have different jobs in the colony and for some of them that means going out and about, searching for things to eat. Once they find a small piece of fruit or a grain of sugar, they have to bring it back home — and the only way to do that is on their backs.

One of the most unusual spiders in Australia is the trapdoor spider. This spider doesn't spin a web in a bush or tree but creates a trap on the ground. It digs a hole and covers the entrance. It then waits, sometimes for hours, for its prey to walk into the trap. When it finally senses an insect such as a beetle or a moth outside, the trapdoor spider comes out and takes its meal back into its hole to enjoy in private.

Most birds collect twigs and leaves to create a nest, and you've probably seen them in trees. However, most birds look like beginners next to the weaver birds of Africa. The weaver birds put together an enormous nest I Oft high and 15ft across. The nest is more like a block of flats! It consists of up to 300 separate 'rooms', each with a nesting pair of birds inside, which get into their private nest through a tunnel at the bottom.

The cheetah is perfectly suited to a life where speed is all-important. It spends its time on the wide open plains of Africa, searching for food and caring for its young. A cheetah can reach speeds of up to 70 miles per hour for short periods, and it needs every bit of that speed to catch its prey. Gazelles and other similar animals are quick and the cheetah has to be quick to catch them. Despite their ability to run so well, the cheetah is still only successful in catching its prey about fifty per cent of the time.

1

2

3

4

5

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

Test 13


[Ipouumañme ymcepycòeH11H 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HILUU mexcnlbl. YcmaH06ume coomeemcnwue

.ueycòy yn16ep.ycðeH1[f1.uu u coc)epyŒueu moccmoe. Hamuuume l!lltþpy 1 — ecau ymeepycðeuue

I Birmingham grew because it was easy to get coal and iron there.

2      The Birmingham Carnival lasts for a month.

3      People from lots of different cultures live in Birmingham.

4      Every year, actors perform at Aston Hal.

5      Ships from Glasgow took rum and tobacco to America.

6      Glasgow recently became zeell known for its sport.

Birmingham is England's second city. It has always had a good supply of water and the easy access to coal and iron meant that it became an important industrial centre. Today, heavy industry is less important to Birmingham. Other parts of the local economy, such as shopping and tourism, now provide jobs and an income for many people.

One of the highlights of the year is the Birmingham Carnival. This takes place one day in August and includes music, dancing, food and arts and crafts. It is a great opportunity to find out about the many different cultures that make up modern-day Birmingham. The city has Chinese, Muslim, Hindu and Sikh communities, all with their own cultural traditions.

A great place to visit in the local area is Aston Hall. Completed in 1635, the hall contains examples of furniture and paintings from different historical periods. Every two years, you can attend 'Aston Hall by Candlelight', when the house is lit by candles and actors recreate a 17th-century Christmas,

Glasgow is a modern, multicultural city in Scotland with a long history. Starting as a fishing village, by the end of the 18th century it had become a centre for shipbuilding. Being on the west of Scotland meant that it was in an excellent position for sending ships full of cloth and iron to America and the West Indies. These ships brought back sugar, rum and tobacco and Glasgow grew. Many local merchants became rich through trade.

Glasgow has long been famous for its sport. The two biggest teams in Scottish football, Celtic and Rangers, are both based in Glasgow and it was the European Capital of Sport in 2003. There are three world-class football stadiums in Glasgow and the Glaswegians (as people from Glasgow are called) are very proud of their sporting history.


17poqumaùme merccm u Bbtnoamume .3aÒaHUH A14-A20, OÕ60ÒR gucþpy I, 2, 3 unu 4, coomeemcmøyoucwo HŒuepy 6b1t5PaHHO?O ea.uu eapuawna omeema.

When they first saw the dog, they weren't sure, in fact, that it was a dog. A small pile of rubbish by the side of the litter bin began to move. Verity and Sally, walking past on their way to the beach, both jumped back, expecting a rat to emerge from the litter. \That they saw instead was the back end of a small brown dog, which seemed to be connected to a plastic bag. They both let out shrieks of delight.

'Oh, it's a puppy!' cried Verity, and bent down to release the dog's head from the plastic bag. The dog looked up at them with ketchup on its face. Now that they could see the whole animal, it was clear that it was not quite as young as Verity had thought at first sight. It carried one or two scars of life on the streets — it had a cut below one eye and one ear seemed to be permanently at an angle — but on the whole it was not in bad health for a stray dog. Its coat was shiny and you couldn't see its ribs under the skin, like you could with many dogs in a similar position. Judging by the litter bin, visitors to the beach were a good source of chips, hot dogs and hamburgers without knowing it. The dog sat, looking up at the girls with its tongue hanging out as it panted.


'Come on,' said Verity. 'Let's take him down to the beach!' Sally hesitated a moment before agreeing. She could see where it was leading. Her father always told her to walk away from a stray animal because there was a danger you would want to keep it. Then it would be harder when you actually did have to walk away. However, she couldn't deny that the dog was cute, so she was pleased when it trotted along behind them on the way to the beach.

They spread their towels on the beach and got sun cream out of their bags. When they turned round, the dog had settled on one of the towels as if he owned the place. He seemed glad of the opportunity to rest and Verity could imagine the constant battle he faced each day to survive. Apart from the search for food and shelter, which perhaps were less of a problem here than they would have been in the city centre, there was the competition from other dogs. This dog must be pretty smart, she decided, to survive against the others because he certainly wouldn't win too many fights, even if his injuries showed that he didn't give up easily.

They spent the day lazing in the sun, swimming and plaving beach tennis. The dog joined in after resting for a while. To the casual observer, it would have looked like two girls and their dog playing together. Sally knew, however, that that wasn't the case and she was dreading the moment when they would have to leave. Eventually, the sun began to set and it got cooler. Verity stared at the sun, as if willing it to stay in the sky for another hour. She avoided looking at Sally and didn't seem to notice Sally looking at her watch. Veritv stroked the dog, which was lying on the towel next to her. Sally knew that they couldn't put it off any longer.

'It's probably time we were getting back,' she said at last. Verity turned round and Sallv saw tears running down her face. The dog looked from one of them to the other and waited.

Test 13

Verity and Sally's first reaction is 1) amusement at the dog's appearance.

2)              worry about the dog's condition.

A15

The dog seems to be

I) in good condition despite its injuries.

2)   in a worse state than most stray dogs.

3)   rather overweight for its size.

4)   in urgent need of medical attention.

A16

It seems that people who go to this beach 1) enjoy feeding the stray dogs.

2)   are careless with their rubbish.

3)   throw a lot of food away.

4)   don't know they are harming the dogs.

Al 7

Sally doesn't immediately agree to take the dog to the beach because 1) they don't have a lead to put on the dog to control it.

2)                her father stops her from doing what she wants to do.

3)                she thinks the dog might be dangerous, in spite of his appearance. 4) she doesn't want to form a relationship with the dog.

AIS

Verity thinks that the dog

l) needs their help to avoid the other dogs.

2)   is a coward when it comes to fighting other dogs.

3)   is more attractive than the other dogs.

4)   uses his brains to beat the other dogs.

A19

The girls don't want to leave the beach because 1) they think the dog will be attacked.

2)   they want to sunbathe for another hour.

3)   they want people to think it's their dog.

4)   they are trying to delay leaving the dog.

A20

Sally feels uncomfortable because

1) she and Verity have argued about the dog.

3)             


fright at what might be under the rubbish. 4) curiosity at the dog's behaviour.

2)   she thinks that someone is watching them.

3)   she knows that leaving the dog will be hard.

4)   she wants to get rid of the dog without Verity knowing.

no        B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B FAÄHK OTBETOB

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo omaernbl Ha           B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaapa,tomca 6 pa.3HbLr qacmnx ÕaaHKa. B2, B3         6 Hid.YCHeå yacmu õaawca. Ilpu nepeHoce omaemoe aaòamžqx B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucbtacuomcn õea npoõeaog u 3}fflK06 npetlllhta,qua.

Test13

 

 

B4

B6

B8

B9

BIO

Bll

Paper

We use paper today in many different ways — in books and in newspapers, for example. Although  people probably don't think about its history, paper goes back a long way.

The ancient Egyptians  down plants that grew along the River Nile.

The plants, which  to be cooked, were added to water.

This liquid  to dry in the sun on special screens.

This 'papyrus' gave us the word 'paper', but paper  wasn't invented until 105 AD.

In that year, a Chinese man called Ts'ai Lun created paper bamboo and bits of old cloth.

By 1,000 AD, the secret of paper-making still  Europe.

Since the technology finally arrived in Spain and Italy in the twelfth century, paper          into a part of everyone's lives.

MORE

CUT

NEED

LEAVE

IT

USE

NOT REACH

GROW

                         Pa3aeJ1           rpaMMaTVIKa JleKCHKa

 

Tlpoqumaúme meK•cm 3anoaHume nponycK11 6 npeòaoycenuax nor) no-uepaatu B4-BI I    cþop.ua.ltu caoa, HaneqamaHHbtx aaeaa6HbtMU t5ycoa.uu cnpaaa om KaycÒoeo npeòno.yceH11H.

 

Ilpoqumaùme  Hityce mcwcm Tlpeoõpaavùme cu106a, HaneqamaHHb1e acuaaBHb1.uu

ÕYKUŒUU nocae H0Atep06 BI 2-1318 ma,tc, qmoõbl OHU epa.uatamuqeucu u JWRC11qeCKU coomaemcn1606Œlll coòepycamuo mewma. 3an0JIHume nponycyu ,'10AVqeHHbLUU c.i06Œuu. Kaycòblü nponycK coomeemcmeyem omðeJ1bH0MY aaðaHll}0 epynnbl B12-B 18.

 

 

B12

B13

B14

B15

1316

B17

B18

It is  to travel back in time millions of years. However, visit many museums and you will see detailed models of huge, dinosaurs that once walked the Earth. When experts study these creatures, where do they get their  from? The answer is fossils. When an animal dies, its  body can sometimes become covered in a thin layer of earth. In certain circumstances, this layer of earth can  and turn into rock over time and the shape of the animal is preserved inside. We can learn a lot about the  of an animal from a fossil. We can learn about its , its behaviour and even its diet.

POSSIBLE POWER

INFORM DIE

HARD

LIVE

APPEAR

 

 

Test 13

 

 

 

 

 

Ilpoqumaùme meyçcm c npon_vcyca.M1d, OÕ03HaqeHHb1AtU H0AtepŒ',t11 A21-A28. 3mu Hoeuepa

A21-A28, 6 Komopblx npeðcmaeaeHbl 60aUOYCHbte 6apuaHÐ1b1 omeemoe. Oõ6eòume H0.uep ßb1õpaHH0?0 aa.uu oapuaHtna omeema.

 

Monday, 14th March

I overslept this morning. I don't know how it happened. I'm sure I A21  the alarm last night as usual. At least, I think I did. I remember having a cup of tea, turning the TV off and putting the cat outside. Then the phone rang. It was my granddaughter, Zoe. She had been

A22  in her school play and she wanted to tell me all about it. I must say it sounded wonderful! I A23  not going, but if I went to see everything my grandchildren did, I would never have any time for myself.

Anyway, whatever the reason was, my alarm didn't A24  off this morning, so I was late meeting Rita for coffee. She said she didn't mind, though, because she had a good book to read. We chatted for half an hour and then went to have a wander round the shops. Everything seems so expensive these days, or it does to those of us who have A25  from work. It's not easy living on a pension. In the end, I just bought some wool for a jumper I'm making and Rita bought a new hat.

we had A26  our usual bus home, so we decided to have lunch in one of those fast food places. I'd never been in one before, but Rita said she had, with her grandson. I let her order the food and we sat down to eat. Well, I've never had anything so disgusting in my whole life! The chips were so salty I couldn't eat them. The other thing was like a bread roll with a beefburger and cheese on it. It turned A27  to be a 'special cheeseburger', although it didn't seem very special to me. It tasted like cardboard. I don't think I'll be going in a place like that again.

Tomorrow is my eldest son Darren's birthday and we're planmng to have a nice picnic in the countryside. I can't believe that he's about to A28  fifty. How old does that make me? Don't ask!

 

 

 

 

 

A21                  l) set                        2) put                    3) did                   4) timed

A22                  I) appearing           2) playing             3) standing          4) dramatising

A23                 1) reject                  2) repent               3) resent               4) regret

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYUbTE [TEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB

ObPATÞfTE BHMMAHME, qmo omaenlbl Ha B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacnoaaecuomcfi 6 pa.3LlbLr qacnmx õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHbl 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu atamca. Ilpu nepenoce omaemoe 6 .3aÒClHURV B4-B18 õYK6b1 .3anucb16a,tomcf1 õe.3 npoõeaoa u ,3HOK06 npenll/tcmu.q.


A24                 1) go                        2) come                 3) bring               4) sound

A25                  l) ceased                 2) retired               3) retreated          4) fired

A26                  I) lost                      2) dropped           3) missed             4) failed

                          l) round                  2) down                 3) off                    4) out

A28                  1) get                        2) turn                    3) make               4) have


                                     Pa3aeJ1      11MCbMO

Ha                             Cl, C2 ucn0J1b3Yùme WIAHK OTBETOB .½2.

Ilpu 6btYlOJ1}WHuu aaðcmuù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HlLUClHUe oõpamume Ha mo, Limo eatuu omeenlbl t;yòym ogeHlŒan1bO'H mo.1bK0 no aanucfl.u, cÒeaaHHblJ1 B K'IAHKE OTBETOB .½2. Htm•axue aanucu etePH06UKa He tîvðym yqurnb16ambc•fl .9KcnepmoM.

17pu FE7AHKA OTBETOB .Nþ2 cHaqaaa C], C2 aamuuume CBOù omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmOPOHb1 õaaHKa HeðocmamotlH0, 6b/ Moyeme ucnoab306amb òpyeyo cmop0HY âqamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

Test 13


This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

.Doyourparents       annoyedwithyou      bedroom's untidy? Mine do. My says I'm really lazy because / never tidy my room. How tia'yyour room? Do keep it althe tinte?/ think it's my so /      what / (ike it! what think? What deyou whenyou argue withyourparents about things like that?

Write back soon,

Love,

Tracy

 

Write back to Tracy answering her questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Most people believe that it's important to look nice. However, some people say that we place too much importance on appearance and fashion.

What can you say for and against caring about Use the following plan appearance and fashion? I. Introduction (State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.

                            Pa3neJ1         roBopeHne

Bbl noayqume ,tcapmowcy, Ha Komopoù npeòcmawwHb1 mpu aaÒaH1df1 ycnmo¿o omeema: C3 — me.uamuqecycoe .M0Hono¿uqecvcoe BblCKa3b1BaHUe,

C4 — ()uaaoe c tgevlb10 ot5.ueHa cþcwmuqecwoú uncþop.ua«ueù, C5 — ÒuŒ10Z c 1101b10 oõMeHC1

OIVHOLIHOÙ UHCþOPMCl"Ueðl. OKOHqaHUe 6b1PIOJIHeH11.q Kaycðozo .3aÒaH11fl onpeðeutflem 3K3Œuenamop. Bo upeJffl npoeeÒeHlffl omoð1 qacmu .9K.3aateHC1 uòem nocn10HHHafl .3anucb Ha ayòu0Kaccemy.

3aaaHv1S1 3K'3aMeHyeMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on public holidays. Remember to say:

     what public holidays there are during the year

     what people do on different public holidays

     which public holiday is your favourite, and why

     what you enjoy about other public holidays, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then heishe will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)


You are in a bookshop. You would like to start learning Italian. You want to be able to speak a little Italian when you go there on holiday in six months' time. You do not own a computer.

Before making a decision, ask the shop assistant about:

      Italian courses available

      how long the courses take

      any special offers

You begin the conversation. The teacher will play the part of the shop assistant.

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on which course to buy

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You are at an airport and your flight has been delayed by two hours. You and your friend are discussing how to spend this time. You can:

      play video games

      do some shopping

      watch the planes

      have a meal

      find somewhere to sleep

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

      discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas

      give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account

      invite vour friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

        Section 1 Listening: third task                Section 2 Reading: first task

        A        Listen and circle.                               B Match the words to their definitions.

a film. For each speaker, decide what

the speaker did not like about the

Speaker 1 the acting / the special effects / the story

Speaker 2 the acting / the special effects the story Speaker 3 the acting / the special effects the story

3 Listen to three speakers talking about a game. For each speaker, decide what the speaker found difficult. Speaker 1 understanding the rules / moving the pieces / setting up the board Speaker 2 understanding the rules / moving the pieces / setting up the board Speaker 3 understanding the rules / moving the pieces / setting up the board

1 Listen to three speakers talking about

 

 

a the clothes which actors

a restaurant. For each speaker,

I

rehearsal —

wear

decide what the speaker did not like

 

 

b the small book or leaflet

about the restaurant.

2

stage _

with information about

Speaker 1

 

 

the play

the prices / the service the food

3

costumes

c the things actors use in

Speaker 2

 

 

a play

the prices / the service / the food

4

director

d a time for the actors to

SPeaker 3

5

 

practise

programme

the prices / the service / the food

 

e the person who tells the

2 Listen to three speakers talking about

6

actors what to do part _

f the character that an actor

7     props — is playing g the people watching a

8    


audience _ play h the place where the actors perform

C  Quickly read the headings and six texts in the task on page 164. Underline all the words and phrases connected to the theatre and acting.

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

third task

D  Write a word from the box in each gap to complete the sentences.

            burgled • mugged • robbed stolen

1        I hope you weren't in the bank when it was being

2        Oh no! I think my wallet's been

3        Our neighbours' house was again last night.

4        Alan was  in the street last night; he was hurt but his attackers ran off before they could steal anything.

5        At  I thought you were guilty, but now I'm not so sure.

6        There were five people in the room at  ; probably fewer, in fact.

7        The exam was very difficult but at

 I managed to answer every question.

8        I've heard so much about you; it's so nice to meet you at

 disaster • destruction • damage • ruin

9        The house was almost a when we bought it; the walls had fallen down!

10   The  of the rainforests is a very serious problem.

11   The storm only caused a small amount of  to the building.

12   The meal would have been a if you hadn't helped me.

Section 4 Writing: first task

E    Read the first task on page 170. Rewrite each of the following statements in a more informal way. There may be more than one possibility.

1    Dear Jenny Williams,

2    1 would like to thank you for your recent letter.

3    1 had a similar experience and I found it unpleasant.

4    Would you mind telling me whether you know the girl well?

5   


I would advise you to inform the girl of your feelings.

6    I look forward to hearing from you in the

7

F    Match each response to a question.

1    When's your birthday?

2    What do you usually do on your birthday?    

3   
What's the best birthday present you've ever been given?     

f

G   Work in pairs or as a group to discuss which answer for each question is better, and why.


Test 14

                                              Pa3neJ1          AYAMI)0BaHÞfe

Bbl ycalbltuume 5 6btcyca3b16CIHuÙ. YcmaH06ume coomæmcmaue Me.ycÒy 6b1CKa3b16CIHURMU KCIYCÒOZO zoeopaugeeo I — 5 u ymeepYÒeH11HJtu,  cnucyce A — F. Mcno„Qb.3Yùme Kaycòyo õycey, oÕo.3Hauawu0'}0 ymgepycòemw, mŒ1bK0 omm pa.3. B aaðanuu ecmb oðno auumee ymaep*òenue.

A.     She reads more now than she used to.

B.      She doesn't buy books very often. C. She reads on the way to work every day.


D. She's teaching her children to read at the moment. E. She prefers reading books for children. F. She wants to write a book one day.

Bbl ycabltuume õeceðy apaqa c naguewno.u. Onpeòenume, }-ccucue 11.3 nPUeeÒëHHblX ymeepYòeH11ù Al-A6 coomæmcmeyom coòepyamuo meR•cma (1 ), KŒcue He coomuemcmeyom (2) u o qëM 6 mexcme He CKa.3tlHO, mo ecmb Ha ocH06tmuu mexcma Healb3f1 c)amb HI/ noaoycume.lb,qozo, Hil omeema (3). Oõgeðume Howuep 6b1ÕpaHHO?O ea.uu gapuawna omeema. Bbl yc-lbltuume .3anucb ðeaycòbl.

          Al     Mr Briggs often gets ill.

                                 l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B •reKcTe He CKa-gaHO

         A2     Another name for Mr Briggs' illness is the 'kissing disease'.

1)   BepH0             2) HeBepHO          3) B •rewre He CKtuaHO

         A3     Mr Briggs must start taking some medicine immediately.

                                 l) BepHO               2) HeBepHO               3) B •reKCTe He cK',13t1H0

         A4    Mr Briggs usually drinks some wine or beer in the evening.

                                 1) BepH0               2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKc•re He cwa•gaH0

         A5    Everyone with this illness recovers within three weeks.

                                 1) BepH0                2) HeBepH0               3) B -reKc-re He CK[13aHO

         A6    Mr Briggs will see the doctor again next Friday.

                                  l) BepH0                  2) HeBepHO                   3) B •rewre He CKt13t1HO

Test 14

Bbl ycablluume dblCKa3b16t1H11S1 aR)ðeù1 6 ce.uu paœ11d¼Hb1X cumva«unv. (_)maemwne Ha aonpocbt no coòepY(lHll/0 6b1cxa.3btuaH11ù, 6b1õpaa oòt1H 11.3 npeòaoyceHHb1.r aapuaumot$ ome,ema. B aaòaHll$1X A7-A13 oõaeòume 1/11Cþpy 1, 2 IL?LI 3, oõoanaqŒ0110'10 omaem, Komopblù e,Œu Kaycemcfl naut;oaee


Bbl yc.lbltuume Kaycòoe 6b1CKa.3btacmue Òaa.ycÒb1.

     You will hear a man talking about a restaurant called Luigi's. What was the problem?

I) The food was too expensive.

2)   His meal was cold.

A8

You will hear a woman talking to her doctor. Why has she come to see the doctor?

I) She has got spots all over her face.

2)   She has a problem with her stomach.

3)   She has been getting backache recently.

You will hear a boy talking to his parents. What does he want?

l) to watch a film on TV 2) to go to bed later than usual

3) a new computer game

AIO

You will hear an athlete talking about her training. What does she find difficult?

1)  getting up early

2)  running in the rain

3)  running on her own

All

You will hear a news report about a man. What did the man do?

1)   He bought stolen property.

2)   He committed some burglaries.

3)   He failed to appear in court.

A12

You will hear a woman talking about a film. What does she think about the film?

1)   It is funny.

2)   It is boring.

3)   It has a good ending.

A13

You will hear an advertisement. What makes the company different?

3)  


The service was poor.

l) They offer free design. 2) They offer free delivery.

3) They offer free installation.

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTLI CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHHMAHME, gyno omoenlbl HO' aaÒaH11f1 BI, Al-A13 pacnoaaea,zomctH 6 pae3HbLV qacmnr õaamca. BI pacnonoyceH0 e HUYCHeñ qacmu Õaamca. Ilpu nepeHoce on16em06 6 .3aðaHt111 BI õYKßb1 aanucbte,cnomcfl t5ea npoõeJ10ß u ,3HCIK06 npen11HaH11.q.


rest 14

                                      Pa3aeJ1        I-IrreHne

YcmaH0Bume coomæmcmaue me.}' A — G  I — 6. a-mecume ('6011 omeenlbl B maõautgy. Mcnoab.gyùme KaycÒYR) t5YKB_v mŒQbKO oÒurt paa. B aaðcutuu oðna me-'ta JIUtU1t51fl.

A. FINAL PRACTICE B. PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS

c. UNSEEN PEOPLE

D.     ACTORS' CLOTHES

E.      REMEMBERING WORDS

F.      INFORMATION BOOKLET G. WRONG WORDS

Ng "RKCTa

Testa

1

      2          

3

I Congratulations! the difficult bit: should you learn and, the more you lot of work to do at

2      The last rehearsal almost never go well. performance in front whole play has been costumes have been

3      Costumes are an create the wrong to feel comfortable

director's just called and you've got the part you wanted in the play. Now comes learning your lines. If it's a main part, that's a lot of speech to memorise. So how script? Firstly, don't panic. You don't have to be word perfect in the first rehearsal actually rehearse on stage, the easier memorising your lines becomes. But there is a home too.

of a play before the first performance is called the 'dress rehearsal'. Dress rehearsals Indeed, many actors believe that if the dress rehearsal goes well, the first of the public will be a disaster! The dress rehearsal is probably the first time the performed from start to finish in one go. It's also probably the first time all the worn, the lighting plan has been followed, and all the props have been used. extremely important part of any production. If you get the costumes wrong, you atmosphere, and that can be disastrous for a play. It's also very important for an actor in what they're wearing. There are practical considerations here. A costume may be lovely to look at, but if it stops an actor from moving in the way that he or she wants to, then it's getting in the way of the performance and should be changed.

4 One of the worst things you can do to an actor before a performance is wish him or her 'Good luck!' In the theatre in Britain, saying 'Good luck!' is considered very bad luck, and should be avoided at all costs. If you want to express the meaning without actuallv using those words, you should say 'Break a leg!'. This doesn't mean, of course, that you want the actor to break a leg. It means you hope that their performance is a success.

5     The programme is the audience's first contact with the play on the night, and it's important to make a good impression. A good programme should give background information about the play if necessary, short biographies of the playwright, the cast, and director and the full cast list, including the names of the characters they are plaving. The names of all the backstage crew should be listed in the programme too. If there are different scenes and acts in the play, these should be mentioned. If there's an interval, that should be indicated as well.

6     A play cannot be put on without a number of people who the audience never get to see. The director is one such person. There's also the backstage crew, and they do an extremely important job. The director has responsibility for the play during rehearsals, but it's a member of the backstage crew, the stage manager, who's in charge during performances. Lighting technicians, costume designers and sound engineers are all also part of the backstage crew.

Test 14

Ilpoqumaùme ymoepYòeH11H 1 — 6 u caeòyouguðl aa HILUII maccm Ycmanoaume coomaemcmaue vueyòy ymeepycòeH11f1vuu u coòep.ycanue.&t mexcma. Hamuuume uucþpy 1 — ecau ymaepyòenue aepttoe, u I'll(þpy O — ec,lld ymaepycòenue Heeepnoe. 30Hecume ('6011 omaenlbl 6 maõau«y.


I

2

3

4

5

6

it

 

The ancient Egyptians made use of the sun to help tell the time.

The ancient Chinese were unable to measure time.

The first mechanical clocks had bells rather than hands.

The hand on a table clock moved every fifteen minutes.

Most people say that Galileo invented the pendulum clock.

Clocks nowadays are used for more than just showing us what time is.


What time is it? To answer that question today, all we have to do is look at a watch or clock. It wasn't always that simple, however.

For thousands of years, people have wanted a more accurate way of telling the time than merelv looking at the position of the sun in the sky to see how close to dawn or nightfall it is. We know that the ancient Egyptians had sundials, which required sunlight to work, and it is thought they also had a way of measuring time using running water. The ancient Chinese also developed non-mechanical ways to measure the passing of time. The first mechanical clock appeared around the 9th century. This did not have hands as modern clocks do. Early mechanical clocks 'told' the time by ringing bells, although they were not very accurate.

The first reasonably accurate clocks were developed in Italy in the 13th century. Unlike modern clocks, they did not tell the time to the nearest minute; rather, they announced when an hour had passed.

Table clocks became popular in the 1500s. They usually only had one hand, which had four possible positions each hour, allowing someone to tell the time to the nearest fifteen minutes.

1

2

4

5

6

In 1657 the pendulum clock was invented. Although Galileo came up with a similar idea first, it is Christiaan Huygens who is generally considered to be the inventor. Since then, clocks have become more and more accurate. Today, clocks are not just used to tell us the time. They are also used to control other devices. The clock on a video cassette recorder, for example, can be programmed to start and stop recording at a certain time.



npoqumaùme meKcm u 6btnoaHume .3ac)aHtlH A14-A20, OÕ60Òf1 tgucþpy 1, 2, 3 11.111 4, coomuemcme_woucwo H0Mepy 6btõpaHH0?0 6Œuu 6apuawna omeema.


A14

Carrie had chosen to join the Debating Club because it was 1) at the bottom of the list of possible activities.

2)   the only activity which didn't take place outdoors.

3)   the activity on the list she disliked least of all.

4)   a chance to give speeches in front of strangers.

A15

The following Thursday, Carrie realised for the first time that 1) she would actually have to speak in public.

2)   she didn't believe in capital punishment at all.

3)   Miss Forbes would always decide the speakers.

4)   she was allowed to volunteer to be a speaker.

A16

Miss Forbes told Carrie that Carrie's main responsibility would be to 1) help Alison come up with a list of points to make.

2)   write Alison's speech for her before the debate.

3)   answer the opposition's questions during the debate.

4)   disagree with arguments made by the opposing team.

Al 7

Carrie was glad the debate had been arranged at another school because 1) she would be able to use a microphone there.

2)   her friends wouldn't be able to see her fail.

3)   the atmosphere would help her succeed.

4)   she had never taken part in a debate there.

(AIS

In the Main Hall before the debate, Carrie felt that everyone in the room 1) could hear her heart beating.

2)   was looking at her hands shaking.

3)   expected her to do badly.

4)   knew she would drop her things.

A19

Carrie was particularly impressed that Alison

l) had written her speech on several pieces of paper.

2)   had made so many clear, forceful arguments.

3)   didn't look at the papers in front of her at all.

4)   had memorised her speech before the debate.

A20

During Clare's speech, Carrie was surprised that she I) had found a point to make in her own speech.

2)   was able to remember Clare's exact words.

3)  


had time to make a note next to Clare's words.

4)   could make notes on the piece of paper so quickly.

[10 OKOHWHUU 132, 133 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTM CBOII OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeembt Ha aaðaH11H B2, B3 u A14-Ä20 pacnoaazŒomcH 6 PC13HbLV qacmax tîaawca. B2, B3 pacno.ao.yceHb1 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa. Tlpu nepeHoce omesem06 6 3aðaHlŒx B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucb16a»omcH õea npoõeA06 u 3HaK06 npemu-taHlffl.

                           Pa3aeJ1           rpaMMaTÐIKa JleKCHKa

Test 14

[Ipoqumaúme mel€cm 3ano.QHume nponycK11 6 npeòaoyceHllfLr noð H0.uepa.uu B4-BI I coome,emcmeyouguatu cþOPMŒuu c-106, '-taneqamaHHbLr saua6HbLMU ÕYK6CLUll cnpa6a om rcaycÒo¿o npeòJ10yeHllH.

npoqumaùyne npueeðeHHblù Hil.yce me}ccm Ilpeoõpaayùme caoøa, HaneqamaHHbte aa¿aaBHbLML1 nocae H0Jtep0ß B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHII epa,u.uamuqecycu u JWKCI"WCKU coomæmcmeoaaau coòepyaH1110 meKcma. 301/10JIHume nponycycu noayt1C'HHbLUU caoaaatu. Kaycòblù nponycK coomeemcmeyem omòeabH0MY aaòamuo 113 ppynžlbl B12-B 18.

Since the days of Christopher Columbus it has been a tradition for a ship B12     to fly a flag showing what  it is.

            B13       More recently, this has become a legal

            B14       Almost every country in the world has its own  flag, called

an 'ensign', which is flown at sea. Some countries have two ensigns:

B15 one for private boats and one for ships carrying a cargo of products. A boat in the waters of a foreign country should always fly two flags: its own ensign and the flag of the foreign country. To not fly the

            B16    other country's flag  meant you had not come in peace.

B17       Even today, the rules  the flying of flags on boats and ships are often strictly enforced.

Ensigns should not be confused with flags used for signalling. With these flags, there is one flag for every number and letter of the alphabet and B18 each flag has an additional when used on its own.

[Ipoqumaùme moccm c nponycpca.uu, OÕ03HaqeHHbL8tll Ho-uepa.uu A21-A28. 3mu H0.uepa coomgemcmøyom aaÒCIHUfLVt A21-Ä28, 6 npeòcmaaaeHbl 60.1UOYCHblC' e,apucmmbl omeemoe. Oõeeòume H0Jtep 6blÕPaHH020 ea.uu eapuawna omeema.

Tonya didn't know whether to laugh or cry. She certainly knew she'd never been in a situation like this before, and hoped she never would again. She also knew that the worst A21  would be to panic. She had to stay calm. She sat on a bench to think things through. 'I'm in a foreign country,' she said to herself. 'All my money, my mobile phone and my passport were in my bag. My bag's been A22  Or maybe I just left it somewhere — I don't know. Should I go to the police or the embassy?'

She decided to go to the police first, Maybe, just maybe, someone had A23 in her bag or the thief had been caught. But how would she find the nearest police station? She'd have to ask someone.

The man in the newsagent's was helpful and polite, which put a slight smile back on Tonya's face, and she soon found herself talking to a police officer in Marylebone Police Station. 'Thank goodness my English isn't bad. At A24  I can communicate easily,' she thought. 'It would be a lot worse if I couldn't understand 8that he was asking me.'

The officer took down her A25  and went to see if her bag was in the lost property room. 'Oh, please let it be there,' thought Tonya. 'What am I going to do if it's not?'

When the officer returned, she saw from the expression on his face that her worst fears had been realised. Now she really was in A26  She wiped away the tears that were starting to run down her cheeks.

'Please don't get upset,' he said kindly. 'Every problem's got a solution. I'm not quite sure what yours is in this A27  , but I'm sure there is one. You did the right thing coming to us anyway.'

Three hours later, Tonya was sitting in a small room in the embassy. From what she'd been told by the embassy staff, if the bag didn't turn up by tonight, they'd have no choice but to put her on a plane back home. 'What a complete A28  ,' she thought. 'But I suppose it is a trip I'll never forget.'

A21                 1) result                  2) reply                 3) response          4) report

A22                 1) robbed                2) stolen                3) burgled            4) mugged

A23                    ) delivered             2) passed                3) found                4) handed

A24                  l) least                    2) most                 3) last                   4) first

A25                  1) facts                     2) details                3) truth                  4) reality

A26                   l) problem               2) trouble               3) mess                 4) crisis

A27                  l) state                    2) order                3) condition         4) case

A28                 1) disaster                  2) destruction 3) damage             4) ruin


no B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATWTE BHMMÄHME, gyno omeenlbl Ha aaòaH1ffi B4-B18 u Ä21-Ä28 pacnoaauuomca 6 pa.3HbLr qacmŒl-r ÕJICIHKa. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHb1 a HUYCHCÙ yacmu ÕaaH}€a. npu nepew»ce omewmot$ 6 3aÒaHUfLV B4-BI 8 õYK6bl aanucb16cuomc,q õea npoõev106 u BHCIKOB npenunaHlffl.

169

                                     Pa3AeJ1        IlHCbMO

       omcemoe Ha               CI, C2 ucnoabavúme WIAHK OTBETOB

Ilpu        .3aòcmuù CI u C2 ocoóoe anu.uanue oõpamume Ha mo, qmo eatUU omeembl õyòym 014é'HueambcF1 moJ1bKO no aanucnu, CðenaHHbLU e bJIAHKE OTBETOB v'V2. Htuca»cue aanucu qepH061Œa He õyðym yqumb16an1bcf1.9Kcnepmo.u.

aamuuume c601v1 omeem Ecau oðHOÙ cmop0Hb1 õaaHKa Heðocmam0LIH0, Bbl M0.yceme ucnoabJoe,amt. òpyzyo cmopo,tty Õaamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from Jenny, your English pen friend.

                            ever-forgotten to         tv a party? / thiMk that's what's happendtv me.

Test 14

been invited. should/ say something to her? /just ignore it andnot invite her to my nextparty? Doyou think / shouldyo the pay" awway.2 Help!

Write back to Jenny answering her questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

A number ofpeople believe that pocket money teaches teenagers to be responsible with money. Others say that teenagers are too young to deal with money and that their parents should just buy them what they need.

Do you think that being given pocket money teaches teenagers anything? Write 200-250 words.

Use the following plan

1    Introduction (State the problem).

2    Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

3    Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong. 4 Conclusion.

                               Pa3neJ1         roBopeHne

Bbl nonyqume KapmotlKY, Ha R•omopoù npeòcmaaaeHb1 mpu .3aðaH11fi ðaa ycmHoeo omaema.• C3 — me.uamuqecycoe Jtonoaoeugecwoe Bblcwaabteauue,

C4 — òuaaoe c lge.1b10 otIueHa cþcucmuqecK0ù tmcþop.ua«ueù, C5 — òua.aoe c lge.1b'0 oãut'Ha

OIVHO¼HOÙ 11Hcþop.ua«ueú. OKOH¼CIHIW 6btž10.QHeHUH Kaycðo¿o aaðaHlffl onpeòeaaem 3K.3Œuenamop. Bo epe.u.q npoeeòeH11f1 .•moù qacmu 9K.3aateJ--ta uòem nocmom-lHafl aanucb Ha ayð110Kaccemy.

3aaaHV151  3K3aMeHveMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on mobile phones. Remember to say:

                  if you have a mobile phone

                  what people use mobile phones for when mobile phones are useful

                  if mobile phones are ever annoying

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are at a pop concert. You want to buy an item of clothing as a souvenir. You want something in bright colours, and the size must be medium.

Before making a decision, ask the sales assistant about:

      the clothing available

      what is printed on the clothing

      colours

      size

The teacher will play the part of the sales assistant and will speak first.

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on which item of clothing to buy

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and a friend are planning to spend a week's holiday in a city about 1,000 kilometres away from where you live. You are deciding how to get there. Your friend has a driving licence but you do not. You can go by:

      hitchhiking

      bus • train

      plane

• rented car

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite

• come up with ideas give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: first task

A Look at the first task on page 174. Match each of the statements A-F to one of the holidays below.

1    a holiday visiting a remote

          Chinese village                     Statement

2    a holiday in a place that has informative websites Statement

3 a climbing holiday in

      America                     Statement

4 a driving holiday with a very detailed schedule     Statement

5 a holiday in a country where

          English is spoken                Statemen t

6 a holiday relaxing by a swimming pool      Statement

B Read the statements again and decide which, if any, are true for you. Explain why.

Section 2 Reading: second task

1 Yellowstone

a a peninsula in Russia

2 Wyoming —

b an American state

3 John Colter

c a geyser

4 Old Faithful —

d a national park

5 Kamchatka —

e an explorer

C Read the text on page 177 and match.

3     There are           hotels in the park.

4     In the , the wolf became extinct in the area.

5    


Old Faithful blows water into the air about every minutes.

6     Yellowstone National Park has visitors a vear.

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: second task

E    Read the text with questions B12-B18 on page ISO. For each gap, decide what kind of word (noun, adjective, etc) fills each gap.

B12

B13

B14

B15 B16

B17 BIS

F     Complete the table. Include negative adjectives where appropriate.

verb

noun

adjective

discover

help

appear

friend

nature

taste

capable


2 Yellowstone became a national park in


D Read the text again and complete the sentences using some of the numbers in the box. You will not use all the numbers.

50 • 1806 • 60 • 1872 • 1930s • 3,000,000

9 • 3,470 • 311 • 1990s

1 You can see different kinds of bird in the park.


Section 4 Writing: second task

G Circle the correct word or phrase to complete the composition. - Almost everyone these days has a mobilephone andmany ofus be unable to (ire without one. (I) However, there arepeople who argue that we not be awe to use mobile

phones whenever we like.


(2) /t / There is no doubt that mobilephones are

extreme/' useful This is particular/' true when you need to contact svmevne analno ordinary phone is available. (3) For/ By example, ifyour car has broken down needassistance, having a mobilephone might mean thatyou Ho not have to (eave the car and walk a long way tv help.

On the other (4) side / hand there are many situations when mobiles can causeproblems for otherpeople. //you are the cinema, (S) with / for instance, a mobile ringing can be extremely annoyiM¶. There are (6) also /as welltimes, sach (7) (ike /as in class at school, when it wouldbe disrespectful tv have a mobile switchedon. A (8) mere /further argument that is made against mobilephones is that they damage our health. Most scientists, (q) however/although, believe that this is not the case.

To (10) conclusion /conc/ude, mobilephones make oar lives easier iM many ways. In my (Il) opinion / mind, there are occasions when using mobile is not appropriate and we always consider otherpeople before deciding whether to have ourphone switcheden vr Mat. (12) However /Although somepeople believe that mobiles are badfor our health, / (13) / personally de not accept that argument, (14) because /so / dc.' not think that be a reason for restricting their use.

 

a

Section 5 Speaking: second task

H   Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 183. Write a word from the box in the correct form in each gap to complete these questions.

arrive be • cost • get • reach • take

I       What time does the plane       to Plymouth?

2          How much does the coach

3         Are there any trains that

Plymouth before eleven o'clock?

4         Does the trainin Plymouth before eleven o'clock? 5 How much  the plane fare?

6 Can I a coach to Plymouth from here?

I Rewrite sentences 1-3 in Exercise H beginning with the words given. I Could you tell me

2      1 wonder if you could tell me

3      Do you know if


                                   Pa3neJ1       AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycylbauume 5 6btCKC13bwaHUÙ. YcmaH06ume coom6emcn16ue Meycòy 6blCKa3b16ClHUfLUU KCIYCÒO?O eoeopauge¿o I — 5 u ymeepYòeHldH.uu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 cnucyce A — F. Mcnoabayùme Kaycðvyo õYK6V, oõ03Haqwougyo ymeepyðemte, moabK0 oÒt1'1 pa.3. B aaÒanuu ecmb         auuutee ymaepycòenue. Bbl yc.lblluume .3anucb Ò6CIYCÒb1. 3Œecume ('6011 omgembl 6 maãauuy.

A.     He likes to visit places that other tourists don't normally go to.

B.      He prefers holidays that have been carefully planned. C. He finds it difficult to communicate when he is abroad.

Test 15

D. He likes holidays where he doesn't have to make many arrangements. E. He prefers to spend his holidays doing something active. F. He enjoys visiting places he knows something about.

FOBOP¶IIUIÏI

       1                         2

3

4                         5

 

YTBepxneHVte

 

 

 

 

Bbl ycablžuume paaeoeop penopmepa c òupeycmopo.u .uyae.q. Onpeòeaume, KCIKtte 11.3 npueeÒëHHb1X ym€epycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomeemcnlßyom coòepycamuo meKcma (1), He coomgemcmayom (2) U O   6 moccme He CKa.3ŒO, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUU meŒccma He-lb.3H ðantb Hit nonoyume.QbH0?0, Hil omeema (3). Oõeeòume HOJtep 6b1ÕPaHH020 ea.U11 eapuawna omeema. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb ()eaycÒb1.

Al Somebody has stolen a painting from the museum. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B -reKCTe He CKt13aHO

A2 This is the first time something has been stolen from the museum. 1) BepH0 2) HeBepH0 3) B •rewre He CKt13aHO

     A3     The crime happened during the night.

1)  BepH0        2) HeBePHO          3) B -reKCTe He CKa3aH0

     A4    Two people were working at the museum when the crime happened.

                          l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3) B •reKc•re He cKagaH0

     A5     The museum is closed at the moment.

                          l) BepHO               2) HeBepHO               3) B TeKCTe He cKt13'dH0

     A6    The police think they will probably catch the criminals.

                           I) BepH0                2) HeBepH0               3) B •reKc•re He CKUŽIHO

Test 15

Bbl yc.lbltuurne unmep6bJ0 c me-aeou.3110HHbLM npomocepo.M. B 3aÒaH1dHX A7-A13 oõoeòume gucþpy I, 2 11.11/ 3, coonwemcmeyougyo 6b1t5paHH0.uy 6Œuu eapuawny omeema. Bbl yc./tbtluume aanucb

c)uaycòbl.

Liz says that she

1)   works at a national TV channel.

2)   runs her own video production business.

3)   is employed to find production companies.

 Liz explains that her main role is to I) buy and sell TV programmes.

2)  appear in and present TV programmes. 3) organise and plan TV programmes.

A9 Liz is involved in making I) game shows.

2)    comedy shows.

3)    a range of different shows.

AIO According to Liz, most TV producers

I) work their way up from other positions.

2)    take training courses to learn the job.

3)    start doing the job with very little experience.

All Liz thinks that she could be better at

I) predicting what programmes will be popular.

2)   dealing with difficult people on the shows,

3)   working out the cost of a new programme.

A12 Liz believes that she knows what viewers want because she I) talks to a lot of other TV producers, 2) conducts a lot of research.  3) watches a lot of television.

A13 Liz says that most people who watch her programmes 1) like learning new facts.

2) dream of appearing on them. 3) want to work in television.

110 Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B Fv7AHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo Ha B], Al-A13  qacmax ÕJtamca. BI pacnoao.yceH0 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu ÕJIClHKa. TIPI/ nepeHoce on16em06 B .3aðaHuu BI ÕVK6b1 aanucblea,zomc.q õea npoõeaoe u .31fflKOB npemmaHllH.

175

Test 15

                                         Pa3neJ1        I-Irrerme

YcmaHoaume coomoemcmaue meM .4 — G mewma.u I — 6. 3Œecume caou omeenlbl B maõau«y. Ifcno,lbavùme Kaycðyo õYK6Y moabK0 oÒun pa.3. B aaðanuu oðl-ta me.ua

A. HOUSING SOLUTION B. TRANSPORT IMPROVEMENTS

c. SAFE AREAS

D.     NATURAL REGIONS

E.      MODERN ARCHITECTURE

F.       PROTECTED HISTORY G. GENEROUS BUILDERS

1946 and 1970, 21 new towns were built in Britain. Town planners knew that the number

Britain was going to increase and those people would need somewhere to live. Eight Of towns were built in the areas surrounding London and were designed to provide homes for population of the city. The others were built to provide accommodation in other areas numbers of people worked. More than two million people now live in new towns.

of traffic on Britain's roads increased quickly after the Second World War. People knew system was not good enough for the increase, so motorways were built. These are large are designed to take a lot of heavy traffic, with three lanes in each direction. The first which today is part of the M6, opened in 1958. It was an immediate success and since have continued to make travelling by road faster.

protect areas of countryside, a number of English towns have created what are known as Building within a green belt is very tightly controlled and the area is protected from developments. This helps to prevent towns from growing so much that they destroy the the surrounding areas. Since 1 955, 14 different green belts have been set up, covering of England.

century Britain, many factory owners and other businessmen made large amounts of some cases, they decided to give something back to their community by providing money schools, libraries or hospitals. Many wealthy Victorians (as the people who lived under are called) felt it was their responsibility to provide places where the poor could learn their chances, or where they could get healthcare. A number of these buildings still

1960s, many British towns have created 'pedestrianised areas'. Cars are not allowed in and they are sometimes known as 'auto-free areas'. They enable people to shop on foot of being in an accident. Visitors to the town centre feel more comfortable and don't have traffic or worry about their children, as they would if cars were permitted.

in Britain that are important might be added to a government list. These listed buildings special for archaeological reasons or they may be of historic interest. There are many on changing listed buildings in order to preserve their character. A number of churches, houses, castles and museums are listed so that future generations can enjoy them and can only change them after getting special permission.

I Between of people these new the grcȊng where large

2      The amount that the roads that motorway, then

3      In order to 'green belts'. housing beauty of about 12%

4      In nineteenth


in

road

money. In to build Queen Victoria and improve stand today.

5     Since the these areas without fear to avoid

6     Buildings may be restrictions large country the owners

No •reKcera

1

2

3

4

5

 

Test 15

 

[Ipoqumaùme ymeep.ycðeH14f1 1 — 6 u caeðyouguù aa HUMU moccm Ycmanoeume coomgemcmeue .ueycòy ymaepycðt'H11fLM11 u coc)epyccmueu me,tccma. Hanutuume Igucþpy I —    ymeepycÒeHue eepHoe, u I'll(þpy O — ecau ymeepyòemue neeepHoe. 3Œtecume ceou omeembl 6 maõau«y.

I Yellowstone is named after the man who discovered it.

2     American Indians first heard about the area in 1806.

3     Another name for Yellowstone National Park is Old Faithful.

4     Yellowstone National Park is the only place on Earth where geysers exist.

5     It is possible to stay in a tent inside the park.

6     IVb/ves can be seen today in Yellowstone National Park.

Yellowstone National Park is in the north-west corner of the American state of Wyoming. This national park covers an area of 3,470 square miles and its name comes from certain rocks that have a yellow colour because of the chemicals in them. It was explored by a man named John Colter in 1806, although native American Indians had known about the area for thousands of years.

Yellowstone is famous for its geysers. These are hot springs that explode and send water and steam into the air. They occur when underground water meets hot rock far beneath the surface of the earth. The water boils and is forced back to the surface, where it explodes upwards. The most famous is called Old Faithful and it sends thousands of litres of boiling water into the air approximately once an hour. Gevsers are quite rare but can also be found in places such as the Kamchatka peninsula, Russia.

About three million people visit the park each year, most either camping or staying in one of the park's nine hotels. Many of them enjoy picnics or walks through the park, where they might spot some of the 50 or so species of mammals and 311 species of birds. The park advises visitors to be verv careful and to remember that many of the larger wild animals, including bears, can be dangerous. Another potentially dangerous animal, the wolf, disappeared from the park in the 1930s. However, it was reintroduced in the 1990s in order to control the population of large animals, such as bison and elk, and is doing well.

Since Yellowstone was made into a national park in 1872, many other national parks have been created to protect areas of natural beauty.

            1                         2

3

4

5

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

Test 15

[Ipoqumaùme maccm u ßblnoamune ,3aÒaHllH A 14420, OÕ60ÒH gucþpy I, 2, 3 unu 4, coomaemcnlßyyougyo H0Mepy 6blÕpaHHO?O ea.uu gapuawna omgema.

Terry stood on deck as the ferry slowly arrived at the island. He watched the sailors throw ropes to their colleagues on shore and then looked up at the villages of small white houses that dotted the mountainside above the small town. He was planning a six-month stay, much longer than the few days or weeks that the noisy crowds of tourists around him were planning. He had given himself that long to write a novel and he was determined to succeed, whatever the temptations to enjoy himself might be. Leaving his life behind was just the thing he needed, he thought, and the island seemed to him to be the ideal place for it. He collected his things and made his way onto the concrete quay.

He was immediately surrounded by local people, all rudely pushing each other out of the way to offer him a room that was guaranteed to be 'the cheapest in town', although he knew that they couldn't all be the cheapest. Terry politely shook his head and peered around for the Paradise Hotel and one 'Mrs Magda'. She had sounded quite intimidating on the phone, so when a young woman approached him and quietly asked in perfect English if he was Terry Snow, he wasn't sure how to respond. The woman smiled and said: 'Perhaps you were expecting my mother? I hope you are not disappointed.'

'N ... No, no. Not at all,' stammered Terry. She picked up one of his bags and they set off into the small town. She asked him about his stay and he told her that his plan was to stay a week at the hotel while he found more permanent accommodation.

'Six months is a long time to be on the island,' she said. 'You'll find it different in winter. Once, there was farming and fishing on the island but they've practically disappeared. Tourism is the only source of income and so few of the locals fancy sitting and watching winter come when the tourists leave. Almost all of them have second jobs on the mainland and the heart has been ripped out of the place.' 'And you?' Terry asked.

'I went away to the mainland for my education. Since I came back, I stay here all year round.' They stopped outside a hotel. It reminded Terry of an old woman who still managed to keep a certain air of dignity. It could do with a bit of paint and one of the letters in the name was missing, but it must have once been one of the most impressive buildings on the island. Terry began to wonder about its decline and what caused it but realised that the young woman was waiting for him to say something.

'I'm sorry,' he said. 'What did you say?'

'I asked you what you thought of the hotel.' She looked at it. 'Since Dad died, it hasn't been the same. Mum gets a few of the local men in to help out every now and then, but you never do as good a job when you're being paid as when it's an act of love, do you? And Dad loved that hotel. It was his gift to his grandchildren, he used to say.' Terry looked at the hotel again. He felt that he had come somewhere where buildings were much more than shelter. Each brick held a story ready to be unlocked and he felt inspired just by touching them. If he felt like that after such a short time, imagine what he might achieve in six months.

'Well, maybe I could help out a bit, while I'm here,' he said, excitedly. The young woman nodded and said, 'Maybe,' before leading the way into the cool interior of the hotel.


Test 15

A14 Terry thinks the island looks

1)   like it will be too noisy for him.

2)   suitable for what he wants to do.

3)   too far from the mainland for him.

4)   so relaxing that he will never do any work.

A15      Terry rejects the offers of rooms because I) he has heard that it is easy to be cheated.

2)   no one asks him politely to look at a room.

3)   he has already booked somewhere.

4)   he would rather find a hotel himself.

A16 Terry is surprised when the young woman speaks to him because 1) she was much less attractive than he had hoped.

2)   her English is better in real life than on the phone.

3)   he was expecting to meet someone different.

4)   he thought he would have to find the hotel on his own.

A17   The young woman tells Terry that

I) traditional sources of money have become less important.

no 132, 133 u Ä14-Ä20 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTn OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB El !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo Ha B2, m u A14-A20 pa.3HbLr qacmfLr â1CIHKC1. B2, B3 pacnono.yceHb1 6 HUNCHeÚ qacmu ÕaaHRa. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemo,3 e aaðauuax B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucbtuawmc•a õe.3 npoõe.aoe u 3HCIK06 npen11HCIHLffl.

2)   most local people are relieved when the tourists finally go.

3)   people complain about the effects of tourism on local industry. 4) sometimes tourists find work and decide to stay longer.

AIS    It seems to Terry that the hotel

I) has never been an attractive building.

2)   has had work done on it recently.

3)   makes an impression on everyone who sees it. 4) used to be nicer than it is now.

A19    The young woman says that one problem is that

1)   her mother can no longer afford to pay people to work on the hotel.

2)   nobody in the area is willing to do this sort of work.

3)   workmen are less careful when they don't own the building.

4)   some people pretend to enjoy the work and then do it badly.

A20    Terry is excited by the idea of

I) finally doing some physical work instead of just writing.

2) getting ideas for his work from the things around him.

3) spending six months researching the history of the island. 4) building a house of his own on the island one day.

Test 15


                           Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTMKa JleKCVfKa

 

Tlpoqumaùme moccm 3anoaHume nponycrcu 6 npeðaoyceHunx nor) HOJtepŒUU B4-B11 coomaemcmtgyotgu.&tu caot3, HaneqamaHHb1.r aaaaa6HbLMU ÕYK6ŒM11 cnpaga om žca.ycò0?0

 

Animal helpers

Animals can be pets, but they can also be much more. Ever since dogs first humans on the hunt, animals have worked with people.    JOIN

Dogs, of course, work with people in many different ways, such as sheep on farms. CONTROL

B6 They can also to help blind people find their way around. TRAIN There are of other animals that help people, including LOT horses, camels and elephants.

In the past, horses were an important means of transport in Europe and both people and goods.           CARRY

Cars soon replaced horses for most jobs because they could go

B9         faster and                                                                                                             FAR

BIO      In Asia today, as in the past, elephants        to transport      USE heavy loads in areas where cars cannot go.

As long as there are jobs for them to do, we can be sure that our animal

Bli partners                                    to help us.                                                                    CONTINUE

flpoqumaùme npu€eÒeHHb1Ú HilŽyce mewnz Ilpeoõpaayùme cnoea, HaneqamaHHb1e .3a?M6Hb1.M11 ÕYRBCLUU nocae HOMep06 B12-B18 maK, qmoÕbl OHU epŒuatamuqecKll u aeKC11tWCKU coomaemcmaoeaau coòepycamuo mcwcma. 361110JIHume nponycK11 PIOAVLIC'HHbLM11 CJ106Œuu. Ka.ycòblli nponyt'K coomaemcmeyem omðClbH0Jty aaòamuo 11.3 epynm,l B12-B18.

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

B17

1318

The of the island of Mauritius in 1505 was the beginning of the end for the dodo. The dodo was a large bird which was  of flying and so spent its entire life on the ground. When people first spotted the bird in 1598, it seemed to have no fear of humans and was quite

This was because it had always lived on an island where it had no  enemies.

The people on the island didn't find the dodo  to eat, but the cats and dogs that arrived with the people did. The dodo was completely  and by the 1690s it had died out on the island. The story of the dodo's  is just one example of man's effect on the environment.

DISCOVER

CAPABLE

FRIEND

NATURE

TASTE

HELP

APPEAR

 

Test 15

 

 

 

 

[Ipoqumaùme meKt•m c nponycKœ,tu, OÕO.3HaqeHHbL}tU H0Jtepa.uu A21-A28. 3mu 110Mepa coom6emcn16yom 3aÒaH11fLM A21-A28, 6 Kon10Pb1X npeòcma6aeHbl 60.3MOYCHble 6apuaHnlb1 omeemoa. Oõeeòume H0Mep 6blÕpaHHoeo eauu eapuawna omeema.

We take it for A21  that a week is seven days, but where does the idea come from, and where do the names for days of the week come from? It's difficult to be certain, but we can make some educated guesses. The story starts in ancient Babylon, the capital city of an empire in what is now Iraq. The Babylonians were A22  on astronomy and were interested in measuring time. It is from them that we have A23  the idea that there are sixty minutes in an hour and sixty seconds in a minute. Unlike the Egyptians, who divided their months into sets of ten days, the Babylonians split the month A24  into four lots of seven days. The Hebrews, in ancient Israel, used the seven-day week, as we can see from the first book of the Bible, which describes God creating the Earth in seven days. Christianity A25 the idea to the Romans, who used a seven-day week throughout their empire.

In some languages, such as Russian and Greek, most of the days of the week are named after their numerical position (first, second, etc). However, in English the days A26  their names from gods, as they did in Latin. When the Angles and the Saxons invaded England in the 500s, they kept some of the local names (Sunday, named after the Sun, Monday after the Moon and

Saturday after the planet Saturn), but named others after their own gods. Tuesday is named after Tiw, the god of war, while Wednesday is the day of Odin (or Woden as he was also known), who was the

A27  god in Anglo-Saxon mythology. Odin's son, Thor, gives us Thursday. The Angles and Saxons believed that thunder was the sound of Thor's magic hammer. Friday is the only day of the week to be named after a goddess — Freyr. Freyr was the goddess of love and stories about her describe her as being very beautiful. She travelled in a wagon pulled by eight cats and could change herself into the A28  of any bird.


A21                 1) granted              2) given                3) assumed          4) presumed

A22                  1) obsessed              2) eager                 3) keen                  4) enthusiastic


A23                  I) donated              2) requested         3) inherited         4) descended

A24                 1) up                        2) out                    3) off                    4) on

A25                  l) repeated               2) broadcast        3) shared              4) spread

A26                   l) give                      2) have                   3) make                 4) take

A27 I) lead 2) chief 3) front 4) advance A28 I) condition 2) set 3) state 4) shape

170      B4-B18, Å21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTU CBC)" OTBETb1 B IMAI-IK OTBETOB     !

ObPATÞ[TE BHMMAHME,   Ha        B4-B18 U A21-A28                           pa.3Hb1X qacmnx õaaH}ca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHb1 6 HilYHeð1 Ltacmu ÕaaHKC1. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoe a aaòaHuax B4-B18 õYK6b1 aanucb1BŒomcf1 õe.3 npoõeaoß u .3HaK06 npenu,qauun.

                                       Pa3neJ1        Il"CbMO

omeem06 Ha aaòaH11.q C], C2 ucnoabayùyne WIAHK OTBETOB ,hê2.

Tlpu 6bl,'lOJtHeHUU aaòaHt1ù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHUJtaHUe ot;pamume Ha mo, Limo gaunt omaentbt õyòym OlßH116ambCH moa1bK0 no aanucf1.M, CÒœ1í1HHbLM e WIAHKE OTBETOB JE2. Huycaycue aanucu LtepH061uca He õvðym vqumbtganlbcg .9Kcnepm0JL

.ganutuume ceoù omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1 Õaayuca Heòocmamot1H0, 6bl .uoyceme ucno.m,aoeantb

c)pyeyo cmopo,yy atamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.


This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

        rea,ý to take exams at the moment? / am, but I'm          it         to remember all the important facts. Doyou             it easy to revise? How doyou study? How many hours a Might spend revising? Haveyou get any adviceyou couldgive me?

Write back seen!

Love,

Jason

 

Write back to Jason answering his questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many teenagers enjoy playing computer games. Some people, however, believe that teenagers should spend their free time doing more physical activities.

What can you say for and against teenagers     Use the following plan playing computer games?         I. Introduction (State the problem).

Write 200-250 words.                                                2. Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against"

4.   Conclusion.

Test 15

                               Pa3neJ1        roBopeH11e

Bbl noayqume Kapmoçy, Ha Komopoú npeòcma6aeHb1 mpu aaÒaH11f1 ycmHo¿o omeema.• C3 — meatamuqeucoe MOHOaoeuqeCKOe 6b1CKa3blßanue,

C4 — ()uaaoe c          oÕ.ueHa (þwonutlecwoðl lŒcþOPMa«ueÙ, C5 — òuaaoe c         oÕMeHa

OlßHO¼HOÙ UHØOP.MCII(IWÙI. OKOHqaH11e KCIYÒO?O aaðaHllH onpeòe,lfžem 3K3Œue»qamop. Bo ape.',tfl npoæòenun amoù qacmu .)K3Œ1teHa uòem nocn10HHHG'+l aanucb Ha ayòuŒaccemy.

3aaaH11fl 3K3aMeHyeMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on your favourite place.

Remember to say:

      where your favourite place is

      how often you go there

      what you like to do there

      why it is your favourite

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are in a travel agent's in London. You want to travel to Plymouth tomorrow morning, arriving before Il am. You can pay £35 only.


Before making a decision, ask the travel agent about:

      the different means of transport available

• arrival times  the cost

The teacher will play the part of the travel agent and will speak first. Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on the best means of transport

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

It is your grandparents' wedding anniversary soon. You would like to organise a special event to celebrate. You and your cousin are discussing what you could do. You could:

• take them out to a restaurant

      organise a party at home

      cook a special meal for them at home

      arrange a family barbecue

      arrange a weekend trip for them The teacher will play the part of your cousin.

Remember to:

      discuss all the options take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: first task

A   Work in pairs or as a group to discuss the differences between living in a big city and living in the countryside.

B   Make notes to complete the table.

life in the city

life in the countryside

noisy

quiet

Section 2 Reading: first task

C   Quickly read the six short texts in the task on page 188. Write the name of the main building each text is about. 1         4

2        5

3     


6

D   Look at the headings A-G on page 188. Write a word from six of the headings in the correct form to complete the sentences.

1     is a place where something happens.

2     Bad weather can sometimes do a lot of  to buildings.

3     If something is  , it is amazing.

4     The place where you are staying, such as a hotel, is your

5     If something is  small, you are surprised by how small it is.

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: second task

E Complete the table.

verb

noun

positive adjective

negative adjective

x

sun

x

entertain

X

comfort

wonder

x

amaze

x

 

fashion

forget

 

6     Something we don't understand is


F Quickly read the text with questions B12-B18 on page 192. Decide what kind of word fills each gap. I (B12) noun / adjective / adverb

2      (B13) noun / adjective / adverb

3      (B14) noun / adjective / adverb

4      (B15) noun / adjective / adverb

5      (B16) noun / adjective / adverb

6      (B17) noun / adjective / adverb

7      (B18) noun / adjective / adverb

Section 4 Writing: first task

G  


Read the first task on page 194. Imagine that you sometimes argue with your best friend and once you stopped talking to each other for a while. Use your experience and imagination to complete the notes.

What kind of things do you argue with your best friend about?

 

What did you argue about when you stopped talking to each other?

What did you do about this problem? Was it successful?

What should

Christine do?

 

H   In pairs or as a group, discuss what

Christine should do.

Section 5 Speaking: second task

Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 195. Tick the things you could say when the restaurant manager answers the phone. Put a cross next to the ones you should not say.

1    'Hello. I'm phoning to see if you have any tables available on Saturday night.'

2    'Hello. I call a restaurant to book a table for eight people on Saturday night, not after 8.30 pm.'

3    'Hello. I'm organising a birthday celebration for a friend of mine on Saturday night and I was wondering if you had any tables free.'

4    'Hello. I'd like to book a table for

Saturday night, if that's possible.'

5    'Hello. Eight people, Saturday night, not after 8.30 pm, please.'

6    'Hello. Could you tell me if you have any tables available for this Saturday night?'

Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F). If the manager offers you a table

1     for six to nine people, that is an acceptable size.

2     for four to six people, that is an acceptable size.

3     for 9 pm, that is an acceptable time.

4     for 8 pm, that is an acceptable time,


                                Pa3neJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl yc./tbauume 5 BblCKa3b1eaHUð1. YcmaH0611žne coomeemcmeue .ueyòy 6blCKa.3b16aHUEUll Kaycðoeo poaopmgeao 1 — 5 u ymcepycòeHunuu, ÒaHHbLUt1 6 cnucvce A — F. Mcnoa1b3Yùme 'caycòyo õycgy, oõ03Haqa1014Y'h0 ymeepycc)euue, mo.1bK0 oÒ11H pa.3. B aaòauuu ecmb oðHO auumee ym€sepowðeuue. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanucb ÒgaycÒbl. .3aHecume C60U omeembt 6 maâuugy.

Test 16


A. We don't mind having fewer things to do in the evenings. B. We've only just moved into the countryside. C. Living in the countryside is much healthier for me. D. I wouldn't be able to find a job in the city. E. I like both the city and the countryside. F. Crime is more of a problem in the city.

FOBOPHLUVIJI

          1        

      2          

3

               4                       5

YTBepxaeH1te

 

 

 

Bbl ycJ1b11uume, õpam u cecmpa oõcyycðcuon4 qmo noðapumb onugy Ha ðeHb powðeHIU1. Onpeòeaume, KCZKUe 11.3 npuaeòëHHb1wr ymgepycòenuù Al-A6 coomgemcmeyom coòepycamuo mewcma (1 ), Kcucue He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o 6 mexcme He cycaaaHO, mo ecnlb Ha OCH06CIHUU maccma neu1b.3fl òantb Hid nonoycumeJ1bH020, HI/ omeema (3).

Oõeeòume H0.uep BblÓPaHHO?O ea.uu gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb ()6ClYCÒbl.

 

Al        Last year, Paula and Greg bought their father a CD.

                      l) BepHO               2) HeBepHO                  3) B •rewre He cwagaH0

A2       Paula and Greg can afford to spend £30 in total.

1)   BepHO           2) HeBepH0           3) B -reKCTe He CKa3aH0

A3       Their dad's watch was given to him by his wife.

                    1) BepHO             2) HeBepH0                3) B rewre He cKtuaH0

A4       Greg and Paula think their father could look more fashionable.

                      1) BepH0               2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKcere He CKa3'dH0

A5      They have enough money to buy something suitable for their father's computer.

                     1) BepH0             2) HeBepH0              3) B •rewre He cwa3t1H0

A6      Greg and Paula will end up spending £20 in total.

1)   BepH0          2) HeBepH0        3) B •rewre He cwa3'dH0

Test 16

Bbl yc.lb'tuutne umnepßbžo c 1136ecn1H0ù nucameJ1bHlllßú. B 3aÒaH11fLr Ä7-Ä/3 oõceðume I'll(þpy I, 2 11.7113, coomeemcmeyougyo 6b1ÕpaHHOMY e,a.uu eapuawny omeema. Bbl yculbttuume aanUCb ÒaaycÒbl.

Catherine mainly gets inspiration for her novels from 1) things that happen in her personal life.

2) unimportant news stories.

3) major events in the local area.

A8     The example of the shopping centre shows that, before writing, Catherine 1) interviews a lot of people.

2)   does a lot of background research. 3) imagines a complete story.

Catherine says her characters

l) can be identified by the people they're based on.

2)   are exact copies of people she has known. 3) are only loosely based on real people.

AIO Catherine is most likely to create a character based on a real person's 1) history.

2) appearance.

3)   view of the world.

All There is a chance that

1) Catherine will give a talk about making films.

2) a company will buy the film rights to Fire At Dawn. 3) there will be a film version of Fire At Dawn.

A12 Catherine does not want

1) to be involved in making the film.

2) someone else to write the screenplay. 3) the plot to be altered in a major way.

A13 Catherine believes that

1)  the stories in the book and film should be the same.

2)  film and literature are extremely different media. 3) films based on books are usually annoying.

no        Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIÄHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHJIE, timo omeembl Ha 3aÒaH11H B], Å1-Å13 pacnoaa2ŒomcH B pa.3HbLt qacmax ÕaaHKa. Bl pacnoaoyceH0 6 HUYCHeÚ Ltacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepenoce omaem06 B aaòaH111d BI ÕVKßbl .3anucblucuomcn õe.3 npoõeaoa u        npe'111HaHllH.

                                       Pa3aeJ1        Ilrrerme

YcmaH061tme coomeemcmaue meM A — G meKcma.M 1 — 6. 3aHecume ('6011 omeembl e maõautgy. Mcno.1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õYK6Y moabK0 oÒzut paa. B .3aÒanuu omta me.ua

A.     INCREDIBLE COLLECTION

B.      SERIOUSLY DAMAGED

c. MYSTERIOUS GIAMS

D.     ENTERTAINMENT CENTRE

E.      EXPENSIVE ACCOMMODATION

F.       ANIMAL HELP

G.     SURPRISINGLY LARGE

The

(marble, in those is that

Originally gallery in

Mona paintings,

together with we still agree on built.

for many built the 1600s, bombs destroyed. of this appears. The

10

Prime

in the music, but musicals and

2,700

I The Taj Mahal, the beautiful and impressive building in Agra, India, was built by Shah Jahan. building work started in 1630, and took 23 years to complete. It was built using materials crystal and other precious stones) from all over India and Asia. There were no cars or trains days, Of course, so how did they manage to carry the materials to the building site? The answer they used elephants - over a thousand of them.

 

Test 16

2     


The Louvre, in Paris, France, is one of the most famous, and largest, museums in the world. built as a royal palace, the Louvre first opened its doors to the public as a museum and art 1793. Todav, visitors can see thousands of priceless works of art, including Leonardo da Vinci's Lisa, which is generally considered to be the most famous painting in the world. As well as the Louvre also has book, furniture, archaeology, architecture and history exhibitions.

3      The Great Pyramid is one of the largest buildings ever constructed by humans. Although, the other pyramids at Giza, in Egypt, it is one of the world's most popular tourist destinations, have an enormous amount to learn about Egyptian pyramids. Scientists and academics cannot  when the pyramids were built, who built them, why they were built or indeed how they were

4 Although there have been buildings on the rock known as the Acropolis, in Athens, Greece, thousands of years, it is the Parthenon which is the most famous building. The Parthenon was between 447 and 438 BC. The building still exists today, but it is not in a good condition. In the Parthenon was used to store explosives. During a war between the Turks and the Venetians, fell on the building, causing it to explode. Unfortunately, a large part of the building was

 5 The British Prime Minister lives and works at No. 10 Downing Street, in London. Pictures building make it look rather narrow and small. In fact, the building is much bigger than it reason for this is that there is a street behind Downing Street called Horseguards Parade. No. Downing Street is joined to the big building behind it on Horseguards Parade, giving the Minister plenty of space for offices and an apartment.

6 The Sydney Opera House, in Sydney, Australia, is one of the most famous modern buildings world. It is a popular tourist attraction for people with no interest in opera or other forms of it is also highly respected for its artistic productions, which include plays, ballets, operas, concerts. Opened in 1973, the building has five theatres, the biggest of which seats approximately people.

Ne •reKCTa

1

2

3

4

5

6

 

Test 16

 

T7poqumaùme eonpocbl I — 6 u pacaaary yqetîHbtr ,rcypcoe A — G, OPUiHU.306ClHHbLr C)õugecmeeHHbtJt K.ayÕOJt eopoòa beòyopma. YcmaH0ßume coomaemcmeue .ue.ycòy eonpoca.uu u PC'KaŒUHblMll macc.•ma-ltu. B KCIYCÒO.U meKcme Bbl Haùðeme omeem moabK0 Ita oðllH aonpoc. B npugeòeHHoðl Hilo-re maõauue not) H0Jtepo.u eonpoca anutuume õYK6Y, coomæmcmeyoucy'ff) mcwcmy, 6 Komopoat ('tutu HaùòeH omaem B .3aòauuu oÒ11H meyccm atilUHUÚ.

1    is not held at Bedworth Community Centre?

2    requires that participants bring their own equipment?

3    gives participants the chance to take part in a competition?

4      involves frequent trips away from the Community Centre?

5      limits the number of participants on the course?

6      is not for beginners?

Which evening class

Bedworth Community Centre — Evening Classes

A     Flower arranging

If you thought flower arranging was just putting flowers in a vase, think again! Come along and learn the many secrets of successful floral designs, Over this six-month course, we'll be working towards your entering the Bedworth and Chatam Flower Show. Who knows? Maybe you'll be a winner!

B     French for holidaymakers

1

2

3

Have vou forgotten all the French you did at school? Here's your chance to start again, beginning with the absolute basics. By the end of the course, you should be able to read, write and speak enough French to have a successful holiday in France. Please note: classes are held at Bedworth Community College, next door to the Community Centre.

C     French literature

This advanced course looks at some of the classics of French literature in their original language, including works by Flaubert, Dumas and Victor Hugo. A knowledge of French is required. Some written homework will be given.

D     Digital photography

On this course, we start at the basics and work our way through to advanced digital photography. Areas covered include: getting to know your camera, taking great digital photos, saving photos on your PC and using software to edit and transform photographs. Please note: we assume you will be bringing your own digital camera with you. Digital cameras are not provided by the Community Centre.

E Local history

Do you want to know more about the history of the Bedworth area? Now's your chance. Although we'll start every class at the Community Centre, we'll spend a lot of our time out and about in the local area, looking at some of the key landmarks and buildings, and learning more about the fascinating history that surrounds us.

F    Pottery

Would you like to make your own vases, plates, mugs and bowls? We'll show you how. For beginners and experts alike, this course makes the most of Bedworth Community Centre's wonderful Ceramics Centre. All equipment is provided, but there is a small charge for all clay used.

G Making the most of the Internet

Have you never surfed the Internet before? Are you fed up with looking at the same few websites? Together, we'll explore many of the exciting things there are to find on the web. Please note: There are only ten PCs at the Community Centre. For this reason, the maximum number of people who can take part in this course is twentv.

Ilpoqumaùme mel-ccm u 6bt110JIHume aaðaHtlfl  otîaoòfl I'll(þpy I, 2, 3 11011/ 4, Ho-uepy 6b1ÓPaHHOZO 6ŒU11 eapuamna omeema.

Ask a hundred comedians what the secret of good comedy is, and you're guaranteed that at least ninety-nine of them will come up with the same response: timing. Although this is undoubtedly true, it is not the complete answer, as what exactly good comedy is should, surely, involve the concept of making people laugh. Successful politicians also have to have good timing, but most of them would soon face an empty audience if they ever chose to perform at a comedy club.

So what is the secret of good comedy? There clearly isn't one straight answer, but there's no doubt that much of modern British humour relies on comedy through language, comedians like Charlie Chaplin and Benny Hill and present-day characters like Mr Bean being part of a different tradition of 'slapstick' comedy that relies on the physical rather than the verbal.

The joke is the most obvious example of 'language comedy'. With language comedy, how you phrase what you're saying — particularly the 'punchline', the final line of a joke that draws the laugh — is more important than what you're saying. Take this traditional double-act joke:

First man: I say, I say, I say. My wife's gone to the Caribbean.

Second man: Jamaica?

First man: No, she went of her own accord.

Ignoring the fact that it's not particularly funny to modern ears (if it ever was funny), at first sight it appears that the humour rests in the fact that 'Jamaica' is confused for 'D'you make her?', i.e. 'Did you make her go to the Caribbean?'. Try putting a different final line on the joke, though. 'No, she chose to go.' contains exactly the same meaning but, well, it's just not as funny, is it? It's all in the phrasing.

Test 16


This may be one of the reasons whv British humour doesn't translate into other languages very well. When one translates, one keeps the meaning but the phrasing changes, losing the basis of the humour.

The second secret of comedy to my mind is characterisation. By this, I mean the creation of a character, or characters, by the comedian through which the jokes or stories are told. Comedy is acting and, like any play, a great script in the wrong hands can be a disaster and a terrible script in an expert's hands can be made into something quite special.

I remember as a child watching the comedian Peter Sellers being interviewed on the Parkinson show. Michael Parkinson, the studio audience, and my parents watching with me at home were crying with laughter at everything that Sellers did or said. I sat there thinking: 'He's just waving a handkerchief around. Nobody laughs when I do that. Why are they laughing at him?' I now know what I didn't know then — that he was a comic genius, and I'm not. And by that, I mean that he had the ability to create characters that people found genuinely funny, whatever they did. He could have sat there in silence and people would still have been laughing. And — let's be clear — even though Sellers was appearing on a chat show supposedly as himself, he was in character. As anyone who's read the biography of Peter Sellers by Roger Lewis knows, Sellers off-stage was an incredibly violent and difficult man.

So is it possible to learn to be a comedian, or is it just a natural talent? There may well be people who will never, ever succeed at being professional comedians however hard they try.

Very few of us will ever be an Einstein, Mozart or Shakespeare in our respective fields. However, all comedians will tell you that the more experience you get, the more experienced, and therefore the better, you become. And they're not joking.

A14 In the first paragraph, the writer suggests that politicians 1) often attempt humour in their speeches.

2)   are only successful if they are funny.

3)   are used to facing empty audiences.

4)   are no good at making people laugh.

A15 According to the text, 'slapstick' comedy 1) does not make use of language to be funny.

2)   is different to the comedy of Benny Hill.

3)   is only found in modern British humour. 4) does not exist in Britain anymore.

A16 The writer tells the joke about Jamaica to

I) demonstrate how many old jokes are not funny today. 2) explain why many jokes need two people to tell them.

3) show how the actual words used in a joke are important. 4) point out that some jokes contain confusing phrases.

A17    Whether a comedy act is 'a disaster' or 'something quite special' depends on I) the quality of the script being performed.

2)  


the ability of the performer to perform.

3)   how much the act is like a play.

4)   which character tells which joke.

AIS Watching the Parkinson show, the writer did not understand why

l) Peter Sellers was doing the things he was doing.

2)   nobody was laughing at him at that moment.

3)   Peter Sellers was a comic genius and he wasn't.

4)   everyone laughed at Sellers doing ordinary things.

A19 The writer mentions a book by Roger Lewis to

1)              enable people to find out more information about Peter Sellers.

2)              prove that he hadn't made up the story about Peter Sellers.

3)              make it clear that Peter Sellers often played unpleasant characters. 4) emphasize that Peter Sellers was acting during the chat show.

A20    In the final paragraph, the writer makes the point that 1) none of us can learn to be good comedians.

2) all comedians' skills improve through practice.

3)   it's not worth trying to become a professional comedian.

4)   Einstein, Mozart and Shakespeare weren't comedians.

110                                                         B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3ABYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM

OTBETb1 B

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, utmo omeembt Ha aaðt1Hllfl B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaazcnomcfi 6 pa.3Hbtr qacmfl-r ÕaaHKa. B2, B3 pacnoaoyceHb1 6 HUYHeÚ qacmu ÕaaH1€a. 17pu nepeHoce omeemoa g aaòaHum- 132, B3 õYKBb1 aanucblecuomcfl õea npoõeaoe u .3HC11COB npemmaH1iH.

                      Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa aeKCHKa

[7poqumaùme mexcm 3ano.mume nponycwu 6 npeòaoyeH11+Lr not) Ho-uepŒuu B4-BI I coomæmcmeyougu.uu cþopata.uu caoe, HaneqamaHHbtx .3aeaa6HblMU õYR6Œwu cnpaøa om KaycÒO?O npeòao.yceHlffi.

Test 16

     B4       by him, too.                                                                                WRITE

     B5        The film first  out at cinemas in 1997.                                       COME

B6 It was an immediate success,  eleven Oscars in 1998. WIN Since then, millions of people around the world  ENJOY watching Jack and Rose's tragic love story on board the ship Titanic.

     B8        Titanic  a cheap film to make.                                                   NOT BE

B9 In fact, the film  more money to make than the COST original ship did!

BIO Most people who watch the film  the last fifteen SPEND or twenty minutes crying.

Bli I think it's the and most wonderful film I've ever seen!                        SAD


Titanic

[Ipoqumaùme npuaeòeHHblðl Hil.yce meyccm 17peoõpaayùme c.qoga, HaneqamaHHbte aaua6Hb1.uu ÕA'KBŒuu nocae H0.uepoß B 12-BI 8 maK, qmoõbl OHU epaM.uamuqecžcu u AC'KCULWCKU coont6emcmeoeaau coòepyaH11}0 meKcma. 3anoaHume nponycwu LIOayt1C'HHbLUU caogaatu. KaycÒbtÙ nponycK coomæmcmgyem omòeabH0MY' aaòamuo 14.3 ppynnbl B 12-1318.

17poqumaùme meKc•m c nponycxa.uu, OÕo.3HaqeHHb1At11 HOMepŒ1tU A21-A28. 3mu 110Mepa coomeemcmgv,tom .3aÒaHlfflJt A21-A28, 6 ,zcomopbLr npeòcma6JWHb1 60.3MO.YCHble Bapuaunlbl 0171601106. Oõaeòume Ho-uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuamna omeema.

Adam was struggling. It was his very first day at school the next day, and his mother had bought him some new shoes for the A21  , The problem was they had laces and Adam still couldn't tie them up himself. He'd been practising unsuccessfully for days, and now, less than 24 hours before the big day, he A22 a failure.

'I can't do it!' he shouted in desperation. 'Everyone at school's going to laugh at me.'

'No, they're not, Adam. Don't worry. A23                                lots of them

I  don't know how to tie up their shoelaces properly yet. Just A24 trying. Do you want me to show you again?' Adam nodded.


Mrs Carstairs patiently held Adam's fingers in hers, and talked him through the required steps. 'Now, you try A25     your own,' she said. 'I won't say a word.'

Adam picked up a lace in each hand. He crossed them, with the right lace going over the left, and pulled the right lace under the left and through.

'Excellent, Adam! That's the first A26

'Quiet, Mummy! You said you wouldn't say anything.' 'Sorry.'

He pulled the laces tight, and slowly A27 a loop with the left lace. Carefully, but slowly, he managed to make a perfect bow.

'You've done it!' shouted his mother. 'Now do the other shoe.' Adam did the other shoe perfectly.

In the next twenty minutes, Adam tied his laces another six times.

Finally he said: 'Mummy, now I know how to tie my shoes, why do I have to go to school tomorrow?

 

1 A28

, what can they possibly teach me that I don't already know?'

A21

I) incident

     2) instance           3) situation

4) occasion

A22

I) sensed

     2) felt                     3) suffered

4) experienced

A23

1) bet

      2) gamble              3) risk

4) chance

A24

I) stay

     2) hold                   3) keep

4) remain

A25

1) by

     2) in                       3) on

4) with

A26

I) point

     2) stage                  3) period

4) chapter

A27

1) collected

2) manufactured 3) assembled

4) formed

A28

1) mean

     2) suggest               3) represent

4) intend

no B4-B18, Ä21-A28 HE 3AbY4bTE [IEPEHECT1f CBOM OTBETb1 B Fx7AHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,          Ha          B4-B18 u A21-A28 pa,3HbLV qacn1f1X õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoa10.yceHbt 6 HU.¥CHeÙ Liacmu ÕJICIHKta. TIPI/ nepeHoce omcemoe 6 .3ac)aHllHX B4-B18 õYR6bl ,3anucb1ŒayomcH (5€'3 npoõeaoø u 3HŒC06 npe/11ŒaHllH.

                                Pa3aeJ1      TIUCbMO

omeernoe Ha aaÒaHlffl CI, C2 ucnoalbayùme E'7AHK OTBETOB

õyòym otge"llßanlbcfl mo./1bK0 no aanucnu, CC)CQCIHHbLM e WIAHKE OTBETOB E2. Hillc•axtte aanucu qepH0ß11Ka He õyòym yqunlbleanlbc•fl .9KcnepmoM.

aamuuume C60ù omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hbt tîqamca Heòocmamowto, 6b' .uoyceme ucnov7b30øamb òpyeyo cmopoHY õaamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

 

Test 16


This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

...be    with    Linda, ana'w/re         each other. I'm really           ever argue     what argue about? What doyou thiMk /           do tv become friends with Linda again? Haveyou ever been bf a similar situation ? What            do?

Write soon,

Love,

Christine

 

Write back to Christine answering her questions.


Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Some people believe that 'travel broadens the mind'. They believe that when you travel to other places, you experience new things and learn from

Other people, however, argue that most people who go on holiday to other countries just lie on a beach for two weeks and don 't experience the local culture at all.

Write 200-250 words.

Use the following plan

1.  Introduction (State the problem).

2.  Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

3.  Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.

4.  Conclusion.

Test 16

                                  Pa3neJ1         IòBopežme

Bbl nonyqume Kapmowcy, Ha Komopoù mpu aaòaH11H ().l.q ycnmoeo omaema: C3 — me.uamuqecxoe .UOHOAO?UqeCKoe

C4 — ()uaatoe c           oâueua cþaKtnuqecK0ú                          C5 — ðuaaoe c gent','O otîueua

011010t1HOÙ tucþopatatgueù. OKOHttauue ObtnomtenuŒ1 KCIYCÒOPO 3CIÒCIH11f1 onpeòe.anem 3K.3a.uenamop. Bo apeMH npooeòeH1147 .-ynoù qacmu .9R•aa.Mé'Ha llòem nocÐ10f1HHa+1 aanucb na ayÒ110Kaccemy.

                                                       3aaamaq    3K3aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on pets. Remember to say:

      whether you have a pet

      why people have pets

      which animals make good pets, and why

      which animals make bad pets, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are organising a birthday celebration for a friend. You call a restaurant to book a table for eight people on Saturday night, before 8.30

pm.

Before making a decision, ask the restaurant manager about:

                   availability of tables

                   size of tables

                   time they are available

                   location in the restaurant

                  


smoking and non-smoking areas The teacher will plav the part of the restaurant manager and will speak first.

Remember to:

                   be active and polite

                   get all the information you need  decide on which table to book

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and a friend haven't done much exercise recently. You're both feeling unhealthy and want to get fit. You're discussing what to do. You can:

                   join a gym  exercise at home

                   go jogging/running

                   take up tennis

                   go swimming

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite vour friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Section 1 Listening: third task

A    Look at the task on page 199. Find words or phrases in the questions and answers that mean something similar to these words and phrases.

      1 respects                                    

2     TV programme about real events or people         

3     included as part of a situation or event     

4     general situation something happens in

5     boring

6     equal owners of a business      

7     people who provide products to a business

8     given a more responsible job

B    Complete these sentences using the words and phrases from Exercise A in the correct form.

I You have to look at what I said in  and you'll see that I meant something else.

2     After ten years as an assistant manager,

Simon was finally  to manager.

3     Alice and Wendy decided to become  and set up their own clothing business,

4     1 saw a  last night about the ancient Egvptians and it was very interesting.

5     1 have alwavs  my father for everything he's achieved in his life. 6 Don't invite Michael to the party — he's so

7    


We've been having problems with our  and I'm afraid we don't have that model in stock at the moment.

8     The head teacher called all the boys in the fight to his office, one by one.

Section 2 Reading: first task

C    Look at the task on page 200. Match each of the headings A-G to a description below.

The text with this heading will probably talk about ...

1    how doing something wrong can cost a lot of money. Heading:

2    something that people don't like, but which is needed. Heading:

3    judging how dangerous a situation is.        Heading:

4    the latest things that people think about.    Heading:

5    someone who knows a lot about their own area. Heading:

6    information about future events.     Heading:

7    accurate changes from one language to another.         Heading:

D   Quickly read texts 1-6 and decide which one refers to each of the following things.

a earthquakes b communication difficulties c danger in coal mines d where cars park e creating adverts f guiding a means of transport


Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary. first task

E    Quickly read the first text on page 204 and answer these questions.

I In which country is cricket sometimes called the national sport?

2     How many people are there in a cricket team?

3     WIIich other sport is a little like cricket?       

4     What are Lord's and Old Trafford?

5     Which country started playing test cricket in 2000?       

F    Read the text again. For each gap in the text B4-BI I, decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F).

1    (B4) we need the plural of 'child'. TIF

2    (B5) We need the present progressive because this is happening now.         TIF

3    (B6) We need a finite form, 'scores', to go with 'the side'. TIF

4    (B7) We need a superlative form ending in -est.  TIF

5    (B8) We need the present perfect to refer to an action continuing up to now. TI F

6    (B9) We need the present simple because this is a current state. TIF

7    (BIO) We need a finite form, 'gives', to go with 'the name'.       TIF

8    (Bll) We need to change the cardinal number into an ordinal number.            TI F


Section 4 Writing: first task

G Read the first task on page 206 and look at these suggestions for ways of making new friends. Order them from 1 (best idea) to 6 (worst idea), according to how you feel about them. Then work in pairs to compare your lists. Do you agree?

      introduce yourself to everyone you meet

      invite people to play a game with you

      talk to as many people as you can      

      try to find people with similar interests to you

• make sure you appear friendly and smile

      find people doing something and ask to join them

Section 5 Speaking: first task

H Look at the Student Card for Task I on page 207. Make notes to complete the table.

members of my family

what they do

what we do together

who I am close to and why


                                            Pa3aeJ1           AYAMI)0BaHHe

Bbl yctJtb1tuume 5 BblCICC13b16cmuÙ. YcmaH06ume coomaemcmaue -Me.ycÒy 6b1CRí13b16a,tlUfLMU eowpmgeeo I — 5 u ymeepyc)thlffl.uu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 ChillCKe 14 — F. Ifcnoat.ayúme KaycÒy»o õYK6Y, ot503aaqaroucvro ytnaep.ycòcwue, moat'K0 oðurt paa. B Jaðartuu ecntb oðrto Jtuturtee yntøep.ycðertue.

A. I feel more afraid of crime now than in the past. B. Crime in my area isn't as bad as the newspapers say.

C. I understand why some people commit crimes. D. My neighbours work together to help prevent crime.

Test 17


E. The police have made a real difference in my area. E In my experience, the police are unhelpful.

1

2

        3                    4                  5

YTBepxaewe

Bbl ycabltuume pageoeop c)eyx òpyaeù o npueomoenenu.qx K npaaòuut1H0MY eeqepy. Onpeòeaume,

KCIK11e 14.3 np11BeòëHHbLr ymgepycòeH11ñ Al-A6 coomaemcmgyw»m coòepycaHtoo moccma (1), KCIKUe He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o            e meKcme He c,tcaacmo, mo ecntb Ha ocnoeanuu maccma He-Qb3H

c)anlb Hid nonoycume.QbH0?0, Hid ompuuamea1bH020 omaema (3). Oõaeòume HO.uep 6b1ÕpaHHO?0 6tv,tu aapuamna omeema. Bbl yc-Qb1žuume aanucb ðeaycÒb1.

Al The party is taking place at a friend's house.

                             I) BepHO                2) HeBepH0                 3) B •rewre He cKt13'dH0

       A2     All the invitations to the party have been sent out.

1)   BCPHO    2) HeBepH0   3) B •rewre He CKa3aH0

A3 A restaurant is providing the food for the party. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B TeKCTe He CKa3,iHO

       A4    Ben is going to provide the music for the party.

                             1) BepHO               2) HeBepHO                 3) B Tewre He cKa3•aH0

       A5     Their friend, Helen, often reads fashion magazines.

                              l) BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKCTe He C'K',uaH0

       A6     Ben and Nadine arrange to meet before the party.

                             l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3) B TeKCTe He cKagaH0

Test 17

Bbl ycat,uuume ßblCR•a3bloaHUfl Jl*0òeù 6 ce.uu pa.3A11LIHb1.r cumya«uqx. On16emwne Ha gonpocbl no coc)epycamuo 6btCKU3b16aHUÙ, 6btõpa6 oÒllH 11.3 npeÒaoyceHHbLE gapuawnoe omeema. B aaÒaHllHX A7-Ä13 otî6eòume «ucþpy I, 2 ILIU 3, oõo.3HatlŒot«yo omeenu KomopblÙ ,tcaycemcn nauÕoaee eePHbtM. Bbl yc.lbltuume Ka.ycðoe BblCKa3blßaHue c)eayðbl.

A7    You will hear a woman talking about her job. How does she feel about her boss?

1)  She admires him.

2)  She is jealous of him. 3) She feels sorry for him.

A8     You will hear a man talking about a TV documentary. What did he think was missing from the programme? I) the opposite point of view

2)   interviews with people involved

3)   the historical context of the problem

A9     You will hear a boy talking about his favourite football team. What does he say about them?

I) They have achieved a lot recently.

2)  They were a better team in the past.

3) 


The new players have performed badly.

AIO   You will hear a woman describing an art gallery she visited. How did she feel about the gallery? I) She found it dull.

2) She found it interesting. 3) She found it tiring.

All You will hear a man talking about his business. Who does he have problems with?

l) his business partners 2) his suppliers

3) his customers

A12   You will hear an advertisement for a language course. Who is the course for?

1) people who don't know any of the language 2) people who already know some of the language

3) people who already know a lot of the language

A13 You will hear a woman talking about her home town. Why did she leave the town?

I) She went away to university.

2)   She got bored with it.

3)   She got promoted at work.

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTU CB01f OTBETb1 B "TAHR' OTBETOB El!

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeenlbl Ha          BI, Al-A13 pacnoaa¿Œomcn 6 paaHbLX qacmax (îqamca. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HilYCHeÙ qacmu ãaawca. Tlpu nepenoce omgemot3 6 3aòaHL111 BI õYKBb1 aanucbleayomcq t5ea npoõeaoa u .3HŒC06


                                            Pa3neJ1        I-Irrel-me

Ycmauoeume coomæmcmcue me.}t A — G meKc:ma.u 1 — 6. 3anecume c6011 omaenlbl 6 Mcnoabayüme ,rcaycðyo õYK6Y moabK0 oð11H pat3. B aaðanuu oÒ1ta mea-ta JIUU11ffl51.

A. CALCULATED RISKS B. NECESSARY ANNOYANCE

c. FASHIONABLE IDEAS

D.     EXACT TRANSLATION

E.      USEFUL PREDICTIONS

F.       EXPENSIVE MISTAKES G. LOCAL KNOWLEDGE

I

2

3

4

If you are qualities. have to lead up with the Keeping cars, wardens play traffic wardens However, if agree that we We normally travel all around other waterway and who can captain.

Although being they gather is people that an

considering a career in advertising, you should ask vourself whether you have the necessary Advertisements tell people what is cool and what isn't. To be successful in advertising, you way and create advertisements with that in mind. Advertisers are the ones who come latest concepts and unless you can do that, then it might not be the career for you.

Ne Tewra

      TeMa             

1

2

3

4

5

6


vans and lorries constantly on the move is a vital part of a modern city and traffic central role in that. While the police deal with accidents and are generally respected, are generally disliked for giving tickets to motorists who have parked illegally.

stop and think about it, even drivers who find traffic wardens annoying usually need them to prevent the traffic system becoming chaotic.

think of a pilot as a person who flies a plane, but ships can also have pilots. Ships might the world and the captain cannot possibly know the details of every harbour or that they go to. A ship's pilot is a person who is very familiar with the local waters guide a ship to safety. They are aware of all the dangers in the area and advise the

a seismologist can involve long hours in an office or a laboratory, the information far from boring. Seismologists study earthquakes and they are sometimes able to warn earthquake is about to happen. Although it is not an exact science, these warnings can sometimes help people prepare. Even giving people a few minutes before the earthquake hits may well save lives.

5     Although the job of a coal miner can still be dangerous, it is much safer than it used to be. Today, the chances Of something going wrong are worked out very carefully and safety is extremely important. Mining companies will never be able to completely remove the element of danger, but the industry does everything it can to make sure that miners are as safe as possible. Miners are trained to judge how dangerous a situation might be and to take appropriate action to protect themselves and their colleagues.

6     When politicians from different countries get together, there is often another figure by their sides. If the politicians don't speak the same language, an interpreter makes sure that they are able to communicate. In such important meetings, it is essential that the message does not get changed along the way. Interpreters need to be extremely careful that what they say to one politician in one language is precisely what the other politician intended to say in their own language.

Tlpoqumaùme gonpocbl I — 6 u npoepaw,ty A — G paòuonepeòaq. YcmaHoeume coomeemcmcue

Meycðy eonpoca.uu u npoepa.&LM0ú paðuonepeðaq. B KCIYÒOM meKcme 6b/ Haùòeme onwem mŒ/1bK0 Ha oÒllH eonpoc. B npueeòeHH0ù Huyce maõJtuge not)       eonpoca entuuume õ.VK6V, meKcmy, 6 Komopo.'.t 6Œuu HañÒeH onusem B aaðanuu oðllH muccm JIUUIIIUÜ.

Which radio station

I gives its listeners the chance to win prizes? 4 never broadcasts advertisements?

2 broadcasts drama as well as music?          5 specialises in one kind of music? 3 is the most popular in the local area?       6 has recently won something?

A       It could be the celebrity interviews or it could be the listener phone-in shows. Whatever it is that has made Cool FM the station with the most listeners in the region, star DJ Zoe Connors is determined to continue the tradition. Join her every weekday morning from 8 till 12.

B       Radio Jukebox is the station where the listeners get to choose all the tracks. Simplv phone in with vour request and it's sure to be played that dav. From unknown singers to award-winning bands, Radio jukebox will plav any song you ask them to. If there's nothing particular you want to hear, then just sit back and enjoy other listeners' choices.

been received you

all your music

 

C      


Sunshine 105 broadcasts news, music and chat throughout the local area. Although it has only on the air for one year, Sunshine 105 is the region's fastest-growing station and last month the Jimmy Blackburn Local Radio Award. It's the perfect station for the beach and it will keep entertained all summer long.

D       If you're interested in classical music, Lvric Radio has it all. From Beethoven to Tchaikovsky, favourite composers can be heard on Lyric. Lyric only plavs classical music, although it also broadcasts interesting interviews with conductors and musicians. For dramatic symphonies or to relax to, vou can count on Lyric.

E        Majestic FM has a very simple philosophy: give the listeners what they want. And they're sure that you want great music. There are no commercials at all and no DJs between the songs, so it's music all the way. The only interruption is traffic news, so Majestic FM might be the ideal station for musicloving drivers.

F        Whether you're looking for a good radio play or the latest chart hits, Radio Paradise is a station you're sure to enjoy. During the day, all the latest music will keep you tapping your feet, while in the evenings the station switches to talk shows and original plays. It might just be the only radio station you need.

G       With reports on the hour every hour, Rocket Radio will keep you informed about what's happening, but the station is much more than just a great source of news. The music selection has something for everyone and you can enter fantastic competitions every day. With an excellent team of DJs, Rocket is the favourite station of thousands of local people.

1

2

3

4

5

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

Test 17


 

Tlpoqumaùme meKcm u Bbl'10JIHume .3aÒClHllfl A14-A20,         Igucþpy 1, 2, 3 coorneemcmgyougyo H0Jtepy 6blÕPaHHO?0 6Œuu 6apua,Ltma omoema.

4,

It was the day the exam results were to be published. I tried to put off going to school and joining the excited crowd of students for as long as possible, but eventually my mum's glances at the clock became too much and I reluctantly picked my coat up and set off. As I slowly walked, my stomach turning over with anxiety, I could picture the others, gathering around the noticeboard that announced the passes that would make such a difference to their lives.

It had all seemed quite different six months before. I had never been exactly a model student, but I had always managed to more or less keep up through a combination of quick thinking and last-minute work. Then Davina had come into my life and academically things had definitely started to get worse. Suddenly, there was an interesting, confident, funny friend to spend my time with and my books just gathered dust on my desk. Essays and projects got later and later, while my social life improved to the point where my mum felt that she had to take action. Realising that a direct command was unlikely to work, she tried to reason with me. The problem was that arguments about future careers and opportunities were much less persuasive than the next party or the next evening out. Although we never had a row about it, I could see

that she was disappointed and concerned.

The exams themselves had come and gone. All I remembered about them now as I went through the school gates was a feeling that half the questions were about things that we hadn't done in class. The way the people around me in the exam room filled page after page with answers proved, though, that they didn't share that feeling. While they excitedly left the room asking each other what answer they had put for each question, I quickly disappeared before anyone could ask me. Some of those same faces crowded around the noticeboard as I approached, most of them with an expression of relief.

'Rose!' It was Mrs Black, our English teacher. In spite of all the missed work, Mrs Black had supported me and done her best to prepare me for the exam, even offering to have extra lessons with me and a few of the others. Although I hadn't taken her up on the offer, I was thankful that she hadn't given up on me like some of the other teachers had. I smiled at her.

'Have you seen the results yet?' she asked and I shook my head. She glanced at the noticeboard. 'Well, when you have, if you want to talk about your options, or anything else, then you know where to find me.' She smiled and walked off in the direction of the staff room. I stepped up to the noticeboard.

I scanned the list of names and almost called Mrs Black back when I couldn't find my own amongst them. It wasn't long before I realised that there was more than one list and I was soon looking at my own name, followed by a short list of subjects and grades. My heart sank as I read and realised that it was even more extreme than I had expected. I was conscious of the people around me looking at me and I put on a mask of indifference, even though inside I was desperate to shout out that there must have been a mistake. I was just about to turn away from the noticeboard when I realised I hadn't checked Davina's grades. At least I wouldn't be alone in my misery, I thought, I found her name quickly. My jaw dropped as I read along a string of As and Bs.

 

A14    Before visiting the school to get her results, Rose 1) waits to build up the excitement.

2)   delays going until she has to.

3)   worries that she might be late.

4)   feels that she might be getting ill.

A15      Rose says that before meeting Davina she had 1) never realised how important schoolwork was.

2)              considered trying to become a model.

3)              done better at school than she did afterwards. 4) put a lot of effort into her studies.

Rose's mum became worried about her and

1)               pointed out the advantages of doing well at school.

2)               prevented Rose from seeing Davina so often. 3) offered to help Rose finish her work on time. 4) told her to leave school and get a job.

A17   Rose suggests that the others taking the exams

1)  didn't realise that there was a problem with the exam paper.

2) 


were unable to prove that they had understood the exam.

3)  wanted to copy her answers to the exam questions. 4) were better prepared for the exam than she was.

AIS    Rose is grateful to Mrs Black because

I) the extra lessons made a big difference.

2) she continued to believe that Rose could do well.

3) she never insisted on Rose doing her homework. 4) the work in her lessons was quite easy.

A19   When Rose looks at the noticeboard, she

I) realises that her name is in the wrong place.

2) can't believe how good her results are.

3) tries to hide her feelings from those around her.

4)              realises spending time with Davina was a mistake.

A20    Rose expects Davina's results to be I) similar to hers.

2)   much worse than hers.

3)   slightly better than hers.

4)   much better than hers.

no        B2, m u A14-Ä20 HE .3AbYAbTE 17EPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB   !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ha B2, 133 u A14-A20   6 pa.3HbLr uacm.qx ãtamca. B2, B3 pacnoaoyceHbl g HUYCHeÙ qacmu Õaamca. npu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòaH11f1-r B2, B3 ÕVK6b1 aanucb1ߌon1('H õea npoõe.10ß u .3}-taK06 npenuwmu.fl.

                         Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTMKa neKCÞIKa

17poqumaùme meR•cm 3anamume nponycK11 npeòao.yceHum• noò H0JtepŒuu B4-BI I coomeemcmayougu.}tu cþop.ua.$tu 0106, HaneqamaHHb1.v  t5YKßa.Jtu cnpaaa om KaycÒ0?0

Ilpoqumaùme npueeòeHHb1ù Hitye meccm [Ipeoõpaavùme c:aoaa, naneqamaHHble atl?aa6HbL1t11 t5VKaaJt11 nocae H0Jtepoa B 12-1318 ma,ç, qmoõbl OHU apa.u.»tamuqecKll u coomaemcmaooaau coòepycamuo mexcma. 3anoauume npon.vc,tcu nt)JtyqeHHbLUU caoeŒuu. Kaycðblðl nponyc,'c coomaemcmayem omðeabhto.uy 3ClÒCIHll}0 113 ¿pynnbl B 12-1318.


In Britain, the AA (or Automobile Association) has been providing

     B12                                 to drivers for over 100 years.                                                   ASSIST

Test 17


B13     In that time, the          has grown from 100 drivers to          MEMBER B14          15 million. The AA are involved in many different          ACTIVE including publishing books and maps. However, they are best known for

        BIS helping                               drivers who have had an accident or whose cars       FORTUNE

B16      have broken down. They also try to persuade the   to         GOVERN introduce new laws to help drivers and which they think will improve

     B17      road                              For example, the AA were in favour of the 1983         SAFE

        BIS law which made it                               to drive without a seatbelt.                       LEGAL

Test 17

Tlpoqumaåme mexcm c nponycwa.M11, oõo,3HaqeHHbLVtu HOJtepa.'.ttt A21-A28. 3mu H0Jtepa coomaemcmeyom aaòt1H11fLM A21-A28, B Komopbl.r npeðcma6aeHb1 603.MOYCHblC eapuanmbl 0/11607106. Oõaeòume Ho-uep 6b1ÕpaHH0?0 6Œuu aapuawna omøema.

inside. She was writing for to go and see remembering the

A moment after Ruth knocked on the door, Dr Johansson opened it and led her excitedly had called him the day before to A21      a few facts for an article she the newspaper — Dr Johansson was a leading expert in physics — and he had invited her his latest experiment. At first, she had tried to A22    out of it, hours of physics lessons she had sat through at school. However, he had insisted

A23  seeing her, saying that she wouldn't regret it. As they walked into the laboratory, Ruth wondered exactly what she was letting herself in for. A cat sat on a workbench. It opened one eye lazily and looked at her. There was a black box connected to a computer and another black box on the other side of the room.


'Now, Miss Evans,' said Dr Johansson, with a slight foreign A24           'What you are about to see may change the world forever!'

Ruth smiled politely. It sounded like a bad film script and she was quickly A25   to the conclusion that he was slightly mad. Dr Johansson must have sensed her disbelief.

'Ah, I see you are not sure. That is natural. However, A26 you have seen my invention, you will have no doubts.' He pushed a couple of buttons and a low hum filled the room. 'I have been A27 experiments on this for three years, and finally I have succeeded.' 'Experiments on what?' asked Ruth. Dr Johansson picked up the cat and placed it in the black box, closing the lid gently. He stood Ruth next to the other black box.

'The transportation of a living creature!' Dr Johansson said triumphantly, and he pressed a final button. There was a spark of electricity in the air. He opened the box and the cat had disappeared,

'You ... you've killed it!' Ruth shouted. Dr Johansson smiled and pointed to the black box next to her. He A28 her to look inside. She slowly lifted the lid. The cat looked up at her as if it was used to this kind of treatment, then closed its eyes and settled down for a nap.

A21

1) control

2) check

3) try

4) measure

 

A22

I) come

2) do

3) get

4) put  

 

A23

1) on

2) with

3) for

4) in

 

A24

l) talk

2) speech

3) tongue

4) accent

 

A25

1) arriving

2) reaching

3) finding

4) coming

 

A26

1) while

2) whenever

3) once

4) then

 

A27

1) conducting

2) carrying

3) acting

4) making

 

A28

1) spoke

2) told

3) said

4) talked

 

no                               B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYUbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM

OTBETb1 B               OTBETOB Ml !

pa.3Hb1-r qacmn.r tîQt1HKa. B4-B18 pacnoao.yeHb1 6 HUYCHC'Ú qacmu (llamca. Ilpu omaemoa 6 3CIÒt1H11fLr B4-B18 tîVKßb1 Janucb1ߌomc,q õe.3 npoõeat)ß 11 .3HUKOB

                                      Pa3neJ1        Il"CbMO

Ha                  Cl, C2 WIAHK OTBETOB E2.

TIPI/ BbÜIOJIH"HUU aaðamtù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHUJta,t1Ue oõpamume Ha mo, timo aatuu omaenlbl õyòvm ogenuaantbcft movQbK0 no aanucRM, CÒeaaHHbLM B WIAHKE OTBETOB M2. 1-111KaK11e aanucu qePH0611Ka He õyÒym yqumb16amt-,c5t .9Kcnepmo.u.

aamuuume cooù omeem ECJlld OÒHOÙ cm0P0Hbl õaan,tca HeðocmamottH0, 6bl Atoyceme ucnoabaouantb ()pyeyo cmopony ã'tamca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

Test 17


This is part of a letter from Alison, your English pen friend.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Many people believe that producing a school magazine allows pupils to be creative and teaches them many skills. Others disagree and say that producing a school magazine is a waste of time when pupils


have important schoolwork to do.

What can you say for and against pupils producing a school magazine? Write 200-250 words.

Use the following plan I. Introduction (State the problem).

2.   Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.

Test 17

                            Pa3AeJ1      roBoperute

Bbl noavqume Kapmowy, Ha ecomopoù npeòcmaeaeHb1 mpu aac)aHll£ ycmH0?0 omaema: C3 — me-yamuqecycoe -M0H0J10puqecxoe Bblcxa.3btaanue,

C4 — ðuaaoe c lge.QblO oõJteHa cþaKnlUqeCKOÙ u»uþop.uauueù, C5 — òuaaoz c      oõ.uena

OIVHOLIHOÙ UHCþOP.ual!UeÙ. OKOHLtaHue BblïlOJtHC'HUfl KaycÒ020 aar)aH11f1 onpeòeanem BK.3ŒueHamop. Bo epeMH npoeeòeHllH .9moù qacmu 3R.3ŒUC'HZ1 llòem nocn10RH}Klfl aanucb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

                                                     3anaH11¶  3K3aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on your family.

Remember to say:

who is in your family

     what they do

     what things you like to do together

     who you are close to in your family, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are visiting a town. You are In the tourist information centre in the centre of town and you have two hours to visit a local attraction. You are interested in local history but you do not want to spend more than £10.

Before making a decision, ask the tourist information guide about:

• attractions open at the moment • location of attractions

                   time to visit them

                   the cost


The teacher will play the part of the tourist information guide and will speak first.

Remember to:

 be active and polite

                   get all the information you need

                   decide on which attraction to visit

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

It is the final weekend of the summer holiday. You and your friend want to do something with your other friends and you are discussing what you can do. You can:

                   have a picnic  go cycling

                   watch TV

                   organise a party

• play a sport

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

*       discuss all the options

*       take an active part in the conversation and be polite

*       come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement


Test 18

                       åhgUažeþtidE*arnSkhllšDe


Section 1 Listening: second task

A       Listen to these extracts from the second task on page 210. As you listen, circle the phrase or number you hear. 1 £15 / £50

2      £10 / lop

3      10 am/ 10 pm

4      6 am / 6 pm

5      3 km/h / 3 mph

6 18/8

7      2.4 / 24

8      20 / 22 9 £75 / £0.75p

10 £14 £15

B Choose one of the numbers or phrases from Exercise A. Say it to the class. Everyone else must write down the number or phrase you said.

Section 2 Reading: third task

c Quickly read the text on page 214 and make notes to answer the questions.

1    Which new word does the writer mention?

2    What do the letters of this word stand for?

3    What might be built in the writer's village?

4    Does the writer want it to be built?

5    Do most of the villagers agree with the writer?

D Find words and phrases in the text which have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.

I unable to be stopped (paragraph I)

2      welcomed (paragraph 2)

3      affect in a bad way (paragraph 3)

4      worth mentioning (paragraph 4)

5 to be honest (paragraph 5)

6     supported (paragraph 6)

7     very important (paragraph 7)

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

first task

E Read the task with questions B4-B11 on page 216 and answer the questions.

1 (B4) Who did the developing?

people I mobile phones

2       (B5) When are we talking about?

now I the past

3      (B6) Which tense do we use for general truths, and regular habits, in the past? past simple I past progressive

4      (B7) Which word or phrase helps us decide which tense we need?

Since I were introduced

5      (B8) When is this talking about?

note and generally I the past

6     (B9) Do any of these fit the gap: 'be',

08

         'was', 'to be', 'are', 'been'?            yes I no

7    
(BIO) When is this talking about? now I the past

8     (Bl 1) Which of these do we often use to talk about the future? bare infinitive I will + bare infinitive

Section 4 Writing: first task

F Note down as many different types of housework that you can think of.

Section 5 Speaking: third task

H Look at the Student Card for Task 3 on page 219. Make notes to complete the table. Try to think of at least one point for each box.


Housework ironing

G Read the first task on page 218. Work in pairs or as a group to discuss these questions.

1     How much housework do you have to do each day?

2     What kind of things do you have to do?

3     Is it fair that Martin has to do a lot of housework?

4     What should Martin do about his situation?

 

reasons why it's a good idea

reasons why it's bad idea

more

swimming

more

sunbathing

beach

volleyball

ice cream at a café

hire small boat

 

 

I Work in pairs or as a group to discuss your reasons. If other people have come up with reasons you hadn't thought of, add them to your notes in Exercise H.

09


Test 18

                               Раздел       Аудирование

Вы услышите 5 высказываний. Установите соответствие межДу высказываниями кажДого говорящего 1 — 5 и утвержДенижищ Данными в списке А — Е Используйте калсДую букву, обозначающую утверждение, только один раз. В заДании есть одно лишнее утвержДение. Вы услышите запись Дважды. Занесите свои ответы в таблицу.

А. I couldn't survive without ту саг. В.        try to use ту car as little as possible.

С. Parking а саг isn't as easy as people think.

       1).       occasionally decide not to use ту car.

Е. I'm thinking of buying а new саг. Е I've never had ту 0'vvn саг.

Вы услышите разговор двух друзей об организации благотворительного вечера. Определите, какие из привеДённьп• утвержДений А1-А6 соответствуют содержанию текста (1), какие не соответствуют (2) и о чём в тексте не сказано, то есть на основании текста нельзя Дать ни положительного, ни отрицательного ответа (З). ОбвеДите номер выбранного вами варианта ответа. Вы услышите запись ДВа.ЖДЫ.

ВоЬ has had а number of medical problems.

                     1) верно         2) неверно         З) в тексте не сказано

       А2    ВоЬ ofTers to give Angela $0 to help her charity.

                     1) верно         2) неверно         З) в тексте не сказано

АЗ Ange1a wants ВоЬ to give her some топеу for each hour she walks. 1) верно 2) неверно З) в тексте не сказано

       А4    ВоЬ thinks that Angela will walk 24 miles.

                     1) верно         2) неверно         З) в тексте не сказано

А5 ВоЬ тау have to give Angela more топеу than he imagines. 1) верно 2) неверно З) в тексте не сказано

         Аб         ВоЬ often goes to the town centre оп Sunday.

                     1) верно         2) неверно         З) в тексте не сказано

Test 18

Bbl ycabttuume, KUK aoõõu paccnpatuuaaem onnga o paõome. B 3aðaH1141-r A7-A/3 oÕoeòume I'll(þpy I, 2 3, coomoemcmayougyo 6b1tîPCIHHOMY acv,tu gapua,qmy omoema. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb òeaycðbt.

When Debbie's father tells her to 'Fire away!' , he means she

1)   should not disturb him at that time.

2)   must put something away first. 3) can ask him lots of questions.

  AS     Debbie's father suggests that

I) he has no control over what his job is called.

2) his job title changes every time he is promoted. 3) he is allowed to create his own job title.

Debbie's father runs a team of people who

l) manufacture a certain product. 2) promote the company's products. 3) build various public buildings.

AIO    According to Debbie's father, marketing at his company involves I) past, current and future products.

2) current and future products only. 3) future products only.

All Debbie's father spends most of a typical day I) driving around the country.

2) sitting down in an office. 3) visiting customers.

A12    He feels that the meetings he has 1) often create problems.

2) are often enjoyable. 3) are often boring.

A13    Debbie's father suggests he's different to other people at work in that he 1) doesn't get angry in meetings.

2)   is respected by everyone else.

3)   enjoys watching people get annoyed.

no Bl u HE 3AbYJ1bTE IIEPEHECTM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo on16embl Ha aaÒClHldfl B I, Al-A13 pacnoaazcuomcH 6 pa.3Hb1X qacm.qx Õaamca. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HUYHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepe,qoce omcen106 6 aaòamqu Bl õYK6b1 aanucb1BŒomc51 õe.3 npoõeaoa u .31-taK06 npenllHŒlHlffl.

211

                                     Pa3neJ1        LITeHne

Ycmcmoeume coon16emcmeue me-M A — G moccma.M 1 — 6. 3aHecume c6011 ome,embt 6 maâuugy. Mcno.ÆbJYùme Kaycòyo õ_VK6Y moabK0 oÒt1H paa. B 3aòa1tuu           me.ua attu1H5151.

A.     HARD WORK

B.      POWERFUL PRODUCTS

c. CHEAPER ALTERNATIVES

D. DIFFERENT STYLES

E. MODERN xrrrruDEs

F. FASHION ADVICE G. SPECIAL SIZES

1

2

3

Not that long ago, men were often hair was tidy, or were criticised for quite normal for men to care about even consider men who don't take Do you watch fashion models walking think: 'I'll never be able to afford stores these days stock clothes that shows only a few months ago. The wearing may be ten times more The thing about fashion is that it fashion, and then go out of fashion.

accused of being vain when thev looked in a mirror to see if their putting moisturising creams on their face. Today, however, it's their appearance as much as women do. Some people would pride in how they dress and look to be old-fashioned!


down the catwalk in the latest styles at fashion shows and that!'? You might be surprised to find that you can. Most high street are almost identical to the ones models were wearing at fashion difference is the price. The slinky black dress which the model was expensive than the copy available in the high street!

changes. If it didn't, it wouldn't be fashion! Things come into

Take jeans. In the 1970s, people wore jeans which were tight around the waist but became wider and wider towards the foot. This fashion of flared trousers had disappeared completely by the early 1980s and didn't reappear until the 1990s.

4     Go into any supermarket or chemist and you'll see row upon row of gels, creams and mousses for your hair. Some are for women, some are for men and some are for children. What most of them have in common nowadays is that thev claim to be extremely strong. The companies that produce them say in their advertisements that they keep your hair styled in the way that you want it for hours and hours, often even if you get your hair wet.

5     Most clothes shops and shoe shops stock products for the average customer. For most of us, this isn't a big problem. If we buy a pair of jeans that are too long, we can get them taken up. For some people, however, it is difficult to find clothes and shoes in the high street that fit. So what should you do if you have extremely big feet, or are particularly large or small? Thankfully, there are a number Of shops, catalogues and websites that make and sell shoes and clothes specifically for people who do not have average bodies.

6     Although many teenage boys and girls dream of being models, the job isn't as glamorous or easy as it sounds. If you're on a fashion shoot, you may have to get there at five o'clock in the morning. You'll spend several hours getting your make-up put on and being dressed in the right clothes, and then several more hours posing for photographs, It can be tiring and boring and you might not be able to have anything to eat all day. Being a model is also stressful, as you never know whether you'll be offered work the next day, and you always have to look your best.

Ne •reKc-ra

Tesla

1

2

3

4

5

6

 

Test 18

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ilpoqumaúme ym6epYòeH11H I — 6 u caeðyougue aa HII.UU meyccmbl. YcmaH0B1tme coomaemcmeue .ueycðy ym6ep.ycòeHlffiJf11 u coðepyct1Hueat muccmoe. Hanutuume I'll(þpy 1 — ecau ymeep.ycÒeH1te gepnoe, u gucþpy O — ecnu ymuepycòenue neøepnoe. 3aHecume ceou omeenlbl 6 maûuugy.

To do a simple calculation, a calculator was better than a microcomputer.

People with different home computers could easily share their games,

People with home computers spent most of their time playing games on them.

Laptops are smaller and lighter than notebook computers.

Five years ago, most PCs had less power than most laptops do nowadays.

It is still a major problem for the owner if a laptop does not come with a CD-ROM drive.

PCs, or personal computers, are a part of our lives. In the late 1970s, when computers entered people's homes for the first time, PCs didn't exist. Back then, computers for the home were usually called 'microcomputers'. Initially, many people didn't understand what they were for, because it was more difficult to do a simple calculation on a microcomputer than it was on a calculator!

By the early 1980s, computers for the home began to be called 'home computers'. There were manv different models, made by different companies. Software such as games for one home computer rarely worked on a home computer made by a different company. Home computers had far less power and memory than computers today, so what you could do on them was extremely limited. In fact, people spent much more time writing simple programs for their home computer than they did using their computer for the kind of things we use computers for today: writing documents and playing games. Of course, the Internet didn't exist back then, so computers weren't used to send e-mails or look at websites.

Laptops, or notebook computers as they are also known, have become smaller and lighter in recent years. This is important, because the main point of laptops is that they are portable. The smaller and lighter they are, the easier they are to carry.

However, as PCs have become more powerful in terms of memory, so have laptops. Laptops today are far more powerful than PCs were only five years ago.

So what are the disadvantages of laptops? One disadvantage is the kevboard. Because of a laptop's size, its kevboard is often more difficult to type on than a regular keyboard. The screen is often quite small, too. To save weight and space, some laptops do not come with a CD-ROM drive. Although this was a major disadvantage a few years ago, the invention of memory sticks, which serve the same purpose as CD-ROMs, has basically solved that problem.

1

2

3

5

6

 

 

 

 

Test 18

 

Ilpoqumaùme u 6btnomtume aaòamut A14-A20, Illi(þpy 1, 2, 3 11.711 4, coomcemcmeyougyo Hovuepy Bb16paHH0?0 ea.uu eapucutma omeema.

New words are invented all the time. I know that, and I know it's inevitable. For my part, and perhaps this is because I'm an old man now, I tend to think we've got enough words already and if we only used them properly we wouldn't need to come up with new ones.

There is a fairly new word, though, which I heard for the first time only a year or two ago. I believe it's American in origin, which makes it all the more surprising that I've added it to my vocabulary. And, I must point out, it's not unwillingly that I've accepted and embraced it. I honestly cannot imagine how I got through eighty-two years of life without it. Looking back, I can see occasion after occasion where the word would have been useful, where its existence might actually have changed things for the better, because to define something is to understand it, and be able to change it. The word is: nimby.

For those of you who are still unaware of this word, let me explain. A nimby is a person who does not want something such as a new building or road built near where they live. It's not that they can't see the value of the building project; often they can. They just want it built somewhere else — somewhere that won't disturb their peace and quiet at home. If you have an interest in language, you may like to know that nimby is an acronym, its letters being formed from the first letters of the words 'Not In My Back Yard'.

I have lived in the same small village in Sussex (population: 2,500) for over 30 years. I had always thought I was surrounded by neighbours, friends and fellow lovers of rural life. Now I have discovered I am surrounded — with a few notable exceptions — by nimbys (or 'nimbies', opinion seems to be divided on the plural). The village is at war with itself, and, unfortunately, the nimbys are winning. A few of us are fighting them, though, and I am confident that we shall win eventually.

The war is over a proposed new community centre. I see it — as any sensible person should as a much-needed addition to the village. It would be a place for the youth of the village to meet at night and would, frankly, help keep them out of trouble. It would be a place for pensioners like me to go for a coffee and chat in the mornings. It would have meeting rooms, a café, sports facilities, a small stage for performances, even a gym. It would create jobs. How could anyone oppose it? But of course for nimbys, the issue is not that the village doesn't need a community centre. I think I'm right in saying that every single one of them supports the concept in principle. They just don't want it next to their house.

There are four possible sites. This means there are four groups of nimbys. Each group wants the centre to be built in one of the three sites that are not near their own houses. While they fight amongst themselves, the centre is not being built. It could have opened six months ago, if the village had united and backed the proposals. The money — all £250,000 of it — is sitting in a bank account waiting to be spent. Some doubt it ever will.

For me, the campaign goes on and I have one key strength. One of the proposed sites is almost right next door to my house. Am I terrified that there will be busloads of people arriving in the middle of the night and disturbing my sleep? No, I am not. Am I afraid that all the youths leaving the centre when it closes will smash my windows and burgle my house? No, I am not. Am I worried that a community centre next door will decrease the value of my house? No, I am not. Am I proud that I am not and never will be a nimby? Yes, I am.


A14

In the first paragraph, the writer says that he 1) recognises the importance of inventing new words.

2)   believes he can stop the invention of new words.

3)   thinks the invention of new words is unnecessary.

4)   is very careful to always use new words properly.

A15

The word 'nimby' is now used by the writer despite the fact that

1)   it originally came from the USA.

2)   he was unwilling at first to use it.

3)   it would have been more useful in the past.

4)   he can't understand exactly what it means.

A16

The writer suggests that a nimby wouldn't oppose 1) worthwhile construction in their neighbourhood.

2)   construction in their neighbourhood if it's quiet.

3)   construction in other people's neighbourhoods.

4)   any construction that adds value to their life.

Ali

The writer has recently

1)  discovered that he has new neighbours.

2)  learnt the truth about his neighbours.

3)  realised he is alone in his struggle.

4)  become more confident about winning.

AIS

The word 'frankly' in paragraph five emphasises that

1)   the centre would solve all the problems caused by young people.

2)   there are very few young people living in the village anyway.

3)   most people do not believe the centre would be used at night.

4)   young people in the village do sometimes get into trouble at present.

Al 9

The four groups of nimbys

1)                 agree that the village doesn't need a new centre.

2)                 have agreed where the centre should not be built.

3)                 disagree about where the centre should be built. 4) agree that one of the four sites is acceptable.

A20

The first three questions which the writer asks in the final paragraph

I) demonstrate how courageous the writer is.

2)   help show us what nimbys are scared of.

Test 18

3)  


suggest that nimbys sometimes use violence.

4)   show that the writer has a very secure house.

OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB El !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo omaembl Ha .3aòí1H11fi B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnonaecwomcfl pa.3Hb1.r qacnmx ÕMH}CCI. B2, B3 pacnoaoyct'Hb1 B HUYt•neÚ qacmu ÕJUIHKa. [11211 nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaðaH11Rr B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucb16Œomca õea npoõeaoo u .3HCIK06 npe,'111HaH11fi.

                        Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa aeKCWKa

Ilpoqumaùme maccm 3ano.QHume nponycycu 6 npeòaoyceH11fLr not) HOAtepa.M11 B4-B11  tþop.uŒuu ca106, HaneqamaHHbtx aaua6Hb1.uu õYK6a.uu cnpaoa om KaycÒO?O npeòJ10yceH11f1.

Mobile phones

Have you got a mobile phone?

Before mobile phones , you could only call someone DEVELOP with a phone which was connected to a phone line. That problem that it was often difficult to contact people, particularly if you were on a bus or in a car.

Before mobile phones, people text messages to each other. NOT SEND Since they were introduced, text messages the way CHANGE we communicate.

         B8       With text messages, you                            to actually call someone.                 NOT NEED

139      You simply type a short message and send it,         careful,            BE of course, to send it to another mobile and not to a home phone.

BIO Mobile phones to be big and heavy. Now, they're USE small and light.


Bli The chances are that they even smaller and lighter         BECOME in the future.

[Ipoqumaùme npugeòeHHb1ú HU.ye mt'lcc•m flpeoõpaayùme caoea, HaneqamaHHb1e .3aua6Hbl.MU ÕYK6ŒUU nocae HOAtepoe B12-B18 maR, umoõbt OHII epa.u.uamuqecK11 u aeKCUqeCKU coomgemcmeoaaatl coòepyct1H11R) moccma. 3ano.1Hume nponycxu 110JIVqeHHb1.UU CJ106Œuu. KaycÒb1Ù nponycR coomeemcmeyem omÒeJ1bHOMV aaòamoo epy/lllbl B12-B18.

Finding a good job is never easy at the best of times. In times Of high

B12 , with more and more people chasing fewer and fewer EMPLOY jobs, it becomes even more difficult.

       B13                                 and skills can make all the difference. The better yours        QUALIFY

          B14 are, the less                              you will have in finding a job.                             DIFFICULT

B15      If you need to improve your skills, find out about  courses TRAIN in your area. If there aren't many jobs in your area, it is worth considering

       B16      the                           of moving.                                                                            POSSIBLE

You may not want to leave your friends and family, but choosing to live in

       B17                                    where there is work may be the best solution,                     LOCATE

B18       And remember: the more     forms you fill in, the more your APPLY chances of being called for an interview increase.

Tlpoqumaùme moccm c nponvcxa.tu, Ot50,31taqeHHblJtU Ht).uepa.lfll 421-428. 3mu H0Mepa coon16emcn16yom 3CIÒUHUHJt Ä21-A28, 6 KOIÈlOPbLr npeòcmaeaeHb1 60.3.UOYHbte eapuaffllbt omøemog. ()õgeòume 6bttîpaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuanma omaema.

intelligent life elsewhere in the universe? One quite valid response to that question is: we just know and we haven't seen any proof that there is so A21  . (Some people's that they have seen UFOs certainly do not count as proof, They are not even evidence.) scientists are becoming increasingly A22  that the Earth is not the only of life in the universe.

Is there don't claims However, source

There are two main reasons for this. The first is that the more scientists learn about how life started here on Earth, the more they realise how easily those conditions could be recreated somewhere else.

Test 18


The second reason is A23  to the first. A24 it's not that difficult to create the right conditions for life to form, the universe is so big that the A25 are if it can happen somewhere else, it will.

None of that is to A26 however, that we'll be communicating with aliens any time soon. Firstly, if there is life on other planets, it may not be intelligent in the way that humans are. There are billions of different life forms here on Earth, but it's only humans who have been able to leave the planet. Secondly, A27 if there was an intelligent life form on another planet, it may have evolved and become extinct billions of years before the Earth even formed. Or, it may not come Into existence until billions of years in the future. Thirdly, one of the main reasons why there might be life elsewhere — the sheer size of the universe — is also a reason why we will probably never A28 to see it. It takes so long to travel even short distances in space — the journey from Earth to our close neighbour Mars takes several months — the odds of two intelligent life forms from different planets being in the same place at the same time are incredibly small,

A21

1) long

2) far

3) much

4) many

A22

I) forced

2) influenced

3) convinced

4) supported

A23

1) connected

2) joined

3) fixed

4) glued

A24

1) Measuring

2) Guessing

3) Taking

4) Assuming

A25

1) opportunities

2) chances

3) possibilities

4) choices

A26

1) say

2) tell

3) speak

4) mention

 

A27

I) as

2) even

3) what

4) only

 

A28

I) succeed

2) achieve

3) get

4) make

 

ObPATMTE BHLfMAHIfE, qmo omeembl Ha aat)t1H11f1 B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacnoaauuomctfl 6 PC13Hb1X qacmnx ãqaHKa. B4-B18 paci10A0Yé'Hb1 6 Hil.ycnel"l yacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemog 6 aaòcmunx• B4-B18 õYKdbl aanucbteawmcn õea npoõeaoe u 3HClK06 npemmanua.

omeemoe Ha aaòaHllH CT, C2 ucnoabayùme WIAHK OTBETOB Y22.

Ilpu ßbtnoa,qeHUU aaòanuù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHILMCIHue oõpamume Ha mo, qmo Baum omaenlbl õyòym 014t'Huean1bcf1 moatbKO no aanucsw, cðenaHHbt.u e WIAHKE OTBETOB N2. HII}CŒCUE' aanucu 'tepHOBIŒa He õyðvm yqurnbtaantbc•a ,9Kcnepmo.u.

[Ipu .3ffl10JtHeH1d11 WIAHKA OTBETOB   yycaycume cHaqaaa Ho-step aaÒaH11H Cl. C2 game-u aamuuume ceoðl omeem Ecau oÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1 õaamca Heðocmamot1H0, 6bt Jtoyceme ucnoall,aoaanlb ()pyeyo cmopo,qy ÕJICIHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

Write back to Martin answering his questions.

Test 18

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Most schoolteachers give their students homework. However, some teenagers today believe that they are being given too much homework and that they don't have the time to do it all properly.

Do you think that teachers give Use the following plan too much homework?   1. Introduction (State the problem).

Write 200-250 words,                       2. Express your opinion and give reasons for it.

3. Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.

4. Conclusion.

                                 Pa3aeJ1        roBopeHne

Bbl noayqume Kapmot1KY, Ha Icomopoù npeòcmaaaeHbt mpu .3aòaH11f1 ()JIH ycmH0?0 omgema: C3 — me-uamuqeucoe .uonoaoeuqecycoe 6b1CKa3b1eaHUe,

C4 — òuaaoe c lge.Qb'0 oõatena tþcncmuqecvcoù  C5 — c)uaaoz c tge.1b10 oõ.ueHa

01ßHot1H0ñ 11Híþop.uauueú. OROH11CIHue 6bUIOJIHeHUfi ,ça.ycòozo aaÒCIH11f1 onpeòeaaem .9K3ŒueHamop. Bo epeatfl npogeÒeH11$1 amt)ðl Ltacmu 3K3ŒueHa uòem aanucb Ha ayòuŒaccemy.

3aaaHV1¶ 3K3aMeHyeMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on your plans for the future.

Remember to say:

• what job you want to do in the future, and why

• where you want to live in the future, and why

      if you want to visit other countries in the future

      what other things you want to do when you're older

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

Test 18


You need to get to City Hospital as quickly as possible. You have never been there before. Ask a passer-by questions about:

      how to get there

      where to catch available transport

      the time needed to get there

You begin the conversation. The teacher will play the part of the passer-by,

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on the best way to get there

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and a friend are on the beach. You have half an hour left until you have to leave. You are discussing how to spend your half hour. You can:

      do some more swimming

      do some more sunbathing

      play beach volleyball

      go to a café for an ice cream

      hire a small boat

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

      discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions come to an agreement


A Look at the second task on page 222. 3 Mark was shocked at the sof For each statement, you will hear two his garden when he got back from extracts (A and B). Circle the extract holiday. which means that the statement is true.

4 My cat is more than a pet to me. He's

      I (Al) The pupils should arrive at the                         also a friend and c


airport one hour before take-off. A B

2       (A2) The flight will last about four hours.

3       (A3) The pupils will each have their own hotel room in London. A B

4       (A4) The first attraction they are planning

          to visit is the Tower of London.            A

5       (AS) The teacher has taken pupils to London before.

6       (A6) Jonathan decides to go on the trip to Kew Gardens. A B

 

I

What is Peter Madison's job?

 

2

Where does he sell things,

Decide if these statements are True (T)

 

apart from his shop?

or False (F).

 

1

Roberto and Mario are out

 

3

What is Peter interested

 

camping.

TIF

 

in buying?

2

The trip was Roberto's idea.

TIF

4

How much is it worth?

3

Roberto enjoyed the first few days

 

5

What is the price on the

 

of the trip.

TIF

 

price tag?

4

5

A noise outside wakes Mario up.

Roberto goes to check what the

TIF

6

How much does Peter pay for it?

 

noise was.

TIF

E Write a word from the box in each gap

Section 2 Reading: third task

B Quickly read the text on page 226.

5       After two hours of arguing, I had finally  my parents that I was right.

6       I had little difficulty in p

Sally to have a birthday party.

7       Carl never finds it easy to make up his mind. He's so i

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

third task

6 The noise was made by a dangerous     to complete the sentences. animal.           TIF      

C Complete each sentence with a word or from the text. You are given the 1 1 watched the greengrocer as he phrase first letter of the word or phrase to help  all the vegetables out so the customers could see them. you.

1 1 can't sleep because you s  so loudly!

D Quickly read the text on page 229, ignoring the gaps. Write a word or short phrase to answer each question.

2         Don't worry about the party tomorrow. I'm sure everything will  out fine.

3         Quite a few of the hotel rooms out over the lake.

4         When does her new CD  out? actual • genuine • honest proper

5         Come on, now. Be    Did you take the money?

6         I thought the painting was by Picasso, but an expert said it wasn't

7         I need a hammer. I can't do this job without the  tools.

8         People often think Sydney is the capital of Australia, but the  capital is Canberra.

9         If anyone finds Jimmy's money, then please hand it  at the school office.

10     There was a man in the street handing  leaflets to everyone walking past.

Il The shopkeeper looked annoyed when I handed  a £50 note.

12 Jane passed the photo to me and I glanced at it before handing it  to her.

Section 4 Writing: second task

F    Look at the second task on page 230. Decide whether each of the following is a point for (F) or against (A) performing experiments on animals. Write F or A on the line provided.

1   We can test new medicines on animals to see if they are harmful to humans.

2  


A lot of the experiments have been done before and don't need to be repeated.

3   Animals have rights, just like people do.

4   In most experiments on animals, the animals don't suffer.

5   It's important to gain scientific knowledge, even if some animals suffer.

6   The information we gain from testing medicines on animals is very limited.

G   Discuss which of the statements above you agree or disagree with. Explain why.

Section 5 Speaking: second task

H Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 231. Read this extract from a dialogue and find five mistakes. Underline them and write the correct form above the line.

Shop assistant: Hello. Can 1 help you?

Student: Hello. Yes. I like to buy a present for a friend. What Moscow Dynamo products you have?

Shop assistant: We've got hats and scarves.

Student: Can you tell how much the hats are?

Shop assistant: They're £19.99 each.

Student: That's enough expensive.

What's the scarves' price?

Shop assistant: They're £16.

Student: Do you have any other


Moscow Dynamo products?

                          Pa3aeJ1      Aynwpormme

Bbl vcabltuume 5 BblCKCt3b1ßClH11ñ. YcmaH0ßume coomgemcmgue vueycðy 6b1CKC13b1aaHUHMU KCIYÒOZO ?060pnugezo 1 — 5 u ymeepYòeHllHvuu, ÒaHHbLM11 6 cnucwe A — F. Mcno.lbayúme Kaycðyo õYK6V, oõo.3Haqcuougyo ym€epycðemŒ, mœ1bK0 oÒtut pam B aaÒaHuu ecntb oÒH0 autunee ymeepwòeltue. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanucb maycÒb1. 3aHecume coou omaembl 6 maõ.au«y.

A.     She listens to music to help her relax.

B.      Listening to the radio makes her feel less alone. C. She likes to hear other people's opinions on the radio. D. Music helps her concentrate on her work. E. She used to work as a DJ on local radio.


F. She would like to work in radio in the future.

YTBep>KneH1te

             1         

2                        3

4

5

 

 

Bbl pa.g¿oeop yqumŒQbH111!bl C _ygeHUKOJt O npeòcmonugeù noeaòxe. Onpeòenume, 143 nP116eÒëHHbLr ymeepycòeH11ú Al-A6 coomeemcmoyom coðepyamuo moccma (1), KUKU" He coomeemcmeyom (2) u O tië,u 6 mexcme He CKa.3aHO, mo ecmb Ha OCH06tmuu moccma HCJZb3R ðanlb Hil no.aoycume.1bH020, Hil omaema (3). Oõaeòume 6blÕPClHHO?0 6tL8tu gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycJlbuuume aanucb ()eaycðbl.

Al       The pupils should arrive at the airport one hour before take-off.

                     l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKc•re He CKa3tiH0

A2      The flight will last about four hours.

                     l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •rewre He CKt13aHO

A3      The pupils will each have their own hotel room in London.

1)   BepH0            2) HeBepH0           3) B TeKCTe He CKa3aHO

A4      The first attraction they are planning to visit is the Tower of London.

                   1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B TeKcre He CKt13aHO

A5      The teacher has taken pupils to London before.

                    1) BepHO               2) HeBepH0                 3) B Tek'CTe He cKa'3aH0

A6      Jonathan decides to go on the trip to Kew Gardens.

1)  BepHO           2) HeBepH0           3) B -reKc-re He

Bbl ycalblluume 6b1CKa.3b1dUHUf1 -Q10òeñ 6 ceuu paaauwtbLt cumva«unx. Omeenužne Ha aonpocbl no coc)epycantoo 6blCKa.3b16aHUÚ, Bblõpaa oðllH 113 npeòaoyceHHbLr gapuaH71106 omæma. Bbl yc.lblluume KaycÒoe BblCKa.3bteaH11é' ðea.ycÒb1. Bo epeMH npocayužugamtfl 6 aaðaH11fLY A7-A13 oõeeòume H0.uep omeema, Komopblù 6ŒU ,rca.ycemcfl Hauõoaee e,ePHbLM.

You will hear a man talking about his doctor. What does he say about his doctor's advice? 1) He will ignore it.

2)  He will check it. 3) He will follow it.

A8 You will hear a woman talking about her shopping experience. What did she think had improved? 1) the service

2)   the choice

3)   the offers

   A9   You will hear a boy talking to his friend. What does he say about his teacher?

1)   She helped him.

2)   She treated him unfairly.

3)  


She ignored his problem.

AIO    You will hear a woman talking about a painting. How did she feel about it?

1)   She was shocked by it.

2)   She thought it was clever.

3)   She found it uninteresting.

All You will hear a conductor talking to an orchestra. What does he ask them to do?

1)  play more slowly

2)  play more quickly

3)  play with more feeling

A12    You will hear a woman talking about a newspaper. How does she feel about it?

I) She thinks it ignores the most important news.

2)   She thinks it always presents the news fairly.

3)   She thinks it always presents its own point of view.

A13   You will hear a commercial for a kitchen product. What does the commercial claim about the product?

l) It will save you effort. 2) It will save you money. 3) It will save you time.

no OKOHtlClHUU Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB El !

ObPATIfTE BHHMAHME, timo omeembl Ha .3aÒaHllf1 BI, Al-Ä13 pacnoaaeŒomcn 6 pat3HbLr

BI õYK6b1 aanucb16ŒomcH õea npoõenoa u .3HüK06 npenllHaHllH.

                                        Pa3AeJ1         I-Irrerme

YcmŒtoeume coomeemcmeue me-u A — G moccma•t 1 — 6. 3anecume      omoembl a maõau«y. Mcno,1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õYK6Y moabK0 oò11H pa.3. B 3aÒaHltu oÒHa me.'ta JIUIUHHH.

A. CONFUSING PICTURES            E. FAILED HOPES B. IMPRESSIVE PROGRESS        F. QUESTIONING EXPERT

c. COMPLEX NETWORK G. SOCIALISING PROBLEM D. UNUSED POWER

1 It has been claimed that we only use ten per cent of our brain. This is a myth but it is true that we are probably all capable of doing far more with our brains than we do at present. The brain can be trained to improve performance, rather like a muscle can. There are various techniques for improving

your memory, for example, that do seem to work. Many magicians and stage performers use these methods and there seems no reason why the rest of us couldn't learn to improve our abilities with practice.

2     



James Randi is a professional magician. He is well known for more than just his performances of magic, however. He is also famous for offering Sl 0,000 to anyone who can prove that they have supernatural or paranormal powers. As a magician, he believes that all the people who claim to have special powers are actually tricking other people into believing them. His knowledge of tricks means that he can soon see how people are being deceived.

3      Our brains are usually very good at analysing the information they receive from our eyes. However, it is possible to fool the brain using certain images. To test this, draw two lines of equal length, one above the other. Now draw two more lines crossing them, going up the page and going in at an angle. The new lines should look like railway tracks disappearing into the distance. When you look now at the original two lines, your brain will think the top line is longer than the bottom line. Images like this are known as 'optical illusions'.

4      Watch science fiction films and you will often see a computer or a robot that is intelligent. In the 70s, researchers in artificial intelligence were generally optimistic that thev would create a thinking computer within a few decades. However, they have not been very successful. Outside a few very specialised tasks, such as playing chess, computers are still a long way from being intelligent in any real sense. Some scientists even question whether it is ultimately possible to create an intelligent computer at all.

5      In the middle of the twentieth century, a new medical condition was identified: autism. A child with autism has problems communicating with other people and finds it difficult to establish relationships with others. Autistic children develop language more slowly than other children and often seem very distant. The condition can be stronger in some people than in others and there is no cure, although

6

many autistic people can learn to interact with other people reasonablv well.

The brain is composed of about 100 billion neurons or nerve cells, all connected to one another. Information comes into a neuron from other neurons and then the neuron sends out a signal to other neurons it is connected to. Using electrical and chemical signals, this complicated svstem of neurons is behind all the processes of the brain, from looking after the body to higher thoughts and aims.

Testa

1

    2                     3

4

5

6

 

 

 

 


Ilpoqumaùme vmgepyòehlllfl I — 6 u caeòyougue aa HILMU me,tccmbl. YcmaH06ume coomgemcmaue MeycÒv vn16epycòeHldHvuu u coòepycaHueM meKcn106. Hanuužume Igucþpy 1 — ecau ymeepycòutue

1    Elvis Presley 's family were quite rich.

2    Elvis's first hit record and first film were made in the same year.

3    Elvis had a brother who lived longer than he did.

4    John Lennon never saw his mother after the age office.

5    'Ohn Lennon and Paul McCartney both played in The Quarry Men.

6    'Ohn Lennon died a fez' years after Elvis Presley did.

Test 19


Elvis Presley was born into a working class family in Mississippi in 1935. Although there was never much money, his family was very close and went to church together. The music he heard there had a big influence on his future sound. Elvis recorded his first songs in 1953, but it wasn't until January 1956 that he produced his first hit, Heartbreak Hotel. In August of that year, he also filmed his first movie, Loze Me Tender. He would go on to make 33 films and sell over 500 million records around the world.

Despite this enormous success, there was also tragedy in Elvis's life. He had a twin brother who died at birth and his mother died at the young age of 46. He himself suffered a heart attack and died in 1977, aged just 42.

Born in 1940, John Winston Lennon was brought up by his Aunt Mimi. His father left his mother when John was five and his mother, Julia, didn't feel able to look after him. They kept in touch, though, and it was in fact Julia who taught him to play banjo, starting one of the most amazing careers in pop music. Lennon went to art college, although he left before finishing the course to concentrate on his music. He had already formed a group called The Quarry Men and they performed at various places in Liverpool. Lennon was introduced to Paul McCartney, who joined the band. They changed the name of the band a few times, finally settling on The Beatles by 1960.

The band became very famous and had 20 number one hits in America. They introduced a serious, poetic side to pop music and influenced many performers. Various artistic differences led to the group splitting up in 1970.

1

2

4

       5                         6

Lennon continued to make music on his own and with his wife, Yoko Ono, until he retired in the mid-70s to spend more time with his family. He started to make music again in 1980 and had released a new album, Double Fantasy, when he was shot and killed by a fan in December of that year. He was 40 years old.



 

Ilpoqumaùme mel-ccm u Bbl,'10JIHume           A14-A20, ot560Òfl l!tltþpy 1, 2, 3 coomßemcmgyougyo no-Mepy 6b1ÕpaHHO?0 6ŒM1d gapuawna omeema.

4,

Roberto lay awake, listening to the rain outside the tent and the soft sound of snoring coming from Mario beside him. As usual, Mario had no trouble sleeping through the roaring storm, Roberto thought as he pulled his sleeping bag tighter around himself. Roberto had known him to snore happily in a train station with trains coming and going. He would have thought, though, that even Mario might have had problems with the freezing wind coming through the door of the tent. No amount of clothes piled on top of each other could stop the cold air getting in and Roberto was beginning to get annoyed at the sight of his sleeping companion.

The trip had been Mario's idea and Roberto had agreed despite his lack of enthusiasm for the outdoor life and its physical demands. As far as he was concerned, the countryside was a place filled with insects and inconvenience, but Mario had convinced him that they would enjoy it. Roberto had managed to maintain a smile for the first few days of hard work and badlycooked food, but his patience was coming to an end. He wasn't sure why Mario usually succeeded in persuading him to do things that were against his better judgement, but he thought it was probably due to Mario's ability to focus on the positive. He seemed not to hear Roberto's arguments against the idea until it just became easier for Roberto to agree than to try to make him listen. Roberto wished he could be more like Mario. His own ideas usually never got very far. He was too aware of the opposite point of view and often argued himself out of his own suggestions. It made him seem indecisive and weak, while Mario came across to everyone as very confident.

The wind seemed to get a little stronger and Mario rolled over and opened his eyes sleepily.

'What time is it?' he asked and Roberto peered at his watch.

'Four,' he replied and yawned. Suddenly there was a noise outside the tent.

'What was that?' asked Mario. They both listened. It had sounded like the grunt of an animal of some kind, a large animal by the sound of it. Neither of them moved. After a moment Roberto offered to check what was outside and Mario nodded his head, nervously. Not that Roberto wasn't afraid — the sweat on his hands and forehead proved that — but he knew that unless he acted Mario would beat him to it and would come out of it looking like a hero. Roberto was determined that when they got back home he was going to have stories to tell, just like Mario normally did.

He moved to the entrance to the tent and unzipped the door slowly. The wind blew rain in. He glanced back at Mario before stepping outside and closing the door behind him.

Mario blinked in the darkness and listened carefully. He heard the animal noise again, closer this time and then a strange human noise. He felt very alone and insecure. All kinds of images flashed through his mind quickly. What if Roberto didn't come back? He thought of going back to town and having to break the sad news to Roberto's family. That would be bad enough, but his real concern was that he would look like a coward. He quickly pulled his boots on and rushed outside the tent.

It was then that he realised what the strange human noise had been. Laughter. Roberto was laughing, even though he was dripping wet from the rain. Mario looked where he was pointing. There was a cow standing by the tent, lazily chewing on some grass.

 

 

 

 

A14   Roberto is surprised that

I) Mario is able to sleep despite the noise.

2)              the cold does not wake Mario up.

3)              Mario makes so much noise when he's asleep. 4) he can hear trains in the distance.

AIS    Mario begins to annoy Roberto because

I) his snoring prevents Roberto from sleeping.

2)   he didn't close the tent door properly.

3)   he hadn't put his clothes away tidily.

4)   he can sleep at a time when Roberto can't.

A16    Roberto thinks that camping is generally I) an uncomfortable experience.

2)   a good chance to study nature.

3)   enjoyable despite the hard work.

4)   a good way to get some exercise.

A17 Roberto thinks that Mario probably gets him to agree to things by I) listening to his needs.

no B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTM CBOJf OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB Ml !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo omeembl Ha aaÒaHllH B2, 133 u A14-A20 pacno.aazcuomca 6 pa.3Hb1X Õaamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HUYHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòcmu.qx B2, B3 õYK6bl 3anucblBŒomcH õea npoõeaoe u .3HUKOB npenummu,q.

2)  


judging his mood.

3)   ignoring his objections. 4) starting an argument.

AIS When he has a suggestion to make, Roberto often ends up I) getting into arguments with other people and giving up.

2)   persuading people to do things that they later regret.

3)   deciding against it because he sees the negative side. 4) pretending that it was originally Mario's idea.

A19 Roberto volunteers to see what is outside because he I) wants to appear brave afterwards.

2)   thinks Mario might get violent.

3)   isn't frightened of wild animals. 4) knows Mario is very scared.

A20    Mario's biggest worry is that

I) people might think he was too frightened to do anything.

2) Roberto might leave him and go back to town on his own. 3) Roberto's family might blame him if something happened. 4) the animal outside might attack him inside the tent.


                      Pa3aeJ1        rpaMMaT11Ka n .neKC11Ka

[Ipottumaùme maccm 3anoamume nponycwu 6 nor) no.',tepaatu B4-B11 coomaemcmayot"ll.uu cþopvua.uu caot3, HaneqamaHHbLV .3Cl?M6HbLU11 ÕVK6Œuu cnpcwa om KCIYÒO?O npeðao.yceH1ffi.

Diamonds

B4 Diamonds are a symbol of luxury for many people. People     VALUE diamonds as attractive jewellery for around 2,500 years.

The Indians used them to decorate religious icons and it seems the ancient

        B5 Chinese                                their axes a sharp edge using diamonds.                    GIVE

Diamond is the hardest substance on Earth,            that only another diamond can be used to cut a diamond.

B7 Diamonds consist of carbon and usually they deep FIND underground in mines, but you might get lucky and see them on the surface.

B8 Mining     in places like Africa make a lot of money     COMPANY from diamonds.

                However, the miners                             are often quite poor.                               THEY

Test 19


BIO      The value of a diamond is judged on four criteria,  KNOW as the four Cs: carat (or size), clarity, colour and cut.

Bll The diamond ever found was the Cullinan diamond, HEAVY which was discovered in 1905 and weighed 621 grammes.

[Ipoqumaùme npueeòeHHb1ù 1--111M? melccm [Ipeoõpaayúme c:aoea, uaneqamam-lbte actua6HblJtu (5VK6ŒMU nocae HO.Jtep06 1312-1318 mow, qmoõbl OHII epavu.uamuqecRll u ae,çcuqecwu coomeemcmeoeaau coòepycautll() mtwcma. 3anoauume nponyc,£ll noviVqeHHb1Jft1 ca10ߌwu. Ka.ycÒblÙ nponycw coomaemcmoyem omðeJ1bH0MY aaòaH11*0 11.3 epyn'lbl B12-B18.

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16 B17

B18

Greek is full of amazing stories about gods and heroes.            MYTH

These stories describe the  actions of people such as                  HERO

Hercules and were well known in ancient Greece. One such story is that of

Daedalus, a skilful  , and his son, Icarus. Daedalus and            INVENT

Icarus were put in prison on Crete by King Minos. One day, Daedalus had a clever He decided to build giant wings from feathers and wax which would them both to escape from the island. ABLE He built the wings and gave Icarus  not to fly too close to            INSTRUCT the sun because the heat would melt the wax. They escaped, but Icarus forgot his father's  and flew too close to the sun. The wax WARN

melted and he fell into the sea, where he died.

Test 19

Tlpoqumaùme me,çcm c nponycxa.uu, oÕ03HaqeHHb1Jtt1 HOAtepŒttt1 A21-Ä28. 3mu H0Jtepa coomaemcmø.yw»n 3aÒaHldHJt Ä21-Ä28, 6 ,çomopbl-v npeÒcmaœ1eHb[ 603.MOYHb1e gapuamžlbl omaemot$. ()õgeòume H0.uep 6b1õpt1HH0?0 ('tutu eapuamna omeema.

which meant that he spent his days either serving customers In antiques at antiques fairs. Today was the day of the Redwood there. He got there early and A21 out on might sell well, like a gold cigarette case and a silver teapot.

began to walk around the stalls, occasionally sold a few A23      and it was soon lunchtime.

and he asked the dealer next to him to keep an eye on his stall

it as he A24  around. He looked at a few things attention. He was about to return to his stall when he saw a small blue been made by a famous local potter, who was very much in

Peter Madison was an antiques dealer, his small shop or twing to sell his Antiques Fair and Peter had a stall display various objects that he thought Eventually, members of the A22 stopping to examine something. Peter He decided to walk around a little while he was away.


He bought a sandwich and chewed but nothing really grabbed his vase that looked like it might have

A25  'I expect it's just an inexpensive copy,' he thought to himself. However, as soon as he picked it up, he knew that it was A26           His heart began to race in his chest. The small object in his hand was worth over twenty thousand pounds. He lifted up the price tag to see how much it was being sold for. He almost dropped the vase when he read the figure. The price on the tag was fifty pounds. Clearly the dealer didn't know what it was worth.

Very calmly, A27  a great effort to keep his voice level, Peter said to the dealer, 'How much do you want for this?' The dealer looked at him, then at the vase in his hand, sniffed and said, 'It's fifty pounds.' He paused. 'But you can have it for forty-five.' Peter reached into his pocket very slowly and pulled out his wallet. He handed the money A28 and thanked the man. He returned to his stall and sat down. 'It must be my lucky day,' he thought and smiled.

A21

l) set

 

2) came

3) looked

4) turned

 

A22

1) audience

 

2) nation

3) public

4) society

 

A23

I) items

2) individuals

3) atoms

4) units

 

A24

1) hopped

 

2) wandered

3) marched

4) stamped

 

A25

1) request

 

2) order

3) desire

4) demand

 

A26

1) actual

 

2) genuine

3) proper

4) honest

 

A27

l) doing

 

2) giving

3) making

4) putting

 

A28

1) in

 

2) out

3) back

4) over

 

ObPATLfTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeembl Ha aaÒt1H11f1 B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacnoaaauomc•H 6 pa,3Hb1.r qacnlfl.r t11ClHKCl. B4-B18 pacnoao.ycellbl a Htl.ycneñl qacmu tî.aamca. [Ipu nepenoce onwemog 6 .311ÒaHUf1X B4-B18 ÕVK6b1 3anucb16tuomcfl õC'3 npoõe.Q06 u ,3HCIK06 npenunaH11f1.

                                     Pa3neJ1       11MCbMO

omeemog Ha aaòanusž CI, C2 ucno.1b3Yñme WIAHK OTBETOB JE2.

TIPI' 6bÜIOJIHé'HUU aac)cmuù CI u C2 ocoÕoe 6HIL,waH1te oÕpamume Ha mo, Limo 6alUU omaenlbl õyðym ogemteamt.cfl mtMbKO no aanucmt, CÒeACIHHbLU B "'TAT-IKE OTBETOB vhè2. Htuccucue aanucu qePH06t1Ka He õyòym .yqunlbtoanlbcfl .9Rt•nepmo.u.

aanutuume ct30ù omaem Ecau oòHOù cmop0Hb1 ÕaaHKG' nec)ocmamotlH0, Bbl .$to.yeme ucnoabaoaantb òpyeyo cmopoHY ÕaaHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

Test 19


This is part of a letter from Jack, your English pen friend.

...Haveyvu thought about what   like to a'v the future? / haven't, but myparents said / need to start thinkivy about it. Hareyou decided whatyou want to do? How didyou

Let me know whatyou think.

Love,

Jack

 

Write back to Jack answering his questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Some scientists perform experiments on animals. However, some people say that this is cruel and unnecessary.

What can you say for and against performing Use the following plan experiments on animals? I. Introduction (State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments "for".

3.   Arguments "against".

4.   Conclusion.


Pa3aeJ1       roBopežme

Bbl nonyqume Kapmotwy, Ha KomopoÚ npeðcmaeaeHbt mpu òJ1fl ycmno¿o omaema: C3 — me-uamuqecxoe .M0Hoaoeuqecyoe 6blCKa3b16aHlže,

C4 — C)UŒIO? c lge.1b}O oãueHa cþaŒcmuqecK0ù llHCþop,uatgueù, C5 — òuaaoz c tge.1b}0 oõ.ucwa

Otlé'HOt1HOÚ 11H(þop.uažgueú. OKOHqaHUe Raycòopo aaÒaH14H onpeðeäftem 9Kaa.uenarnop. Bo e,peMÆ1 npoaeòeJ111H amoù qacmu aycaa.ueHa uòem gantlCb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

3aAaH11¶  3K3•aMeHyeMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on your school,

Remember to say:

      how big your school is

      what your school looks like

      what facilities it has

      whether you like your school, and why

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The

teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are in a sports shop. You would like to buy a Christmas present for your friend, who is a big fan of Moscow Dynamo. You only have £15 to spend.

Test 19

Before making a decision, ask the shop assistant about:

                   Moscow Dynamo products available

                   the price special offers

The teacher will play the part of the tourist information guide and will speak first.

Remember to:

                   be active and polite

                   get all the information you need

                   decide on what to buy your friend

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You and your friend work for your school magazine. You are planning to invite a local person to speak to the school and to be interviewed for the magazine. You are discussing who to invite. You can invite:

a local politician

                   a local police officer a local radio DJ

                   a local businessman/woman

                   a local sportsman/woman

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas

                   give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account

invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Test 20

                           ähžüäg@                                             merit

Extract

Section 1 Listening: third task

A Look at the third task on page 235. Listen to seven extracts from the task.

Extract I

Extract 5

Extract 2

Extract 6

Extract 3

Extract 7

Match each extract with a situation (M to A13).

Extract 4

A7 You will hear a news report about a fire.

A8 You will hear a politician talking about her career.

A9 You will hear a man talking about his house.

AIO You will hear a nurse talking to a patient,

All You will hear a woman talking about a lot of money.

A12 You will hear a singer talking about his next album.

A13 You will hear a woman talking about moving to another country.


B Listen to the extracts again and make notes to answer the questions. Be careful! The extracts are in a different

6

What's the album called?

Extract 7

     XX'hat can she quit?                  

Section 2 Reading: second task

C   Look at the task on page 237. Complete the information.

Name of tourist attraction:

Location:

Number of visitors each year:

Facilities in Visitor Centre:

Names of biomes:

Biomes contain:

Future plans:

Other events held there:

The Eden Project

(1)    Humid biome

(2)     biome

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:

third task

What kind of swimming pool will it be?

1

I'm going swimming tomorrow as r even I what I only if the weather's not very good. A bit of rain's not going to stop me!

order this time.

2

It looks as / even / what I only if it

Extract 1

 

might rain.

How long has she been there?       

3

We'll go up the mountain as I even I

Extract 2

 

what I only if the weather forecast says

What kind of building was it?       

 

it'll be fine. We don't want to take any

Extract 3

 

risks.

What kind of newspaper was it?

4

The weather's good now but as I even I

Extract 4

 

.w-baj./ n•lyif-iÿ    had

What's the person's name?        

 

the mountain?

Extract 5

5

Let's settle down I in I up I on and leave, shall we? I'm bored of this restaurant.

D   Circle the correct word to complete each sentence.

6     Have you settled down I in I up I on what style of material you want for the curtains?

7     How's the new house? Have you settled down I in I up I on yet?

8     It's time I settled down I in I up I on . I want a quieter, more stable life from now on!

Section 4 Writing: second task


F Look at the second task on page 242. Work in pairs or as a group to discuss what technological developments you think might happen in the future. Make a list.

solar-poweredcars

E Quickly read the task on page 241. Make notes to answer these questions. 1 Where are Graham and Jane?

2     What does Graham do just before he repeats his question?

3     What's Jane's answer to the question he repeats?

4     How long have they known each other?         

G Discuss whether the developments on your list will benefit humans or will create problems for people.

Section 5 Speaking: first task

H Look at the Student Card for Task 1 on page 243. Make notes to complete the information.

name of your best friend

what your best friend looks like

when you met

how you met

 

what you enjoy doing together

 


                                       Pa3neJ1           AYAMI)0BaHHe

Bbl ycabltuume 5 6b1CKa3b1daHUÙ. Ycmanoeume coomeemcmeue .ue.ycòy BblCKG'3b1BCIHU}LUt1 KOICÒO?O ¿oeopaugeeo I — 5 u ymgep.ycòeHlffiJf11, ÒCIHHbLMU 6 cnucvce A — F. Mcno.lbayúme Ra.ycòyo õYK6Y, otî03Haqarot«yo ymøepycòeHue, mœ1bK0 oÒun paa. B aaðanuu ecntb oðHO auumee ymeep.ycðeHtte. Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb ðaaycðbl. 3anecume c6011 omeenlbl 6 maõau«y.

A. I prefer watching films at the cinema. B. I'm not keen on films with special effects.

C. I have seen several very good films recently. D. Cinemas are too expensive for me these days. E. Watching films at home seems more fun to me.

Test 20


F. I am not influenced by film reviews in newspapers.

YTBepxaeH11e

1

2

3         

Bbl yc„lbltuume õeceðy Y_vpHŒtucma c npeòcmaeumeae.u oõugecmeeHHocmu.

Onpeòeaume, RCIKtte 11.3 npugeòëHHbLr ymaep.ycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomaemcrnayom coòep.ycamuo meyccma (1), KUKU'? He coomaemcmeyom (2) u O që*f 6 meyccme He CKU3t1HO, mo ecnlb Ha OCH06ClHUU meyccma Heelb3f1 ()amb nonoycume.1bH0?0, Hil omaema (3). Oõeeòume HOMep BblÕPaHHO?O BCLUU gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycJ1b11uume aanucb Ò6aycÒb1.

Al       The Friends of Fisher Park is a group of 25 children.

                    I) BepHO               2) HeBePHO                3) B ereKcere He

A2     The local council is planning to build some flats where the park is now.

                    I) BepHO               2) HeBepHO               3) B •reKc-re He CK"a3t1H0

A3 The group has just sent a letter to every councillor. 1) BepH0 2) HeBepHO 3) B ereKc•re He CKa3t1H0

A4      There are council elections every two years.

                    l) BepHO                2) HeBepH0                3) B •rek'c•re He cK'a3aH0

A5      The man has decided that he wants to be on the local council.

                    l) BepH0               2) HE'BepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKtuaHO

A6      The council will make its decision about the park next month.

                    l) BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B -reKcrre He CKa3tìH0

Test 20

Bbl vcelblžuume 6blCKC13bteaHUfi -uoÒeÙ 6 cestu paaau¼HbLt cumyatguax. Omaenužne gonpocbl no coòepycaH1110 6b1CKa.3blßaHllÙ, Bblõpac3 oò11H 11.3 npeò.aoyeHHbLr aapuaHÐ10B omeema. B aac)t1HumA7-A13 oõeeòume IguØpy I, 2 ILIU 3, oõ03HaqŒoucvyo omeežïè Komopbtù      Kauycemcfl nauõonee 6"PHbtJt. Bbl yc-lbltuume KaycÒoe ßblCKU3bteaHlže C)aaxàbl.

A7      You will hear a news report about a fire. What was its probable cause?

1)   a person

2)   lightning

3)   faulty electrical wiring

A8    You will hear a politician talking about her career. When did she become interested in politics?

1)   at school

2)   at university

3)   at work

A9 You will hear a man talking about his house. What is he going to build next? 1) an extension to the living room

2)   a swimming pool

3)  


a garage

AIO    You will hear a nurse talking to a patient. What does he want the patient to do?

1)   get out of bed

2)   eat her lunch

3)   take her tablets

All     You will hear a woman talking about a lot of money. How did she get it?

I) She won the national lottery.

2) She entered a competition in a magazine. 3) She inherited it from a relative.

A12 You will hear a singer talking about his next album. What inspired him to write the songs on the album?

1)  his success

2)  a relationship

3)  his recent tour

Al 3 You will hear a woman talking about moving to another country. What did she find difficult? I) getting a job

2) learning the language

3) meeting new people

OTBETb1 B IMAHK OTBETOB M,'

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, '-tmo omaembl Ha .3aÒaH11fl BI, A I-A 13 pacnoaaeaŒomcfl pa.3Hb1X Liacmm• t1aaHKt1. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HilYCHeÚ qacmu ÕaaHKa. flpu nepeHoce omeemog 6 aaòanuu BI ÕVKBb1 aanucbteayomcH t5ea npoõe.10ß u .31-ta,tC06 npenuHaHlffl.


                                     Pa3neJ1         I-Irrerme

YcmaH06ume coomaemcmeue me.'yt A — G mexcma.u I — 6. 3aHecume ('6011 0/716en1bl 6 maõau«y. Mcn0J1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õycgy mo.11bK0 OÒIIH paa. B aaðanuu oðna me.ua

A. UNUSUAL RELATIONSHIPS B. SIMILAR CHARACTERISTICS

C. HOME ALONE D. TWO TYPES

E. IMPORTANT MOMENTS F. MISTAKEN BELIEFS

G. MANY RESPONSIBILITIES

1     In Britain, most families are 'nuclear families'. This means that the family consists of the parents and children. Of course, there are uncles and aunts and grandparents too, but they do not have much to do with raising the children and often live a long way awav. In many other countries, the 'extended family' is more common. With the extended family, uncles, aunts and grandparents live much closer to the parents and children — sometimes even in the same building — and everyone in the family has a much closer relationship.

2    


Most teenagers say at some point: 'When I'm a parent, I'm going to give my children much more freedom than I have now.' When they do actually become parents however, they soon realise that giving a child or teenager lots of freedom is not always the best thing to do. Many parents end up hearing their children saying to them exactly the same things they said to their parents when they were young.

3     What does bringing up a child involve? Giving a child love and making a child feel safe in their environment are extremely important. So is providing food and warmth. Parents also have a dutv to teach their children the difference between right and wrong, and to make sure their children get a good education. Some parents believe that their role is also to teach children about the importance of things such as family, religion and society.

4     The English phrases 'a chip off the old block' and 'like father, like son' (or 'like mother, like daughter') are used to show the similarities between a parent and their child. These might be similarities in terms of appearance, behaviour or interests. For example, if a dad loves watching cricket and his son Eric becomes interested in cricket too, you might say, 'Eric's a chip off the old block, isn't he?'

5     'Latchkey kids' are a major problem in many countries, including Britain and the USA. These are children whose parents are still at work when they come home from school, so there is no one at home to look after them. Their parents aren't there to help them with their homework, and some of them spend hours on their own before their parents return.

6     The idea of 'quality time' is based on an understanding that the amount of time a parent spends with their child is not the only important thing. What is also important is what they do together during that time. Ten minutes of discussing problems that a teenager is facing may be much more valuable than two hours of watching a movie together in silence.

2                     3

               4                         5

6


I The Eden Project has been a tourist attraction for a long time.

2      Visitors can buy souvenirs in the Visitor Centre.

3      Both biomes are the same size.

4      Visitors can learn about the plants and trees, as well as look at them.

5      There will probably be more for visitors to see in the future.

6      It is often possible to listen to music at the Eden Project.

[Ipoqumaùme .ymeepYòeH11f1 1 — 6 u caeÒyouguÙ aa HU.MU mexcm YcmaH06ume coomaemcmaue u coðepyca}tuevt meyccma. Hanužuume I'll(þpy 1 — ecau



The Eden Project, near St Austell, is not just one of Cornwall's major tourist attractions. It is now, despite only being a few years old, one of the most popular attractions in the whole of the UK. Over a million people visit the Eden Project each year.

Tim Smit was the person responsible for turning the Eden Project from a dream into a reality. Built on the site of an old china clay quarry, the Eden Project currently consists of a Visitor Centre, which includes a café, gift shops and exhibition space, and two 'biomes'. Each biome is an enormous greenhouse. And they are enormous! The Humid Tropics biome, which contains plants and trees from tropical countries, is 100 metres wide, 200 metres long and 55 metres high. The second biome, which is called the Warm Temperate biome, is slightly smaller but still extremely impressive, being 65 metres wide, 135 metres long and 35 metres high. Visitors walk through the biomes looking at the thousands of plants and trees they contain. Information is given about each plant. The biomes also contain sculptures, waterfalls and birds and insects from the same environments that the plants come from.

Tim Smit is planning to build a third biome on the site in the next few years.

1

4

5


The Eden Project also frequently holds concerts and plays in its grounds, and has been used as a location in several films and television programmes, including the James Bond movie, Die Another Day.


flpoqumaùme me}ccm u 6bÜ10JIHume aaÒaHlffl A14420, OÕ60ÒH Illi(þpy 1, 2, 3

H0.uepy dblÕPClIlHO?0 6Œuu øapuawna omeema.

4,

Damian would never have called himself a bully. A victim of bullying himself on occasion, if he'd thought for one second that he was bullying his classmates, he would have been devastated. The idea that he bullied his friends had never even entered his head. But now he was having to face up to the fact that perhaps in certain ways he was a bully.

It had all started in the mid-morning break, when Damian and a couple of his friends were discussing what to do about Frank Rice. Frank Rice was a bully and the whole school knew it. The question was, should they tell a member of staff the next time Frank picked on one of them? Damian thought they should. Chris and Will thought that they shouldn't. As they were arguing, Damian said: 'We've got to do something. He's making people's lives a misery. It can't go on like this.' There was silence when Chris replied: 'Well, he's not the only one, you know. You should take a look in the mirror, Damian, before accusing other people. You're not perfect, you know.'

Damian was so shocked, he didn't know how to reply. He didn't know where to begin. Finally, he managed to ask: 'What on earth do you mean? You're not suggesting I'm a bully, are you? How am I like Frank Rice?'

Will explained. 'No, you're not like Frank Rice at all. Chris didn't mean that. You don't hit people, you don't want to be horrible and nasty. You're usually just trying to be funny, but sometimes the things you say do hurt people. Quite often, in fact.' 'Give me an example,' said Damian.

'Well, take yesterday, for example,' said Will, 'when we were in the changing room after football. You kept saying how Chris was such a terrible goalie, you seriously wondered if he'd been bribed by the other team.'


'I was only joking!' protested Damian. 'You know that, Chris, don't you? I was only teasing.' 'That's exactly the point,' said Will. 'You were teasing Chris. And you do that a lot. It's not very nice, you know. I could see that Chris was upset, even if you didn't notice.' 'Were you, Chris?'

'Well, I can't say I enjoyed it, to be honest. And Will's right. You do seem to do it a lot.'

The bell rang, and they went off to class. Damian found it hard to concentrate for the rest of the morning. The conversation he'd had with Will and Chris kept coming back to haunt him. Was he a bully? If he was, he certainly didn't mean to be. But there was no escaping the fact that two very good friends of his thought that his comments often hurt them.

At lunch, Damian, as usual, sat next to Chris and Will. 'Guys, I've been thinking about what we were talking about earlier and I think you're right. I just want to say that I'm really, really sorry. You're my best friends, and I'd never do anvthing to hurt you on purpose. I can see that I do sometimes say things that would upset you, and I'm going to make a real effort not to do that from now on. Still friends?'

'Of course we are, Damian,' said Chris. 'But thanks.' 'No problem,' said Will.

In the changing room that afternoon after football practice, Damian, Chris and Will were discussing the game. Will had fallen over the ball at one point, and Damian was just about to make a joke about it when he stopped himself. 'Am I allowed to say something like that?' he thought to himself. 'We are friends. We've got to be able to joke with each other. Or is it too nasty?' Damian decided not to say anything on this occasion, but he began to realise that keeping his promise to Chris and Will would not be as easy as he'd thought.

A14 From the first paragraph we learn that Damian has 1) sometimes been bullied by other people.

2)   never thought about bullying before.

3)   briefly considered bullying his classmates. 4) only been bullied once in his life.

AIS The boys disagree about whether

I) Frank will bully them again in the future.

2)   they should have told a teacher about Frank.

3)   Frank is making people feel very miserable.

4)   to tell a teacher if Frank bullies them again.

A16    When Chris tells Damian to 'take a look in the mirror', he means Damian should

1)   look at what Frank has done to him.

2)   take more care with his appearance.

3) think about his own behaviour.

4) remember that no one is perfect.

Test 20

Ali Will's explanation to Damian suggests that Frank Rice 1) never tries to make people laugh.

2)   sometimes uses physical violence.

3)   doesn't want to be nasty either.

4)   only uses language to hurt people.

AIS The example from the previous day that Will gives shows that I) Will thinks it is extremely funny when Damian teases Chris.

2)   Damian only teases Chris and never makes jokes about Will.

3)   Damian's jokes about Chris and Will can sometimes be cruel,

4)   Chris gets more upset by Damian's comments than Will does.

A19 Damian finds it difficult to concentrate in class because he 1) is angry his friends have accused him of being a bully.

2)   believes he will never be friends with Chris and Will again.

3)   is continually looked at by Will and Chris during the lessons. 4) can't stop thinking about what he's been accused of.

A20 In the changing room, Damian understands that

I) it is difficult to balance making jokes with being nice.

2) he has already broken his promise to Chris and Will.

3) keeping his promise is the most important thing to him.

4) stopping himself from saying nasty things will be impossible.

no m, m u A14-Ä20 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTU CBOU OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,          on16enlbl Ha .3aÒaHllH 132, m u A14-A20 6

Pa.3HblX Ltacmnx ÕJ1amca. B2, B3 pacnoaoyceHbt e HUYCIIC'Ù qacmu ÕaaHKCl. [Ipu nepeHoce omaemoe B .3aòaHllH-r B2, B3 õYK6bl .3anucb16ayomcH õea npoõenoe u .3,qaK06 npemmahlllfl.

                   Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTHKa neKC11Ka

Tlpoqumaùme mt'Kc•m 3ano.auume nponyc,tcu 6 npeòaoyceHlŒx noò H0Mepa.uu B4-BI I coont6emcn1BY/01UIL8f11 cþop.uaatu cat)6, HaneqamaHHbtx aa¿Qt1BHbl.MU õYK6Œuu cnpaea om

Alexander Fleming

Have you heard of penicillin? It's a type of medicine that bacteria. Bacteria can cause infections. KILL Before antibiotics , infections were a very DISCOVER serious problem.

B6         Many people                            in the past because of them.                    DIE

A doctor from Scotland, called Alexander Fleming discovered antibiotics. Fleming medicine at St. Mary's STUDY Hospital in London.

During the First World War, he worked in a hospital in France, the soldiers who had been hurt. HELP

B9       After the war, he       an important discovery. He discovered a way to kill bacteria.


BIO At the time, however, other doctors how important NOT UNDERSTAND Fleming's discovery was. Because of this, he stopped doing his experiments.

Bll It    several years for scientists to realise that Fleming TAKE had found a way to save millions of lives.

Tlpoqumaùme ,'1PUaeÒeHHblÙl Hit-we meyccm 17peoõpaayúme cu10(3a, HaneqamaHHblt' aaeaa6HbLUll                           nocae H0Jtep06 B12-B 18 mcuc, qmoõbl OHU epa.MJtamuqecKll u nuccuqecK11 coomaemcmeoaaau coòepycamuo muccma. 3anoaHtune nponycycu ntEIVEWHHblJt11 caoea.uu. Kaycòblù nponycx coonwemcmayem omÒeJ1bH0Mv .3aðaHll}0 113 epymlbl B 12-1318.

B12        Harry Houdini is said to be the greatest                             of all time.             MAGIC

He started doing his magic show professionally in the USA in 1891. In

B13      1893, he met a fellow           called Bess Rahner. They married     PERFORM three weeks later and, for the rest of Houdini's career, Bess worked as his

B14                                 on stage.                                                                                   ASSIST

B15      Houdini mainly concentrated on card tricks at the  of his   BEGIN career. It was his incredible escape acts, though, that brought him fame and great wealth.

B16     In 1904, after a four-year                          tour, Houdini returned to the     EUROPE

B17      States with cause for He had become a major star in the CELEBRATE entertainment world and audiences couldn't get enough of his

B18 and exciting act. Houdini carried on thrilling audiences DRAMA until his death in 1926, at the age of 52.

 

Test 20

 

 

 

 

 

Tlpoqumaùme meyccm c nponycwa.uu, OÕ03HatWHHbLW1 A21-A28. amu H0Atepa coomgemcmav»om aaÒaHllfL1t A21-A28, 6 KomopblX npeòcmaeaeHb1 603.UOYCHb1e eapuaffllbl omaemoe. C)õ6eÒume HOMeP 6blÕpaHHoeo eapuawna omeema.

 

'Jane, will you marry me?'

supermarket, and Jane was in own but more expensive, soup

Graham got down on one knee.

A24                                  He

It was not the most romantic of settings. Graham and Jane were in the the A21 of pointing out to Graham that the supermarket's A22 of soup was exactly the same as the more famous, next to it.

'Don't be silly, Graham,' was Jane's reply.

'I'm not being silly. I'm deadly serious.' To A23 it, 'Graham, people are looking. Get up!'

'Not until you give me an answer,' said Graham, beginning to get annoyed.

'All right. The answer's no.'

Graham paused. 'No?' he finally said. 'No? Why not? Give me one good began to feel slightly uncomfortable — physically and emotionally.

'I can't believe we're having this conversation here,' said Jane. 'Let's just finish the shopping and go home.' 'I'm not going anywhere until you've explained to me why we shouldn't get married. We love each other!'


'Of course we do,' said Jane, A25  if she was talking to a young child, 'but that doesn't mean we should get married, does it? You get married when you want to settle

A26 and make a life together. It's far too early to think about marriage. Ask me again in a year or two, if we're still going A27  together.' 'If ... if,' stammered Graham. 'You think we might not be?'

'Graham!' said Jane. 'You're being ridiculous! Now, let's not talk about it again. A28 me a packet of spaghetti, would you?'

Graham handed Jane the spaghetti. 'So, you'll think about it, then?' he asked eventually.

A21

l) focus

2) middle

3) centre

4) heart

A22

I) product

2) mark

3) brand

4) style

A23

I) present

2) exhibit

3) reveal

4) prove

A24

1) thought

2) sense

3) reason

4) cause

A25

l) as

2) even

3) what

4) only

Jane rolled her eves, let out a deep sigh, and pushed the trolley over to the breakfast cereals.

A26                  1) down                  2) in                       3) up                   4) on

A27                    I) by                        2) off                      3) out                    4) with

A28                   1) Deliver                2) Pass                    3) Donate             4) Forward

paal-tbl-r qacmnx õJtamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeubl 6 HilYHeñ qacmu Õ.QCIHRa. flpu nepenoce omeemoe 6 aaðaHUfLV B4-B 18 õYK6bl aanuc•bl€cuomcfl õea npoõeaoa u anal-COB npenu,qaHlffl.


                                     Pa3neJ1        IIUCbMO

omæmoe Ha .3aòaHllH CI, C2 ucnoab3YlUune "'7,4HK OTBETOB VE2.

õyðym OIVHU6CWlbCH moabK0 no aamŒH.M, CÒeaaHHbLU B WIAHKE OTBETOB JV2. I-IUKaKUe aanucu qePHOBtuca He õvòym yqunlblaanib('fl .9KcnepmoM.

aanutuume ceoù omøem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1 Õaamca Heòocmamot1H0, Bbl Jtoyceme ucnoab.30eamt, ()pyzyo cmop0HY ÕäCIHŒca.

You have 20 minutes to do this task.

Test 20


This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

.„Myparents often get because / spenda lot thephone talking to my friends. talk thephone too? Doyourparentsget with you? What Hoyou a/o about it? Ifyou'veyot any ideas about what about it, let me know!

Write soon,

Love,

Rebecca

 

Write back to Rebecca answering her questions.

Write 100-140 words.

Remember the rules of letter writing.

You have 40 minutes to do this task.

Comment on the following statement.

Technology is an important part of our lives. We use computers and other electronic equipment at work and in the home. However, some people believe we rely too much on machines, and that the more technology improves, the lazier and weaker humans will become.

What can you say for and against future Use the following plan technological developments? 1. Introduction (State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments "for".

3.  Arguments "against".

4.  Conclusion.

                                   Pa3neJ1        roBopeHV1e

Bbl nonyqume xapmot1KY, Ha Komopoù npeòcma6.aeHb1 mpu ,3aÒaHlffi   ycmH0?0 omæma.•

C3 — me-uamuqeocoe dblCKaab1BCIHUe,

C4 — òuaaoe c tge.1b10 oóAteua cþŒcmuqecK0ù  C5 — òuaaoe c          oõ.ueHa

OIVHOLIHOÙ uncþop.ucngueðl. (DROHqaHUe 6b1110JIHeH11H Ka.YCÒO?O .3aÒClHllH onpeòeuem 3K3ŒueHamop. Bo epe.&tH npogeðeH1151 9111017 gacmu 91•caaatŒ'Ha uòem nocmt)flHHZIH aanuct' Ha ayòuoycaccemy.

3aAaHvtq 3K3•aMeHyeMoro


STUDENT CARD

Task I (3—3.5 minutes)

Give a 2-minute talk on your best friend. Remember to say:

                   what your best friend looks like  why you like him/her

                   when and how you met

                   what you enjoy doing together

You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.

STUDENT CARD

Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)

You are interested in doing an evening course at a local college that is connected to history in some way. You are not free on Monday and Friday evenings. You would prefer to do a course that doesn't involve written homework.


Before making a decision, ask the college secretary about:

      the courses available

      when they are held

      what the course involves

      how much homework there is

The teacher will play the part of the college secretary and will speak first.

Remember to:

      be active and polite

      get all the information you need

      decide on a course

STUDENT CARD

Task 3 (3—4 minutes)

You are on holiday with a friend and it is your final day. You have time to see one more tourist attraction before leaving. You and your friend are discussing what to go and see. You can go:

      to an art gallery

      to a funfair

      to a castle

      to a beach

• to a theatre

The teacher will play the part of your friend.

Remember to:

 discuss all the options take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions come to an agreement


БЛАНКИ ОТВЕТОВ


Бланк ответов № 1

Единый государственный экзамен - ОБРАЗЕЦ

 

S

Заполнять селевой или капилврной ручкой ЧЕРНЫМИ чернилами ЗАГЛАВНЫМИ ПЕЧАТНЫМИ БУКВАМИ по следующим образцом:

A P C P E FC H I J K LMNO?Q ZSTU VWXYZ . 4 23 4567 8 9 0

Д А Д Ь 6 Ё Ё Ё Ё " 00066

 

Код

п)едмета                                         Название предмета

Подпись участника ЕГЭ

102

ВНИМАНИЕ!

Данный бланк использовать только совместно с двумя другими бланками из данного пакета

Номера заданий типа с выбором ответа из предложенных вариантов

Образец написания метки                    ЗАПРЕЩЕНЫ Будьте аккуратны, исправления Спучайный в области штрих внутри ответовквадрата может быть воспринят как метка

Замена

ошибочных

ответов на задания типа

Резерв - 4

Результаты выполнения заданий типа В с ответом в краткой форме



Macmillan Education

Between Towns Road, Oxford OX4 3PP

A division of Macmillan Publishers Limited

Companies and representatives throughout the world

Practice Tests for the Russian State Exam ISBN 960-6620-58-1

Practice Tests for the Russian State Exam, Teacheris Guide ISBN 960-6620-59-X

Text and design C) Macmillan Publishers Limited 2006

First published in 2006

All rights reserved; no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publishers.

Designed by Eleni Fine

Cover designed by Eleni Fine

Sound recordings by George at Artracks studio.

Special thanks to the following actors: Charlotte Barratt, Noelle Douglas, Gareth

Jones, James Morton, Lauren Obee, Kathv O'Donnell, Thomas Orlandi-Fantini, Andrea Phillipson, James Phillipson, Ian Robertson, Oliver Schnitzer and Erika Stiles.

Malcolm Mann and Steve Taylore-KnowIes wish to thank Joanne Chapman for her invaluable input as project manager. They would also like to thank Elena Klekovkina, without whom this book would not have been possible. Many other people gave willingly of their time and expertise during the planning and production of this book, including G.A.Kornikova, K.S.Makhmuryan, and F.Y.Amineva, and we would like to thank all of them for their support and the insights they provided. Printed and bound in China

2010 2009 2008 2007 2006

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

«Practice Testsfor the Russian State Ехат» тесты для подготовки к выпускным экзаменам по английскому языку в формате ЕГЭ. При разработке тестов учитывались требования, предъявляемые Федеральной службой по надзору в сфере образования и науки к контрольно-измерительным материалам и тестовым заданиям для единого государственного экзамена.

Учебное пособие соДержипк

      20 тестов в формате ЕГЭ;

      советы учащимся по выполнению тестовых заданий в разделах

«Аудирование», «Говорение», «Чтение» и «Письмо»;

      упражнения на закрепление лексического и грамматического материала, включая повторение видовременных форм глагола, фразовых глаголов, а также средств и способов словообразования;

      рекомендации по совершенствованию всех видов речевой деятельности;

      описание формата экзамена.

Книга для учителя включает:

      ключи к упражнениям;

      тексты аудиозаписей;

      дополнительные рекомендации к разделу «Говорение». Компоненты:

      Practice Tests for the Russian State Ехат Student's ВооК

ISBN: 9604620-58-1

      Practice Tests for the Russian State Ехат Teacher's Guide lSBN: 960-6620-59-Х • Cassettes / Audio CDs


lSBN 960-6620-58-1

MACMILLAN                                                                                9 789606 620584